agent ontinnt ani Beatentbatne Paste ’ > as Tractor ynnbontifr ean ManMn acm tye meteor athe hepa re he teartn" sgt one = ne Prenee eee ime" Se Sa Pertwee Oe Ate eee Nee ane primase ee ee ges at = to wire twits te — t ‘ y be = we : me ; . ‘ ; y ) ¢ ; ; - ‘ a = | | i ‘ — aot ~ ay . =~ i ' 1 r x ; ay =F =f _ u ” : _ - ¢ : i. ~ = : : x ss Loe 4 = 5 vos i . s i ‘ =) i is UG : { : ‘iS a fi \ : s 1 = ; ; ’ Ne ea, rs r : i 7 se = Ve yy 7 ; : 7 tn. | j - s} m = : é ; ‘ 7 J ; » \ : \ 7 f \ . "y oe" ; = : 3 t ! oi Poel - 7 mA os 2 Fe ¥ ¥ ‘ . hs : r . gs 3 i : f " ; , ; e be 1 ‘ . , | \ : = 1 " ss ' iT iy ‘ \ : ‘ a y , 2 ‘ Cos ~ us = ’ ¥ = 2 ioe ’ ; \ u \ | ee f N th 1 7 a i thy i . 5 V4 m t| ; ! ’ ; r * 1 Tow \ i N é f ! | 4 ‘ { : G | m ® *\ 1 i i \ , f f, - 1 HN ’ 4 i y Y ‘ y ‘ e f ; i A \: : ; \ b y ; i i ‘ ' d 1 . " ‘ a i {| ks rf ‘ Roe, nN ; J - - 7m ‘ ; t ' ; \ { Fi j {) us he } ) f mm ? 3 4 i ) } ‘ ‘ a A) a 5 ’ ~ 5 . ik . . * _ ‘ —e ‘ . | ' * er, ~~ ; f 5 j | ‘ j | \ | | ' { as! ye ce 8S Gna Sea os eS eT Mat la aa Saal i ana et per RE Ae ne ete lira gd AAR Teh ee AK ghee OF Pik lA ee Pay pp Cw Bw LM iy a SOP aa a na Ea ie er hel 4 i { f AS AGM Rie cca ae ANT GN Mth Or Or key ft On Seen pr Uae See Tae em A ie se whl | ey ae ’ WE Sy mae ne 6 ~ Se a ai 1b 6 JOURNAL AND PROCEEDINGS ~ |} a OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY | OF | NEW SOUTH WALES, | . | = aeee. 8 ee VOL, T. a Va ‘EDITED BY THE HONORARY SECRETARIAS. THE AUTHORS OF PAPERS ARE ALONE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE OPINIONS EXPRESSED THEREIN. | j - - ; : A i ‘4 t 2 f a) S { \ =F i ‘ “4 PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY, 5 ELIZABETH STREET NORTH, SYDNEY. - LONDON AGENTS : GEORGE ROBERTSON & Co., PROPRIETARY LIMITED, 17 Warwick Square, PATERNOSTER Row, Lonpon, E.C. 1907. ———— ee CONTENTS. VOLUME XL. OFFICERS FOR 1906-1907... py <5 te zn nee sae List or MrempBers, &c. ... ae ey - nt gee a Art. I.—PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. By H. A. LENEHAN, F.B.A.S., Acting Government Astranomer =e aa = ake Art. II.—Notes on some Plants which in drying stain paper. By J. H. Marpen, Government Botanist and Director of the Botanic Gardens, Sydney a “e E ; pa Art. III.—The testing of building materials on abrasion es the sand blast apparatus. By H. Burcuarrz, Mitarbeiter des Kéniglichen Material-priifungsamtes fiir Gross Lichterfelde, (Germany). (Communicated by W. H. WaRrRen, M. Inst. CE.) [With Plate} ~ = Ak “e me We ut Art. IV.—Vitis opaca, F.v.M., and a chemical investigation of its enlarged rootstock (tuber). By Ricnarp T. BAksEr, F.L,S8., Curator, and Henry G. SMITH, F.c.s., Assistant Come Technical Museum, Sydney. [With Plates] . ree ty Arr. V.—The Australian Melaleucas and their essential oils. By Ricuarp T. Baker, F.L.s., Curator, and Henry G. Smita, F.c.s., Assistant Curator, Technical Museum, Sydney, Part I. [With Plates | Be bay re cys Se 5 an a Arr. VI.—Port Sydney. By Lawrence Harcrave. [WithPlate] — Art. VII.—The International Rules of Botanical Nomenclature. (Adopted by the International Botanical Congress, Vienna, 1905.) By J. H. Marpen, Government Botanist and Director of the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. = ay ee bg Arr. VIII.—Notes on some Native Tribes of Australia. By R. H. MATHEWS, L.S., Associé étranger Soc. d’Anthrop. de Paris. Art. I[X.—Note on the Silurian and Devonian Rocks occurring to the West of the Canoblas Mountains near Orange, N.S. Ww. By C. A. Sussmincu, F.c.s. [With Plates] ... pe Arr. X.—Bibliography of Australian, New Zealand, and South — Sea Island Lichens, Second Paper. By Epwin Cumer. (Communicated by J. H. Marpen, F.L.s.) 7H ee vos JOURNAL PROCEEDINGS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY NEW SOUTH WALES FOR 1906. (INCORPORATED 1881.) EDITED BY THE HONORARY SECRETARIES. THE AUTHORS OF PAPERS ARE ALONE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE STATEMENTS. MADE AND THE OPINIONS EXPRESSED THEREIN. PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY, 5 ELIZABETH STREET NORTH, SYDNEY. LONDON AGENTS: GEORGE ROBERTSON & Co., PROPRIETARY LIMITED, 17 Warwick SquaRE, PaTeERNOsSTER Row, Lonpon, E.C. 1907. /P004S NOTICE. THE Roya Socirty of New South Wales originated in 1821 as the ‘“‘ Philosophical Society of Australasia”; after an interval of inactivity, it was resuscitated in 1850, under the name of the “ Australian Philosophical Society,” by which title it was known until 1856, when the name was changed to the “ Philosophical Society of New South Wales”; in 1866, by the sanction of Her Most Gracious Majesty the Queen, it assumed its present title, and was incorporated by Act of the Parliament of New South Wales in 1881. TO AUTHORS. Authors of papers desiring illustrations are advised to consult the editors (Honorary Secretaries) before preparing their drawings. Unless otherwise specially permitted, such drawings should be carefully executed to a large scale on smooth white Bristol board in intensely black Indian ink, so as to admit of the blocks being prepared directly therefrom, in a form suitable for photographic “‘process.” The size of a full page plate in the Journal is 44 in. x 6#in. The cost of all original drawings, and of colouring plates must be borne by Authors. ERRATA. Page 130, line 8 from bottom, for ‘‘The Canoblas have resulted from the building up of voleanic material upon the partly dissected Lithgow plain,” read “The Canoblas have resulted from the building up of volcanic material, some part of which, at least, has been deposited upon the partly dissected Lithgow plain.” Page 132, line 14 from top, 3 feet should read 2 feet. Page 155, sixth line from top, for 0°60, read 0°06. Page 155, eighth line from top, for CaO, read CoO. Page 155, fourth line from bottom, for 100°68, read 100°14. Page xutv1., line 9 from bottom, for ‘‘of the Murray,” read “ of the waters of the Murray.” Page xLvil., line 18 from bottom, for ‘‘’7256,” read ‘‘ 7305.” Page Li1r., line 13 from bottom, for ‘‘ Mr.” read “ Dr.” Page tiv., last line of footnote, for “ River Resources,” read ‘“ Mineral Resources.”’ Page ty., line 2 from bottom, (Map showing rainfall lines not printed). Page Lxxix., line 14 from top, for “two,” read “ five.” The following publications of the Society, if in print, can be obtained at the Society’s House in EHlizabeth-street:— Transactions of the Philosophical Society, N.S. W., 1862-5, pp. 374, out of print. Vol. 1. Transactions of the Royal Society, N.S. W., 1867, pp. 83, 39 bh) II. III. TY. V. AMD I VII. VIII. IX. x. Journal and Proceedings XI, XII. XII. XIV. XV. XVI. XVII. XVIII. XIX. XX. XXI. XXII. XXIII. XXIV. XXV. XXVI. XXVII. XXVIII. XXIX. XXX. XXXI. XXXII. XXXII. XXXIV. XXXV. XXXVI. XXXVII. XXXVITI. XXXIX. xL. 39 9? bh) 29 PUBLIC ALLON:: O- 9° 99 ° 1868, 1869, 1870, 1871, 1872, -1873, 1874, 1875, 1876, 1877, 1878, 1879, 1880, 1881, 1882, 1883, 1884, 1885, 1886, 1887, 1888, 1889, 1890, 1891, 1892, 1893, 1894, 1895, 1896, 1897, 1898, 1899, 1900, 1901, 1902, 1903, 1904, 1905, 1906, »» L205 P(e »» LOG; 99 72, Pn ne ») LOA, kite 9) 200, 9) OOD, 95» 30D, ., 024, price 10s.6d. »» 255, Me) ,, 440, ”» 327, 5» 324, 5, 224, 5» 240, pens »» 296, »» B90: Bag », 290, ,, 348, 5, 426, », 530, 57 308; ,, 600, »» 568, ,, 626, 5, 476, 39 400, ,, 484, 2 DBL, 5 Dots ,, 663, ,, 604, »» 274, 5, 368, 99 99 CONTENTS. VOLUME XL. OFFICERS FOR 1906-1907... List oF Memsers, &c. ART. ART. ART. ART. ART. ART. ART. ART. ART. ART. I.—PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. By H. A. LENEHAN, F.RB.A.S., Acting Government Astranomer II.—Notes on some Plants which in drying stain paper. By J. H. Marpen, Government Botanist and Director of the Botanic Gardens, Sydney IlI.—The testing of building materials on abrasion ie the sand blast apparatus. By H. Burcuartz, Mitarbeiter des Koéniglichen Material-priifungsamtes fiir Gross Lichterfelde, (Germany). (Communicated by W. H. WaRReEN, M. Inst. CE.) [With Plate] IV.—Vitis opaca, F.v.M., and a chemical investigation of its enlarged rootstock (tuber). By Ricuarp T. BAKER, F.L,S8., Curator, and Henry G. SMITH, F.c.s., Assistant Curator, Technical Museum, Sydney. [With Plates] .. V.—The Australian Melaleucas and their essential oils. By RicHarp T. BAKER, F.L.S., Curator, and Henry G. SMITH, F.c.s., Assistant Curator, Technical Museum, Ber ante: [With Plates | VI.—Port Sydney. By Lawrence HARGRAVE. ee VII.—The International Rules of Botanical Nomenclature. (Adopted by the International Botanical Congress, Vienna, 1905.) By J. H. Marpen, Government Botanist and Director of the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. VIII.—Notes on some Native Tribes of Australia. By R. H. MATHEWS, L.S., Associé étranger Soc. d’Anthrop. de Paris. 1X.—Note on the Silurian and Devonian Rocks occurring to the West of the Canoblas Mountains near Orange, N.S.W. By C. A. Sussmitcu, F.a.s. [With Plates} X.—Bibliography of Australian, New Zealand, and South Sea Island Lichens, Second Paper. By Epwin CHEEL. (Communicated by J. H. Marpen, F.u.s.) Ae ant 39 45 52 60 69 74: 95 130 141 . (vi.) Pager Art. XI.—Analyses of Chocolate Shale and of Tufaceous Sand- stone from the Narrabeen Series. By S. G. Watton, Junior Demonstrator, University of Sydney. With a petrological description by R. 8. BuNNEY, B.A. Steams by Prof. LIVERSIDGE, F.R.S.) ras 7s xe ae we 1b4 Arr. XII.—The rate of decay of the Excited Radio-activity from the Atmosphere in Sydney. By S.G. Lussy, B.a., and T. EwING, B.Sc. (Communicated by Prof. Pottocr.) ... o. “SB Art. XIII.—Gold Nuggets from New Guinea showing a concentric structure, By A. LiveRsIDGE, LL.D., F.R.S., Professor of Chemistry in the University of Sydney. [With Plates] ... 161 Arr. XIV.—Analyses of Roman Glass from Silchester, with special reference to the amount of Manganese and Iron present. By C. J. Wurtz, Caird Scholar, University of Sydney. (Communicated by Prof. LiversIDGE, F.RB.8.)... oe et, RB ENGINEERING SECTION. Arr. XV.—Washinz and Grading Sand for Concrete. i W. E. Cook, M.C.E., M.Inst.C.E. ... : te T; Art. XVI.—Notes on Wharf Construction, sydney Harbour. ig H. D. Wats, B.A.1., T.c. Dub., M.Inst.CE. [With Plates] ... Xx1v. Arr. XVII.—The available water derivable from gathering grounds, the loss, the reason for such loss, and the relation between rainfall and discharge of the Murray River and its tributaries. By R. 'T. McKay, Assoc. M. Inst.C.E. [With Plates] Xuv1. Art. XVIII.—Irrigation Work in California, and its relation to the transmission of electricity. By T. Rooks, Assoc, M. Inst.C E. LXXXII. Art. XIX.—Transverse tests of Jarrah made at Sydney Technical College. By James Naneus, F.1.A. [With Plates]... aca, “Re ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS ate Ann REP sar be Bs a: PROCEEDINGS OF THE ENGINEERING SECTION ... 55: BHA sons ARE INDEX TO VoLumE XL. ... wi Dai ie oP “oe (xxv.) Aopal Dociety of Ale South Wales. @ err ietey SE) @reu Lh OOG-1 907. Patron: HIS EXCELLENCY HENRY STAFFORD, BARON NORTHCOTE, G.C.M.G., G.C.I.E., C.B. Governor-General of the Commonwealth of Australia. Vice-Patron: HIS EXCELLENCY ADMIRAL SIR HARRY HOLDSWORTH RAWSON, k.c.B. Governor of the State of New South Wales. President: Prof. T. P. ANDERSON STUART, m.p., uu.p. Vice-Presidents: Prof. WARREN,M. Inst. C.E., Wh.Sc.; F. H. QUAIFE, m.a., m.v. H. C. RUSSELL, B.a., c.u.c¢., F.R.S. | H. A. LENEHAN, F.R.a.s. Hon. Treasurer: D. CARMENT, ¥.1.A., F.F.A. Hon. Secretaries: J. H. MAIDEN, F.1.s. | G. H. KNIBBS, F.R.a.s.t * (Succeeded by F. B. GUTHRIE, F.1.c., F.c.s., from 27 June, 1906.) Members of Council: S. H. BARRACLOUGH, B.z.,mu.u.e.| Prof. LIVERSIDGH, tt.p., F.r.s. Heb. GU TPERIE, 1:1.c:,, 2 .¢:5. R. GREIG SMITH, pv. sc. G. H. HALLIGAN, F.a.s. WALTER SPENCER, m.p. W. M. HAMLET, F.1c., F.c.s. J. STUART THOM T. H. HOUGHTON, M. Inst. 0.E. H. D. WALSH, B.E., M. Inst. O.E. Assistant Secretary: W.H. WEBB. FORM OF BEQUEST. E bequeath the sum of £ to the Roya Society oF New Soutu Wates, Incorporated by Act of the Parliament of New South Wales in 1881, and I declare that the receipt of the Treasurer for the time being of the said Corporation shall be an effectual discharge for the said Bequest, which I direct to be paid within calendar months after my decease, without any reduction whatsoever, whether on account of Legacy Duty thereon or otherwise, out of such part of my estate as may be lawfully applied for that purpose. [Those persons who feel disposed to benefit the Royal Society of New South Wales by Legacies, are recommended to instruct their Solicitors to adopt the above Form of Bequest. | LIST OF THE MEMBERS . OF THE Aopal Society of slew South Wales. P Members who have contributed papers which have been published in the Society’s Transactions or Journal; papers published in the Transactions of the Philosophical Society are also included. The numerals indicate the number of such contributions. { Life Members, Elected. 1877 1895 1904 1906 1890 1898 1905 1903 1902 1899 1878 1894. 1900 1894 1896 1895 1906 1894 1877 1876 1900 1905 1906 P5 PZ ley ea al Eg Abbott, W. E., ‘ Abbotsford, Wingen. Adams, J. H. M., Broughton Cottage, St. James’ Rd., Waverley. Adams, William John, m.1. Mech. £., 163 Clarence-street. Adams, Walter E., Assistant Engineer, Sydney Harbour Trust, Circular Quay. Allan, Percy, M, Inst. C.F., Assoc. Am. Soc. C.E, Public Works Depart- ment, Sydney. Alexander, Frank Lee, c/o Messrs. Goodlet and Smith Ld., Cement Works, Granville. Anderson, Charles, M.a., B.sc., Edin., ‘ Waratah,’ Lower Ocean- street, Double Bay. Arnot, Arthur James, Assoc. M. Inst.C E., M.I.Mech. E., M.I.E.E., Elec- trical Engineer, 83 Pitt-street. Arnott, John M., ‘ Strathfield,’ Strathfield. Atkinson, A. A., Chief Inspector of Collieries, Department of Mines, Sydney. Backhouse, Alfred P., u.a., District Court Judge, ‘ Melita,’ Elizabeth Bay. Baker, Richard Thomas, F.L.s.,Curator, Technological Museum. Bale, Ernest, c.z., Rockhampton. {Balsille, George, ‘Lauderdale, N.E. Valley, Dunedin, N.Z. Barff, H. B., u.a., Registrar, Sydney University. Barraclough, S. Henry, B.E., M.M.E., Assoc, =. Inst. C.E., M. I. Mech. E., Memb. Soc. Promotion Eng. Education ; Memb. Internat. Assoc. Testing Materials; Lecturer in Mechanical En- gineering, Sydney University; p.r. ‘Marmion,’ Victoria- street, Lewisham. Basnett, Nathaniel James, Accountant, ‘ Loorose,’ Punch-st., Mosman. Baxter, William Howe, Chief Surveyor, Existing Lines Ofitice, Railway Department, Bridge-street. Belfield, Algernon H., ‘ Eversleigh,’ Dumaresq. Benbow, Clement A., 48 College-street. Bender, Ferdinand, Accountant and Auditor, 21 Elizabeth- street, North. Bignold, Hugh Baron, Barrister-at-Law, Chambers, Went- worth Court, 64 Elizabeth-street. Binnie, Herbert, 524 Kent-st.; p.r. ‘Seabright,’ Woollahra Pt.. Elected 1901 1905 1888 1893 1898 1905 1879 1904 1891 1893 1876 1891 1902 1878 1876 1906 1903 1898 1890 1880 1904 1904 1900 1876 1897 1901 1891 1903 1879 1885 1896 i (x) Birks, Lawrence, B. Sc., Assoc. M. Iust.C.E., A.M.I.C.E., F.4.8., City Electrical Engineer, Christchurch, New Zealand. Blakemore, George Henry, General Manager, Great Cobar Limited, Lithgow. {Blaxland, Walter, F.R.c.s. Eng., u.R.c.P, Lond., Fremantle, West Australia. Blomfield, Charles E., B.c.z. Melb., ‘ Woombi,’ Kangaroo Camp, Guyra. Blunno, Michele, Licentiate in Science (Rome), Government Viticultural Expert, Department of Agriculture, Sydney. Board, Peter, m.a. Syd., Under Secretary and Director of Education, Department of Public Instruction, Sydney. tBond, Albert, 131 Bell’s Chambers, Pitt-street. Bosch, Ernest, Consulting Optician, Mutual Life Building, Martin Place. Bowman, Archer §S., B.x., *Keadue,” Elizabeth Bay Road. Bowman, John, Assoc. M. Inst.c.E., C/o T. A. Kemmis, Esq., 163 Phillip-street. Brady, Andrew John, Lic. K. & Q. Coll. Phys. Irel., Lic. R. Coll. Sur. Irel., 83 Lyons Terrace, Hyde Park. Brennand, Henry J. W., B.A., M.B., ch. M. Syd., F.R.A.S., F.G.8., 231 Macquarie-street. Brereton, Victor Le Gay, Solicitor, Royal Chambers, Hunter- street; p.r. ‘Osgathorpe,’ Gladesville. tBrooks, Joseph, F.R.A.S., F.B.G.S., ‘Hope Bank,’ Nelson-street, Woollahra. Brown, Henry Joseph, Solicitor, Newcastle. Brown, James B., Resident Master, Technical School, Gran- ville; p.r. ‘ Kingston,’ Merrylands. Bruck, Ludwig, Medical Publisher, 15 Castlereagh-street. tBurfitt, W. Fitzmaurice, B.A., B.sc., M.B., ch.m. Syd., 311 Glebe Road, Glebe Point. Burne, Dr. Alfred, Dentist, 1 Lyons Terrace, Liverpool street. Bush, Thomas James, w.Inst.cE, Australian Gas-Light Com- pany, 153 Kent-street. Cambage, Richard Hind, F.u.s., Chief Mining Surveyor, Park Road, Burwood. Cameron, John Mindoro, Assoc. M Inst.c.E., Public Works, Dept. Canty, M., ‘ Rosemont,’ 18 York-street, Wynyard Square. Cape, Alfred J., u.a. Syd.,‘ Karoola,’ Edgecliffe Rd., Edgecliffe. P 3| Cardew, John Haydon, assoc. M. Inst. C.E., L.S., 75 Pitt-street. Card, George William, a.R.s.M., F.G.s., Curator and Mineralogist to the Geological Survey, N.S.W., Department of Mines. Carment, David, F.1.4. Grt. Brit. & Irel., F.f.a. Scot., Australian Mutual Provident Society, 87 Pitt-st. Hon. Treasurer. Carslaw, H.S., m.a., p.se, Professor of Mathematics, Sydney University. Glebe. P 1/tChard, J. 8., Licensed Surveyor, Armidale. Chisholm, William, m.p. Lond., 1389 Macquarie-street, North. P 2| Cook, W.E., u.c.z. Melb., mu. mst.c.z., Water and Sewerage Board, North Sydney. Elected 1904 1903 1876 1906 1876 1882 1892 1886 1905 1875 1890 1876 1877 1886 1892 1885 1877 1899 1894 1875 1880 1906 1876 1899 1873 1906 sea P3 P18 Pet EZ eek Bl2 (x1.) Cooksey, Thomas, Pn, p., B. 8. Lond., F.1.c., Second Government Analyst; p.r. ‘ Clissold,’ Calypso Avenue, Mosman. Cooper, David John, m.a., ‘Grasmere,’ 151 Stanmore Road, Stanmore. Codrington, John Frederick, m.n.c.s. Eng., .R.¢.p. Lond,, L.R.c.P. Hdin.. ‘ Wynwood,’ Wahroonga. Colley, David John K., Superintendent Royal Mint, Sydney. Colyer, J. U. C., ‘Malvern,’ Collingwood and Seymour-streets, Drummoyne. Cornwell, Samuel, Australian Brewery, Bourke-st., Waterloo. Cowdery, George R., Assoc. M. Inst. AE, ‘Glencoe,’ Torrington Road, Strathfield. Crago, W. H., m.r.c.s. Hng., u.R.c.P. Lond., 16 College-street, Hyde Park. Dampney, Gerald F., Fellow of the Society of Chemical Industry, ‘Doonbah,’ Hunter’s Hill. Dangar, Fred. H., c/o Messrs. Dangar, Gedye, & Co., Mer- cantile Bank Chambers, Marearet-street. Dare, Henry Harvey, M.2., Assoc. M. Inst.c.E, Public Works Department. Darley, Cecil West, m. inst.c.z., Australian Club, Sydney. Darley, The Right Hon. Sir Frederick, p.c., ¢.c,M.G., B.A., Chief Justice, Supreme Court. David, T.W. Edgeworth, 8.A., F.G S.,F.R.8., Professor of Geology and Physical Geography, Sydney University, Glebe. Davis, Joseph, M. Inst. cz, Under Secretary, Department of Public Works. Deane, Henry, M.A., M. Inst.c.E., Equitable Building, George-st.; p.r. ‘ Blanerne,’ Wybalena Road, Hunter’s Hill. Deck, John Feild, u.p. Univ. St. Andrews, u.R.c.e. Lond., M B.C.S. Eng., 203 Macquarie-st.; p.r. 92 Elizabeth-st,, Ashfield. De Coque, J. V., c/o Messrs. Gibbs, Bright & Co.,37 Pitt-st. Dick, James Adam, B.A. Syd., M.B., c.M. Edin., ‘ Catfoss,’ Belmore Road, Randwick. Dixon, W. A., F.c.s., Fellow of the Institute of Chemistry of Great Britain and Ireland, 97 Pitt-street. Dixson, Thomas Storie, u.B. EHdin., Mast. Surg. Edin., 151 Macquarie-street Dixson, William, ‘ Abergeldie,’ Summer Hill, Docker, Ernest B., u.a. Syd., District Court Judge, ‘ Eltham,’ Edgecliffe Road. Duckworth, A., F.n.u.s., A.M.P. Society, 87 Pitt-st.; p.r. ‘Tren- tham,’ Woollahra. Du Faur, E., F.n.a.s., ‘Flowton,’ Turramurra. Epps, William, Secretary, Royal Prince Alfred Hospltal, Camperdown, Sydney. 1879 | P 4| Etheridge, Robert, Junr., s.p., Curator, Australian Museum ; p.r. ‘ Inglewood,’ Colo Vale,’ N.S.W. Elected 1876 1904 1877 1896 1868 1887 1902 1881 1888 | 1900 1879 | 1881 1905 | 1904 | | 1899 | 1881 | 1899 | 1876 | 1879 1859 1906 | 1906 1897 | | 1891 | P1 1899 | P 2 1891 |P 11 iP? (xii. ) Evans, George, Fitz Evan Chambers, Castlereagh-street. Evans, James W., Chief Inspector, Weights and Measures; p.r. ‘Glenthorne,’ 4 Railway-street, Petersham. {Fairfax, Edward Ross, 8S. M. Herald Office, Hunter-street. Fairfax, Geoffrey E., S. M. Herald Office, Hunter-street. Fairfax, Sir James R., Knt., S. M. Herald Office, Hunter-st. Faithfull, R. L., u.p., New York (Coll. Phys. & Surg.), L.R.c.P. L.s.A. Lond., 18 Wylde-street. Faithfull, William Percy, Barrister-at-Law, Australian Club. Fiaschi, Thos., M.D., m.ch. Pisa, 149 Macquarie-street. Fitzhardinge, Grantly Hyde, m.a. Syd., District Court Judge, ‘Red Hill,’ Beecroft, Northern Line. {Flashman, James Froude, m.p. Syd., Jersey Road, Burwood. Fleming, Edward G., A.m.1.8.E., 16 O’Connell-street. j[Foreman, Joseph, u.R.c.s. Eng., u.k c.P. Hdin., 141 Macquarie-st. Foster, The Hon. W. J., kK.c., ‘Thurnby,’ 35 Enmore Road, Newtown. Foy, Mark, ‘Eumemering,’ Bellevue Hill, Woollahra. Fraser, James, m. Inst. c.E., Engineer-in-Chief for Existing Lines, Bridge-street ; p.r. ‘Arnprior,’ Neutral Bay. French, J. Russell, General Manager, Bank of New South Wales, George-street. | Furber, T. F., ¥.n.4.s., ‘Wavertree, Kurraba Road, Neutral Bay. Garran, R. R., u.a., c.m G., Commonwealth Offices, Spring-st., Melbourne. George, W. R., 318 George-street. Gerard, Francis, ‘ The Grange,’ Monteagle, near Young. 'Goodlet, J. H., ‘Canterbury House,’ Ashfield. | Gosche, Vesey Richard, Consul for Nicaragua, 15 Grosvenor-st. | Gosche, W. A. Hamilton, Electrical Engineer, 40 - 42 Clarence- street. / Gould, Major The Hon. Albert John, Senator, ‘Eynesbury,’ | Edgecliffe. Grimshaw, James Walter, mM. Inst. C.E., M. I. Mech. E., &., C/o W. Tarleton, 98 Pitt-street. ; |Gummow, Frank M., u.c.z., Vickery’s Chambers, 82 Pitt-st. Guthrie, Frederick B., F.1.c., F.c.s., Chemist, Department of Agriculture, 186 George-street, Sydney. Hon. Secretary. Halligan, Gerald H., r.a-s., ‘Riversleigh,’ Hunter’s Hill. Halloran, Aubrey, Ba., Lu.B., Savings Bank Chambers, Moore-street. Elected 1892 (xiii.) Halloran, Henry Ferdinand, t.s., 82 Pitt-street. 1887 |P7/| Hamlet, William M., F.1.c., r.cs., Member of the Society of 1905 1881 1887 1884 1900 1890 1891 1900 1906 1899 1899 1884 1905 1876 1896 1892 1906 1901 1904 1905 1905 1891 1906 | 1894 1995 1904 1903 1904 1905 1902 1884 1867 Pl P19 Jel P2 Pt P3 Pal P2 P2 P2 P2 Public Analysts; Government Analyst, Health Depart- ment, Macquarie-street, North. Harker, George, pD.sc., 35 Boulevarde, Petersham. tHarris, John, ‘ Bulwarra,’ Jones-street, Ultimo. tHargrave, Lawrence, Wunulla Road, Woollahra Point. Haswell, William Aitcheson, M.A., D.Sc, F.R.S., Professor of Zoology and Comparative Anatomy, University, Sydney ; p.r. ‘ Mimihau,’ Woollahra Point. Hawkins, W. E., Solicitor, 88 Piti-street. Haycroft, James Isaac, m.n. Queen’s Univ. Irel., M. Inst. CE. 1, Assoc. M. Can. Soc. C.E., Assoc. M. Am, Soc. C.E., L.S., ©The Grove,’ off Queen-street, Woollahra. Hedley, Charles, F.u.s, Assistant in Zoology, Australian Museum, Sydney. Helms, Richard, Experimentalist, Department of Agriculture. Henning, Edmund Tregenna, B.n. Syd.,‘ Passy,’ Hunter’s Hill. Henderson, J., F.R.E.S., Manager, City Bank of Sydney, Pitt-st. Henderson, S., M.A., Assoc. M. Inst. .E, Equitable Building, George-street. Henson, Joshua B., Assoc. M.Inst.c-E., Hunter District Water Supply and Sewerage Board, Newcastle. Hill, John Whitmore, Architect, ‘Willamere,’ May’s Hill, Parramatta. Hirst, George D., ¥.R.A.S., 379 George-street. Hinder, Henry Critchley, u.B.,c.m. Syd., Elizabeth-st., Ashfield. Hodgson, Charles George, 157 Macquarie-street. Hodgson, Ralph Vivian, Barrister-at-Law, Wentworth Court, Elizabeth-st.; p.r. ‘ Tower Cottage,’ Old South Head Road. Holt, Thomas §., ‘ Sutherland House,’ Sylvania. Holt, Rev. William John, m.a., St. Marys. Hooper, George, Registrar, Sydney Technical College; p.r. ‘Branksome,, Henson-street, Summer Hill. Hoskins, George J., M.1. viech.E., Burwood Road, Burwood. Houghton, Thos. Harry, M. Inst. c.E., M. I. Mech. E., 63 Pitt.street. Howle, Walter Creswell, Medical Practitioner, Pambula,N.S.W. Hunt, Henry A., F.R Met. soc, Commonwealth Meteorologist, Melbourne. Hyde, Ellis, Analyst, 27 York-street. Jaquet, John Blockley, a.x.s.u., F.48., Acting Chief Inspector of Mines, Geological Surveyor, Department of Mines. Jenkinson, Edward H., m.1. Mech. £., 15 Macquarie Place. Jenkins, R. J. H., Fisheries Commissioner, ‘ Pyalla,’ 184 Selwyn- street. Moore Park. Jensen, Harold Ingemann, B. sc., Macleay Fellow of the Linnean Society of New South Wales, Sydney University. Jones, Henry L., Assoc. Am. Soc. C.E., 14 Martin Place. tJones, Llewellyn Charles Russell, Solicitor, Falmouth Cham- bers, 117 Pitt-street. Jones, Sir P. Sydney, Knt., m.p. Lond., ¥.R.c.s. Eng., 16 College street, Hyde Park; p.r. ‘ Llandilo,’ Boulevard, Strathfield. Elected 1876 | P 2 1878 1903|P1 1881 |P 17 1872 |P 56) 1906 | 1884 | 1887 (xiv.) Josephson, J. Percy, Assoc. M. Inst.c.E., Stephen Court, 81 Eliza- beth-street; p.r. ‘ Moppity,’ George-street, Dulwich Hill. Joubert, Numa, ‘ Terranora,’ Chinderah, Tweed River. Kater, The Hon. H. E., J.p., u.u.c., Australian Club. Keele, Thomas William, m.mst.c.z, President, Metropolitan Board of Water Supply and Sewerage, 341 Pitt-street. Keenan, Rev. Bernard, p.p. etc., ‘ Royston,’ Rose Bay. Kent, Harry C., M.A., F.8.1.B.A., Bell’s Chambers, 129 Pitt-st. Kennedy, Thomas, Assoc. M. Iust C.E,, Public Works, Department. Kidd, Hector, M. Inst. C.E., M. I. Mech. E., ‘ Craig Lea,’ 15 Mansfield- street, Glebe Point. King, Christopher Watkins, Assoc, M. Inst. C.E., L.S., Public Works. Department, Newcastle. King, Kelso, 120 Pitt-street. | Kirkealdie, David, Commissioner, New South Wales Govern- ment Railways, Sydney. Knaggs, Samuel 'T., mM.p. Aberdeen, F.x.c.s. Irel., 1 Lyons Terrace, Hyde Park. Knibbs, G. H., F.R.A.s., Memb. Internat. Assoc. Testing Materials; Memb. Brit. Sc. Guild; Commonwealth Statis- tician, Melbourne. | Knox, Edward W., ‘ Rona,’ Bellevue Hill, Double Bay. | Lee, Alfred, Merchant, ‘Glen Roona,’ Penkivil-st., Bondi. Lenehan, Henry Alfred, F.R.A.s., Government Astronomer, Sydney Observatory. Vice President. Lindeman, Charles F., Wine Merchant, Jersey Rd., Strathfield. Lingen, J. T., m.a. Cantab., 167 Phillip-street. Little, Robert, ‘The Hermitage,’ Rose Bay. Liversidge, Archibald, ma. Cantab., LL D., F.R.S., Hon. F.RB.8. Edin., Assoc. Roy. Sch. Mines, Lond.; F C.s., F.G.8., F.B.G.8.3 Fel. Inst. Chem. of Gt Brit. and [rel.; Hon. Fel. Roy. Historical Soc. Lond.; Mem. Phy. Soc. Lond.; Mineral- ogical Society, Lond.; Edin. Geol. Soc.; Mineralogical Society, France; Corr. Mem. Edin. Geol. Soc.; New York Acad. of Sciences; Roy. Soc., Tas.; Roy. Soc., Queensland ; Senckenberg Institute, Frankfurt; Société d’ Acclimat., Mauritius; Foreign Corr. Indiana Acad. of Sciences; Hon. Mem. Roy. Soc., Vict.; N. Z. Institute; K. Leop. Carol. Acad., Halle a/s; Professor of Chemistry in the University of Sydney, The University, Glebe; p.r. ‘The Octagon,’ St. Mark’s Road, Darling Point. Loney, Charles Augustus Luxton, M. Am. Soc. Refr. E., Equi- table Building, George-st. MacCormick, Alexander, m.p., c.m. Edin., u.R.c.s. Eng., 185 Macquarie-street, North. MacCulloch, Stanhope H., u.B., c.m. Hdin., 24 College-street. Elected 1892 1897 1878 1868 1908 189] 1904 1906 1891 1893 1876 1904 1880 1903 1876 1901 1894 1900 1899 1882 1883 1906 1880 1897 P2 Ed Pl Ee (xv.) McDonagh, John M., B.a., M D., u.R.C.P. Lond., F.B.¢.8. Irel., 173 Macauarie-street, North. MacDonald, C. A., c.z., 63 Pitt-street. MacDonald, Ebenezer, J.p., c/o Perpetual Trustee Co. Ld., 2 Spring-street. MacDonnell, William J., F.R.a.s., 4 Falmouth Chambers, 117 Pitt-street. McDonald, Robert, s.p., Acting Under Secretary for Lands; p.r. ‘ Wairoa,’ Holt-street, Double Bay. McDouall, Herbert Crichton, m.R.c.s. Hng., L.R.c.P. Lond, D.P.H. Cantab., Hospital for Insane, Gladesville. MacFarlane, Edward, y.p., Under Secretary for Lands, Chief Surveyor of the State, N.S.W.; Chairman Local Govern- ment Advisory Board; F.R.A.s., Mem. Inst. Surv. N.S.W.; ‘St. Julians, Wycombe and Karraba Roads, Neutral Bay. McIntosh, Arthur Marshall, Dentist, ‘Glen Moid,’ Findlay Avenue, Chatswood. McKay, BR. T., Assoc. M.Inst..E. ‘Tranquilla,’ West-st., North Sydney. McKay, William J. Stewart, B. Sv., M.B., Ch. M., Cambridge-street, Stanmore. Mackellar, The Hon. Charles Kinnaird, M.t.c., u.B., o.m. Glas., Equitable Building, George-street. McKenzie, Robert, Sanitary Inspector, (Water and Sewerage Board), ‘Stonehaven Cottage,’ Bronte Road, Waverley. McKinney, Hugh Giffin, m.z., Roy. Univ. Irel., M. Inst. C.E., Exchange, 56 Pitt-street; p.r. ‘ Dilkhusha,’ Fuller’s Road, Chatswood. McLaughlin, John, Solicitor, Clement’s Chambers, 88 Pitt-st. MacLaurin, The Hon. Sir Henry Normand, M.L.c., M.A., M.D., L.R.C.s. Hdin., uu.D. St. Andrews, 155 Macquarie-street. McMaster, Colin J., Chief Commissioner of Western Lands; p.r. Wyuna Road, Woollahra Point. McMillan, Sir William, ‘ Logan Brae,’ Waverley. MacTaggart, A. H., p.p.s. Phil. U.S.A., King and Phillip-sts. MacTaggart, J. N. C., m.z. Syd., Assoc. M. Inst.C.E. Water and Sewerage Board, 341 Pitt-street. Madsen, Hans F., ‘ Hesselmed House,’ Queen-st., Newtown. Maiden, J. Henry, s.p., F.L.s., Hon. Fellow Roy. Soc., S.A. Hon. Memb. Nat. Hist Soc., W.A.; Netherlands Soc. for Promotion of Industry; Philadelphia Coll. Pharm.; Pharm. Soc. N.S.W.; Brit. Pharm. Conf; Corr. Fellow Therapeu- tical Soc., Lond.; Corr. Memb. Pharm. Soc. Great Britain ; Bot. Soc. Edin.; Soc. Nac. de Agricultura (Chile); Soc. d’ Horticulture d’ Alger; Union Agricole Calédonienne ; Soc. Nat. ete., de Chérbourg; Roy. Soc., Tas.; Inst. Nat. Genévois; Government Botanist and Director, Botanic Gardens, Sydney. Hon. Secretary. Maitland, Louis Duncan, Dental Surgeon, 6 Lyons’ Terrace, Liverpool-street. Manfred, Edmund C., Montague-street, Goulburn. Marden; John, B.A., M.A., LL.B. Melb., uu.p. Syd., Principal. Presbyterian Ladies’ College, Sydney. Elected 1875 |P 21 1903 1896 | P 7 1905 1887 1903 1889 | P 8 1879 1877 1879 1887 1876| | 1893 | P 1| 1901 1891 | 1893 1903 1896 1875 1891 1883 1906 19038 1880 1878 1906 1901 1899 (xvi.) Mathews, Robert Hamilton, i s., Assoc. Etran. Soc. d’ Anthrop. de Paris; Cor. Mem. Anthrop. Soc., Washington, U.S.A.; Cor. Mem. Anthrop. Soc., Vienna; Cor. Mem. Roy. Geog. Soc. Aust. Queensland; ‘Carcuron,’ Hassall-st., Parramatta. Meggitt, Loxley, Manager Co-operative Wholesale Society, Alexandria. Merfield, Charles J., ¥F.R.a.s., Mitglied der Astronomischen Gesellschaft, Observatory Sydney. Miller, James Edward, Barton-st., Cobar, Miles, George E., u.R.c.p. Lond., u.R.c.s. Eng., The Hospital, Rydalmere, near Parramatta. Minell, W. Percy, Incorporated Accountant, Martin Chambers, Moore-street. Mingaye, John C. H., F.1¢., F.c.s., Assayer and Analyst to the Department of Mines, Government Metallurgical Works, Clyde; p.r. Campbell-street, Parramatta. Moore, Frederick H., Illawarra Coal Co., Gresham-street. {Mullens, Josiah, F.R.a.s., ‘ Tenilba,’ Burwood. Mullins, John Francis Lane, m.a. Syd., ‘ Kiliountan,’ Challis Avenue, Pott’s Point. Munro, William John, 8B.A.,M.B.,c.M., M.D. Edin., u.R.c.s. Eng., 213 Macquarie-street; p.r. ‘ Forest House,’ 182 Pyrmont Bridge Road, Forest Lodge. Myles, Charles Henry, ‘ Dingadee,’ Burwood. Nangle, James, Architect, ‘St. Elmo,’ Tupper-st., Marrickville. _ Newton, Roland G., 8.4. Syd., ‘Walcott,’ Boyce-st., Glebe-Point. tNoble, Edwald George, Public Works Department, Newcastle. Noyes, Edward, Assoc. Inst. C.E., Assoc. I, Mech. ., c/o Messrs. Noyes Bros., 109 Pitt-street. | Old. Richard, Solicitor,‘ Waverton,’ Bay Rd., North Sydney. Onslow, Lt. Col. James William Macarthur, Camden Park, Menangle. O’Reilly, W. W. J., m.p., M.ch. Q. Univ. Irel., m.8.c.s. Eng., 197 Liverpool-street, Hyde Park. Osborn, A. F., Assoc. M. Inst.C.E., Public Works Department, Cowra. Osborne, Ben. M., J.p., ‘Hopewood,’ Bowral. Oschatz, Alfred Leopold, Teacher of Languages, 167 Victoria- street, Potts Point. Owen, Rev. Edward, B.a., All Saints’ Rectory, Hunter’s Hill. Palmer, Joseph, 96 Pitt-st.; p.r. Kenneth-st., Willoughby. Paterson, Hugh, 197 Liverpool-street, Hyde Park. Pawley, Charles Lewis, Dentist, 187 Regent-street. Peake, Algeronon, Assoc. M. Inst. C.E., 25 Prospect Road, Ashfield. Pearse, W., Union Club; p.r. Moss Vale. Elected 1877 1899 1879 1896 1879 1887 1896 1893 1901 1876 1890 1902 1904 1865 1890 1906 1870 | 1902 1906 1963 1893 1885 1892 1884 1895 1904 1882 1897 1893 P6 Pil Pl Bl Pl BZ Pat (xvii.) Pedley, Perceval R., 227 Macquarie-street. Peterson, T. ‘I'yndall, Member of Sydney Institute of Public Accountants, Copper Mines, Burraga. Pittman, Edward F., Assoc. 8. S.M., L.S., Under Secretary and Government Geologist, Department of Mines. Plummer, John, ‘ Northwood.’ Lane Cove River; Box 413 G.P.O. Poate, Frederick, Lands Office, Moree, Pockley, Thomas F. G., Commercial Bank, Singleton. Pollock, James Arthur, 8.E. Roy. Univ. Irel., B.Sc. Syd., Pro- fessor of Physics, Sydney University. Pope, Roland James, B.a. Syd., M.D., C.M., F.R.C.S. Edin., Ophthalmic Surgeon, 235 Macquarie-street. Purser, Cecil, B.A., M.B., Ch.M. Syd., ‘Valdemar,’ Boulevard, Petersham. Purvis, J. G. S., Water and Sewerage Board, 341 Pitt-street. Quaife, F. H., m.a., m.p., Mast. Surg. Glas., ‘ Hughenden,’ 14 Queen-street, Woollahra. Vice President. Rae, J. L. C., § Endcliffe,’ Church-street, Newcastle. Ramsay, Arthur A., Assistant Chemist, Department of Agri- culture, 136 George-street. Ramsay, David, Surveyor, Box 600 G.P.O. tRamsay, Rdward P., tu.p. St. And., F.R.S.E., F.L.S., 8 Palace- street, Petersham. Rennie, George E., 3.a. Syd., M.D. Lond., M.R.c.s. Eng., 159 Macquarie-street. Redman, Frederick G., ‘Honda,’ Shell Cove Road, Neutral Bay. tRenwick, The Hon. Sir Arthur, Knt., m.u.c,, B.a. Syd., M.D., F.R.c.S. Hdin., 325 Elizabeth-street. Richard, G. A., Mount Morgan Gold Mining Co., Mount Morgan, Queensland. Richardson, H. G. V., Draftsman, Newcastle-street, Rose Bay. Rooke, Thomas, Assoc. M. Inst. C.E., Electrical Engineer, Town Hall, Sydney. Roberts, W. S. de Lisle, c.z., ‘ Kenilworth,’ Penshurst. Rolleston, John C., Assoc. M, lust.C.E» Public Works Department and Australian Club. Rossbach, William, Assoc, M. Inst. C.E., Public Works Department, Sydney. Ross, Chisholm, u.p. Syd., M.B., c.m. Edin., 147 Macquarie-st. Ross, Herbert E., Equitable Building, George-street. Ross, William J. Clunies, B, sc, Lond. & Syd., F.a.s., Lecturer in Chemistry, Technical College, Sydney. Rothe, W. H,, Colonial Sugar Co., O’Connell-street, and Union Club. Russell, Harry Ambrose, B.a., Solicitor, c/o Messrs. Sly and Russell, 369 George-street; p.r. ‘Mahuru,’ Fairfax Road, Bellevue Hill. Rygate, Philip W., m.a., B.E. Syd., Assoc, M. Inst. C.E. Phoenix Chambers, 158 Pitt-street. Elected 1905 1899 1892 19095 1856 1877 1904 1891 1883 1905 | 1900 | 1882 1893 1891 1904. | 1906 | 1893 1874 1899 | 1886 1896 | 1904. | 1892 1900 1903 1883 1901 1906 1906 1905 (xviii.) Scheidel, August, pn. v., Managing Director, Commonwealth Portland Cement Co., Sydney; Union Club. Schmidlin, F., 83 Elizabeth- street, Sydney. P 1| Schofield, James Alexander, F.c.s., A.R.s.M., University, Sydney. Scott, Ernest Kilburn, Assoc. M. Inst. C E., M.I. Mech. E., M.I.E.E., Con- sulting Engineer, and Lecturer in Electricity, The Uni- versity, Sydney. 1 {Scott, Rev. William, mu.a. Cantab., Kurrajong Heights. P 4} Selfe, Norman, M, Inst. C.&., M. I. Mech.E, Victoria Chambers, 279 George-stroet. P 1} Sellors, R. P.,B.a. Syd., ‘ Cairnleith,’ Springdale Road, Killara. Shaw, Percy William, M. Inst.c.E., Australian Smelting Corpor- ation, Dapto. P 3) Shellshear, Walter, M. Inst.C.E., Inspecting Engineer, Existing Lines Office, Bridge-street. Simpson, D, C., M. Inst.6.£., N.S. Wales Railways, Redfern; p.r. [ Omapere.’ Lane Cove Road, North Sydney. | Simpson, R. C., Technical College, Sydney. Sinclair, Miric, M.D.. C.M. ice Inspector-General of Insane, 9 ithmond Terrace, Domain; p.r. Cleveland-street, Wahroonga. | Sinclair, Russell, M. I. Mech E.,ete, Vickery’s Chambers, 82 Pitt-st. P 3) Smail, J. M., M.Inst.c.e., Chief Engineer, Metropolitan Board of Water Siipply and Sewerage, 341 Pitt-street. P1 Smail, Herbert Stuart Inglis, B.E. Syd., Assoc. M. Inst. C.E., Magar Serai, Federated Malay Siates. Small, Frederick Henry, M. Inst. C.E., ‘ Rotherwood,’ Gordon Rd., Chatswood. P 33 Smith, Henry G., F.c.s., Assistant Curator, Technological Museum, Sydney. P11 tSmith, John McGarvie, 89 Denison-street, Woollahra. Smith, R. Greig, p. Sc. Edin., M. Se. Dun., Macleay Bacteriologist, ‘Otterburn,’ Double Bay. Smith, Walter Alexander, M. Inst.c.E., Public Works Depart- ment, 124 Phillip-street. Spencer, Walter, m.p. Bruz., 13 Edgeware Road, Enmore. Stanley, Henry Charles, M. Inst C.E., Royal Chambers, Hunter and Castlereagh-streets. P1 Statham, Edwyn Joseph, Assoc. M. Inst.C.E. Cumberland Heights, Parramatta. Stewart, J. D., m.r.c.v.s., Government Veterinary Surgeon, Department of Mines and Agriculture; p.r. Cowper-street, Randwick. Stoddart, Rev. A. G,, The Rectory, Manly. P 3 Stuart, T. P. Anderson, m.D., tu.p. Edin., Professor of Physi- ology, University of Sydney; p.r. ‘Lincluden,’ Fairfax Road, Double Bay. President. P 2 Siissmilch, C. A., Technical College, Sydney. Taylor, Allen, ‘ Ellerslie,’ 85 Darlinghurst Road. Taylor, Horace, Registrar, Dental Board, 7 Richmond Terrace, Domain. : Taylor, John M., m.a., tu.B. Syd., ‘Woonona’ 43 Hast Crescent- street, McMahon’ s Point, North Sydney. Elected 1893 1899 1861 1896 1896 1878 1879 1885 1896 1892 1894 1894 1879 1900 1905 1883 1884 1890 1892 1903 1876 1904 1906 1898 1879 1899 1901 1900 1891 1903 1901 1898 Pag P2 Jeol 12¥ a tia (xix. ) tTaylor, James, B.Sc, A.R.S.u., ‘Adderton,’ Dundas. Teece, R., F.1.A., F.F.A., General Manager and Actuary, A.M.P. Society, 87 Pitt-street. Tebbutt, John, F.r.a.s., Private Observatory, The Peninsula, Windsor, New South Wales. Thom, James Campbell, Solicitor, ‘Dunoon,’ Hurella-street, Burwood. Thom, John Stuart, Solicitor, Athenzum Chambers, 11 Castle- reagh-street. Thomas, F. J., Newcastle and Hunter River Steamship Co., 147 Sussex-Street. Thomson, Dugald, u.H.R., ‘ Wyreepi, Milson’s Point. Thompson, John Ashburton, M.D. Bruz., D.P.H. Cantab., M.R.C.S. Eyvg., Health Department, Macquarie-street. Thompson, Capt. A. J. Onslow, Camden Park, Menangle. Thow, William, M. Inst. c.E., M.I, Mech, E., Locomotive Department, Eveleigh. Tidswell, Frank, M.B., M.Ch., D.P.H. Cantab., Health Department, Sydney, Tooth, Arthur W., Kent Brewery, 26 George-street, West. Trebeck, P. C., F. R. Met. Soc, 12 O’Connell-street. Turner, Basil W,, a.R.S.M., F.c.s., Wood’s Chambers, Moore-st. Turner, John William, Superintendent of Technical Education, Technical College, Sydney. Vause, Arthur John, m.B., c.m. Hdin., ‘ Bay View House,’ Tempe. Verde, Capitaine Felice, Ing. Cav., vid Fazio 2, Spezia, Italy. Vicars, James, M.c.£., City Engineer and Surveyor, Adelaide. Vickery, George B., 78 Pitt-street, Vonwiller, Oscar U., B, Sc. Demonstrator in Physics, University of Sydney. Voss, Houlton H.,3.p., Oriental Club; Hanover Square, London. Vogan, Harold Sebastian, Assoc. M.Inst.C.E., Authorised Surveyor N.Z., Chief Draftsman, Existing Railways N.S.W.,Bridge-st. Wade, James Scargill, Ass.c.M. Inst C.E., Public Works Depart- ment, Manilla, N.S.W. Wade, Leslie, A. B., M.Inst.c.E., Department of Public Works. Walker, H. O., Commercial Union Assurance Co., Pitt-street. t~Walker, Senator The Hon. J. T., ‘Rosemont,’ Ocean-street, Woollahra. Walkom, A. J., A.m.1.u.E., Electrical Branch, G.P.O., Sydney. Wallach, Bernhard, 8.£. Syd,, Electrical Engineer, ‘Oakwood,’ Wardell Road, Dulwich Hill. Walsh, Henry Deane, B.z., T.c. Dub., M. Inst.C.E., Engineer-in- Chief, Harbour Trust, Circular Quay. Walsh, Fred., George and Wynyard-streets; p,r. ‘ Walworth,’ Park Road, City E. Walton, R. H., F.c.s., ‘ Flinders,’ Martin’s Avenue, Bondi. Wark, William Assoc. M. Inst .C.E. 9 Macquarie Place; p.r. Kurra- jong Heights. (xx.) Elected 1877 Warren, William Edward, B.A., M.D., M.Ch., Queen’s University Trel., u.v. Syd., 283 Elizabeth-street, Sydney. 1883 P16 Warren, W. H.. wh. Sc., M. Inst. C.E., Mem. Am. Soc. C.E., Professor of Engineering, University of Sydney. Vice President. 1876 | Watkins, John Leo, B.A. Cantab., m.A. Syd., Parliamentary Draftsman. Attorney General’s Department, Macquarie-st. 1876 | Watson, C. Russell, u.r.c.s. Eng., ‘ Woodbine,’ Erskineville | Road, Newtown. 1897 | Webb, Frederick William, c.m.c., J.p., ‘ Livadia,’ Manly. 1908 | Webb, A, C. F.. u.1.4.2. Vickery’s Chambers, 82 Pitt-street. 1892 | Webster, James Philip, Assoc. M. Inst. C.E,, L.s., New Zealand, Town | | Hall, Sydney. 1867 | _Weigall, Albert Bythesea, B.A. Oxon., m.a. Syd., Head Master, | Sydney Grammar School, College-street. 1902 | Welsh, David Arthur, M.D., M.A., B.Sc, Professor of Pathology, | | Sydney University, Glebe. 1881 | tWesley, W. H. 1906 | Whitehead, Lindsay, Bank of N. S. Wales, George-street. 1892 | White, Harold Pogson, F.c.s., Assistant Assayer and Analyst, | Department of Mines; p.r. ‘ Quantox,’ Park Road, Auburn. 1877 | tWhite, Rev. W. Moore, A.M., LL.D., T.C.D. 1879 | tWhitfeld, Lewis, m.a. Syd.,‘Glencoe,’ Lower Forth-st. Woollahra 1883 | Wilkinson, W. Camac, m.p. Lond., m.r.c.P. Lond., M.R.c.s. Eng., | 213 Macquarie-street. 1876 | Williams, Percy Edward, Comptroller, Government Savings | Bank, Sydney. 1901 | Willmot, Thomas, J.p., Toongabbie. 1878 | Wilshire, James Thompson, F.R.H.S., J.P., ‘Coolooli,’ Bennet | Road, Neutral Bay. 1879 | Wilshire, F. R., Police Magistrate, Penrith. 1890 | Wilson, James T., m.B., Ch. M., Edin., Professor of Anatomy, | | University of Sydney. 1891 | Wood, Percy Moore, u.R.c.p. Lond., m.R.c.s. Eng., ‘ Redcliffe,’ | Liverpool Road, Ashfield. 1906 P3 Woolnough, Walter George, D.Sc. F.G.s., Demonstrator in Geology. University of Sydney. 1876 P 1) Woolrych, F. B. W., ‘ Verner,’ Grosvenor-street, Croydon. 1902 | Wright, John Robinson, Lecturer in Art, Technical College, | Harris-street, Sydney. HonoRARY MEMBERS. Limited to Thirty. M.—Recipients of the Clarke Medal. 1901 Baker, Sir Benjamin, K.c.M.G., D. Se. LL.D., F.B.S., M. Inst, C.E., ete,, 2 Queen Square Place, London, 8.W. 1875 | Bernays, Lewis A., c.M.G., F.L.S., Brisbane. 1905 _ Cannizzaro, Stanislao. Professor of Chemistry, Reale Universita Rome. 1900 Crookes, Sir William, r.r.s. 7 Kensington Park Gardens, London W. 1875 M | Ellery, Robert L. J., F.2.s., F.R.A.S., c/o Government Astrono- mer of Victoria, Melbourne. J . : 1905 Fischer, Emil, Professor of Chemistry, University, Berlin. (xxi.) 1875 | P1)} Hector, Sir James, K.C.M.G., M.D., #.R.S., late Director of the M Colonial Museum and Geological Survey of New Zealand, Wellington, N.Z. 1880} M | Hooker, Sir Joseph Dalton, k.c.s.1., M.D., C.B., F.B.S., &., c/o Director of the Royal Gardens, Kew. 892 Huggins, Sir William, K.c.B., D.C.L.,LL.D., F.R.S., &., 90 Upper Tulse Hill, London, S.W. 1901 Judd, J. W., ¢.B., F.R.S., F.G.S., Professor of Geology, Royal College of Science, London. 1903 Kelvin, Right Hon. William Thomson, Lord, 0.m., G.c.v.o., D.C.L., LL.D., F.R.S., Hon. M. Inst. C.E., etc. 15 Eaton Place, London, S.W. 1903 Lister, Right Hon. Joseph, Lord, 0.M., B.A., M.B.,F B.C S. D.C.L., F.R.S., Hon. M. Inst.C.E.,ete, 12 Park Crescent, Portland Place, London, W. 1901 Newcomb, Professor Simon, Lu.D., Ph, D.. For. Mem. R.S. Lond., United States Navy, Washington. 1905 Oliver, Daniel, Lu.p., F.R.S., Emeritus Professor of Botany, University College, London. 1894: Spencer, W. Baldwin, u.a., o.m G., F.R.S., Professor of Biology, University of Melbourne. 1900 | M | Thiselton-Dyer, Sir William Turner, K C.M.G., C.I.E., M.A., B.Sc. F.R.S., F.u.S., late Director, Royal Gardens, Kew. 1895 Wallace, Alfred Russel, p.c.u. Oxon., Lu.D. Dublin, F.R.S., Old Orchard, Broadstone, Wimborne, Dorset. OpiruaRyY 1906-7. Honorary Member. 1887 Foster, Sir Michael, m.p., F.R.s. Ordinary Members. 1873 Norton, Hon. James, M.L.c., LL.D. 1864 Russell, H. C., B.A., C.M.G., F.R.S. 1879 Young, John AWARDS OF THE CLARKE MEDAL. Established in memory of THE LATE Revp. W. B. CLARKH, m.a., F.R.s., F.G.8., &., Vice-President from 1866 to 1878. To be awarded from time to time for meritorious contributions to the Geology, Mineralogy, or Natural History of Australia. 1878 Professor Sir Richard Owen, k.c.B., F.R.S., Hampton Court. 1879 George Bentham, c.m.a., F.R.s., The Royal Gardens, Kew. 1880 Professor Thos. Huxley, F.R.s., The Royal School of Mines, London. 4 Marlborough Place, Abbey Road, N.W. 1881 1882 1883 1884 1885 1886 1887 1838 1889 1890 LS91 1892 1893 1895 1895 1896 1900 1901 1902 1903 (xxil.) Professor F. M‘Coy, F.n.s., F.a.s., The University of Melbourne. . Professor James Dwight Dana, tu.p., Yale Colca New Hevea! Conn., United States of America. Baron Ferdinand von Mueller, K.c.M.G , M.D., PH.D., F.R.S., F.L.S. Government Botanist, Melbourne. Alfred R. C. Selwyn, LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.8., Director of the Geological Survey of Canada, Ottawa. Sir Joseph Dalton Hooker, k.c.s.I., ¢.B., M.D.) D.C.L., LL.D., &., late Director of the Royal Gardens, Kew. Professor L. G. De Koninck, mu.p., University of Liege, Belgium. Sir James Hector, K.c.u.G., M.D,, F.R.S., Director of the Geological Survey of New Zealand, Wellington, N.Z. Rev. Julian E. Tenison-Woods, F.G.s., F.L.s., Sydney. Robert Lewis John Ellery, F.R.s., F.R.A.s., Government Astrono- mer of Victoria, Melbourne. George Bennett, m.p. Univ. Glas., F.R.c.8. Eng., F.L.8., F.Z.S., William Street, Sydney. Captain Frederick Wollaston Hutton, F.R.s., ¥.a.s., Curator, Can- terbury Museum, Christchurch, New Zealand. Sir William Turner Thiselton Dyer, K.c.M.G.,C.I.E.,M.A., B.Sc, F.R.S., F.L.s., Director, Royal Gardens, Kew. Professor Ralph Tate, F.u.s., F.c.s., University, Adelaide, S.A. Robert Logan Jack, F.G.s., F.R.G.8., Government Geologist, Brisbane, Queensland. Robert Etheridge, Junr., Government Palzontologist, Curator of the Australian Museum, Sydney. Hon. Augustus Charles Gregory, ¢.M.G., M.L.C., F.R.G.S., Brisbane. Sir John Murray, Challenger Lodge, Wardie, Edinburgh. © Edward John Eyre, Walreddon Manor, Tavistock, Devon, England. F. Manson Railey, F.u.s., Colonial Botanist of Queensland, Brisbane. Alfred William Howitt, p. sc. Cantab., F.c.8., Hon. Fellow Anthropol. Inst. of Gt. Brit. and Irel., ‘ Eastwood,’ Bairnsdale, Victoria. AWARDS OF THE SOCIETY’S MEDAL AND MONEY PRIZE. The Royal Society of New South Wales offers its Medal and Money Prize for the best communication (provided it be of sufficient merit) containing the results of original research or observation npon various subjects published annually. 1882 Money Prize of £25. John Fraser, B.A., West Maitland, for paper on ‘ The Aborigines of New South Wales.’ 1882 1884 1886 1887 1888 1889 1889 1891 1892 1894 1894 1895 1896 (xxiii ) Audrew Ross, m.p., Molong, for paper on the ‘ Influence of the Australian climate and pastures upon the growth of wool.’ The Society’s Bronze Medal and £25. W. E. Abbott, Wingen, for paper on ‘ Water supply in the Interior of New South Wales.’ S. H. Cox, F.a.s., F.c.s., Sydney for paper on ‘The Tin deposits of New South Wales. Jonathan Seaver, F.a.s., Sydney, for paper on ‘ Origin and mode of occurrence of gold-bearing veins and of the associated Minerals. Rev. J. E. Tenison- Woods, F.G.8., F.L.S., Sydney, for paper on ‘ The Anatomy and Life-history of Mollusca peculiar to Australia.’ Thomas Whitelegge, F.R.u.s., Sydney, for ‘ List of the Marine and Fresh-water Invertebrate Fauna of Port Jackson and Neigh- bourhood. Rev. John Mathew, m.a., Coburg, Victoria, for paper on ‘The Australian Aborigines. Rev. J. Milne Curran, F.G.s., Sydney, for paper on ‘The Microscopic Structure of Australian Rocks.’ Alexander G. Hamilton, Public School, Mount Kembla, for paper on ‘The effect which settlement in Australia has produced upon Indigenous Vegetation.’ J. V. De Coque, Sydney, for paper on the ‘ Timbers of New South Wales.’ R. H. Mathews, u.s., Parramatta, for paper on ‘ The Aboriginal Rock Carvings and Paintings in New South Wales.’ C. J. Martin, B.Sc, M.B. Lond , Sydney, for paper on ‘The physio- logical action of the venom of the Australian black snake (Pseudechis porphyriacus).’ Rev. J. Milne Curran, Sydney, for paper on ‘The occurrence of Precious Stones in New South Wales, with a description of the Deposits in which they are found.’ PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. By H. A. LENEHAN, F.R.A.S., Acting Government Astronomer. [Read before the Royal Society of N. S. Wales, May 2, 1906.) ONE more year has been added to the life of our Society, and during its course many events of scientific interest have been recorded in the world’s progress in science. In the first place, referring to our own internal afiairs, with judici- ous management, our Treasurer has pulled through the troubles that faced him at the commencement of the session better than we had anticipated, but the necessity for watchful care of our expenditure will be needed for some time, as the Government subsidy has been reduced by one half. The Council did its utmost to alter the decision of the Minister by interviewing him, but to no purpose. One object that should be in each member’s mind, is that of encouraging desirable gentlemen to join the Society. Thus our finances would be improved and additional contributions to the business of our general meetings would be offered. Roll of Members.—The number of members on the Roll on the 30th April, 1905 was 336. During the past year 18 members were elected; the deaths numbered 5, and resig- nations 14, leaving a total of 335 to date. Mr. H. C. Russell.—Within the last two years a familiar face has been missed from our monthly meetings in the person of Mr. H. C. Russell, B.A., C.M.G., F.R.S., etc., whose illness in October, 1903, necessitated his taking a holiday from his official duties, and later on of retiring from the public service and giving up his position as Government Astronomer of New South Wales, a position he had held from A—May 2, 1906. 2, H. A. LENEHAN, the year 1870, having been for the previous twelve years connected with the Observatory. During this long and honourable service he has in his capacity of Councillor and President of this Society contributed many papers, and has many times afforded valuable assistance to the council. On February 28th, 1905, he permanently retired from his duties, and has only on one or two occasions been seen at our meetings since. Obituary.—The following is a list of members who have died during the year :— Dean, Alexander, elected 1878 Hume, J. K., _ 1877, Keep, John, = 1877 Moore, Charles, is 1856 Perkins, Henry A., _,, 1877 Portus, A. B., “A 1897 ““The Father of the Society,’’ being the oldest then living member, was Mr. Charles Moore, the erstwhile Director of the Botanic Gardens; of late years he did not take a very active part in the business of the Society because of infirmities. He was Councillor for many years and a former President; he was always genial and ever ready to give information on botanical and other matters which by his long and active life he was particularly qualified to do; he also contributed interesting papers to the Society. Honorary Members.—Number on the Roll on the 30th April, 1905, 17; new members elected 3, and lost by death 2, leaving 18 on the Roll at the present time. Deaths— The Hon. Sir Augustus Charles Gregory, elected 1875; Capt. Frederick Wollaston Hutton, elected 1888. Concerning Captain Hutton, F.R.s., Hon. Member of our Society, Professor Liversidge submitted a notice of his demise in these words :— PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 3 “The members of the Royal Society of New South Wales learn with the deepest regret of the death of Captain Hutton, F.R.s., one of its Honorary Members, and they hereby place on record their high appreciation of Captain Hutton’s great and life long services for the advancement of science. That the above resolution be forwarded to the late Captain Hutton’s family with an express- ion of this Society’s deep sympathy with them in their bereave- ment.” The Philosophical Institute of Canterbury, N.Z., is establishing a fund for original research, asa memorial to Captain Hutton. Aithough not a member of our Society, | may mention the name of one of the greatest benefactors of the Sydney University, Sir Peter Nicol Russell, who by his gift of £100,000 founded the school of Engineering. He died on July 10th, 1905, at the age of 89. Amongst distinguished non-Australian men of science who have passed away during my term of office I may mention Professor Jules Oppert, Professor of Assyrian Philology and Archeology at the Collége de France, renowned for his contributions to astronomical chronology and his works on Chaldea and Assyria. The death is also announced at 76 years of age of Prof. Franz Reuleaux, who as author of a number of engineering works and Director of the Berlin Industrial Institute, rendered good service to the development of practical and scientific engineering in Germany. Mr. C. T. Yerkes, whose death was announced on 30th December, 1905, came into prominence over proposals for vast schemes of electric railways in London in 1903. Pre- viously he had been connected with street railways in Philadelphia and Chicago. He presented the finest tele- scope in the world to the observatory called after his name 4 H. A. LENEHAN. at Lake Geneva, Wisconsin, U.S.A., and had the satisfaction during his life of seeing great use made of it in unravelling many of the mysteries of astronomical research. The death of Dr. Ralph Copeland, Astronomer Royal of Scotland, caused a vacancy, which has been filled by the appointment of Mr. Frank Watson Dyson, M.A., F.R.S., chief assistant, Royal Observatory, Greenwich, to the position of Astronomer Royal of Scotland and Professor of Practical Astronomy, Edinburgh University. Dr. Copeland had a varied career; he was born Sept. 3rd,1837, in Lancashire, was educated at the Grammar School of Kirkham; he emi- grating to Australia, spent several years as a shepherd, and then at gold digging. During this period he turned his thoughts to astronomy, and returned home in 1858. During the voyage he observed Donati’s comet of that year. Hethen apprenticed himself to a firm of locomotive engineers, and withsome fellow employees established a small observatory, In 1864, trade being dull, he went to Germany to study astronomy and matriculated at Gottingen University, was appointed volunteer assistant at the observatory, and with Carl Borgen made the Gottingen Catalogue, published in 1869. His next experience was a voyage to the Arctic Regions to explore Greenland’s east coast, and for his meteorological and magnetical researches he was decorated with the order of the Red Eagle by Emperor William I., after which he was appointed assistant to Harl Rosse at Birr Castle for three and a half years. In 1876 he was appointed to take charge of the Dunecht Observatory of Lord Lindsay (now the Ear! of Crawford); in 1879 he was assistant at Dunsink Observatory under Sir Robert Ball, and in 1889 he was appointed Astronomer Royal of Scotland, . (in place of Professor Piazzi Smyth, who had retired), hold- ing the position to the time of his death. This is certainly a remarkable career for one who had served in Australia PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 5 in the humble capacity of shepherd; he had by his own efforts raised himself to an honourable position. He died October 27th, 1905, in his 69th year. Sir Humphrey Davy’s memory has been honoured during the year by the erection of a tablet placed on 3 Rodney- place, Clifton, Bristol, in the house he occupied for a time. The unveiling was performed by Mr. Marconi. Library.— Books and periodicals have been purchased at a cost of £80 16s. 2d., binding books cost £12 11s. 6d., total £93 7s. 8d. Exchanges.—Number of Institutions on the Hxchange list 431; publications received in exchange for the Society’s Journal and Proceedings during the past year :—250 volumes, 1824 parts, 165 reports, 185 pamphlets, 17 maps, 1 atlas of charts and 1 photograph, total 2448. Papers Read in 1905.— During the past year the Society held eight meetings at which 15 papers were read; the average attendance of members was 29°5 and of visitors 1°2. The papers read at each general meeting were not perhaps so numerous as during recent years, but were of consider- able value, they are :— I.—PreEsipENTIAL AppRzEss. By C. O. Burasz, M. Inst. c.E., Telford Medallist, Inst. C.E. II.—On the occurrence of Calcium Oxalate in the Barks of the Eucalypts. By Henry G. Smiru, r.c.s., Assistant Curator, Technological Museum, Sydney, [With Plate] IIi.— On so-called Gold-coated Teeth in Sheep. By A. LiversipGE, LL.D., F.R.S., Professor of Chemistry, University of Sydney. IV.—Observations on the Illustrations of the Banks and Solander Plants. By J. H. MaripEen, Government Botanist, and Director of Botanic Gardens, Sydney. V.—tThe refractive indices, with other data, of the oils of 118 species of Eucalypts. By Henry G. Suir, r.c.s., Assistant Curator, Technological Museum, Sydney. VI.—Note on the drift of S.S. “ Pilbarra.” By Henry A. LENEHAN, F.R.A.S. [With Diagram ] 6 H. A. LENEHAN. VII.—Reinforced Concrete, Paper III. By W. H. Warren, wh. Se. M. Inst. C.E., M. Am, Soc. C.E., Challis Professor of Engineering, Sydney University. VIII.—On the occurrence of Inclusions of Basic Plutonic Rocks in a Dyke near Kiama. By C. A. Stssm1tcn, F.G.S. IX.—Note on some simple Models for use in the Teaching of Elementary Crystallography. By W.G. Woo.LnouGH, D.Sc, F.G4.8. (Communi- cated by Prof. T. W. E. Davin, B.A., F.R.S.) X.—Provisional Determination of Astronomical Refraction from observations made with the Meridian Circle Instrument ot the Sydney Observatory. By C. J. MERFIELD, F.R.A.S., Mitglied der Astronomischen Gesellschaft. XI.—Latitude of the Sydney Observatory. By C. J. MERFIELD, F.R.A.S., Mitglied der Astronomischen Gesellschaft. XII.—A method of separating the Clay and Sand in Clay Soils, and those rich in organic matter. By L. Consen, Chemical Laboratory, Department of Agriculture. (Communicated by F. B. GuTHRIE; 1... 8.C-8:) XIII.—Sociology of some Australian Tribes. By R. H. Maruews, L.s., Corres. Memb. Anthrop. Soc., Washington. XIV.—On an undescribed species of Leptospermum and its Essential Oil. By Ricuarp T. BAKgR, F.L.s., Curator, and Henry G. Smita, F.c.s., Assistant Curator, Technological Museum, Sydney. [With Plate} XV.—Note on a hollow Lightning Conductor crushed by the discharge. By J. A. Potuock, Professor of Physics, and 8. H. BARRAcLoUGH, Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering, in the University of Sydney, [With Plate. ] Section.—The Engineering Section held four meetings at which the following papers were read :— 1.—Annual Address. By S. H. BARRACLOUGH, B.E., M.M.E., Assoc M. Inst. C.E., Chairman of the Engineering Section. 2.—Notes on a tour through America, Great Britain and Europe. By HENRY DEANE, M.A., M. Inst. C.E. 3.—Some Notes on the Storage and Regulation of Water for Irrigation Purposes. By T. WuircHurcH SEAVER, B.E. (Communicated by W. E. CuokKE, M.E.) Lectures.—The following Popular Science Lectures were delivered during the Session :— May 30, 1905—“ Stellar Evolution,” by Prof. BicKERTON. August 18, 1905—‘* The Monotremes and the origin of Mammals.” by J. P. HILL, D.Sc., F.LS. | PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 7 Earthquakes.—At the commencement of our session the second great earthquake of modern times was recorded, visiting northern India, devastating the country for miles, and causing many casualties. Highty per cent. of they population of, the district were killed or injured; 7 Kuro- pean children and 470 Ghurkas were killed by the fall of some stone barracks. The latest estimate of the loss of life (May 25th) gives the total deaths at 20,000. The earth- quake originated in the western Himalayas about Dhar- masala, its intensity increased through the Punjaub and the United North-west Provinces, and while from Rajpoo- tana northwards it decreased rapidly; apparently there was no wide extension of the disturbance towards Assam and Afghanistan. Dr. Charles Davison in a recent paper states that the earthquake area included about 17,000 Square miles. Professor David gave a very interesting account of the track of these disturbances, showing how they encircle the Pacific Ocean, and also showing the tendency of all steep grades, e.g., the Mount Lofty Range in South Australia, to be visited frequently by such tremors, and pointing out that the weighting of the earth due to the silt and deposits brought down by the rivers, increases the liability to be affected. The previous large earthquake in India was that of June 12th 1897; it extended from Delhi on the west to Siam on the east, and beyond the Himalayas in the north, to Hyderabad in the south, so that it must have been felt over an area of at least 1,200,000 square miles. At Shillong, Assam, where the earliest movements were recorded at 5h. 15m, a deep rumbling preceded the shock by about two seconds, the greatest violence immediately following—in all two or three seconds; the buildings were razed anda peculiar pink cloud of plaster dust was seen hanging over every house at Shillong at the end of the 8 H. A. LENEHAN. shock. Again on June 2nd, Turkey reported an earthquake in Scutari, Albania, doing enormous damage—200 persons ‘were killed and injured and houses wrecked. The shocks were severe at Montenegro, and the Bjelkastra mountain was in volcanic activity. Other small shocks were noted during the year, on September 2nd, from Stirlingshire and Perthshire in Scotland. On September 8th, an earthquake in Italy destroyed Pizzo, Martirano and Monteleone de Calabria, involving a loss of 350 lives and £4,000,000 in property. Several earthquake disturbances were reported from Vienna; the seismograph at the Pola Hydrographic Station registered between 3h. 55m.a.m. and 4h. 17 m. a.m. on Sunday 23rd July, 1905, the occurrence of a severe and protracted seismic disturbance at an estimated distance of some 3,720 miles. Telegrams from St. Petersburg state that earthquakes occurred in Siberia at that time, and a shock was felt in parts of Scotland at coincident times. Another shock was felt at Stirling, Dollar and Alloa in Scotland shortly before midnight on Thursday, September 21st, 1905. The shock travelled in a similar direction to that of July 23rd, namely to the south-east, but it was of slightly longer duration and more violent in character, moving furniture, pictures, etc., and a sound like thunder was heard; at Corton railway signal cabin all the bells were set ringing. At Bridge-of-Allan the shock was decided ; in Bannockburn and in the neighbouring villages the impression was of a serious explosion. The coast of the Republic of Columbia on February 15th 1906, was greatly damaged by an earthquake, which was accompanied by a rising sea. The Port of Boca-Grande was “‘swallowed up,’’ many persons were killed and injured, On February 19th a severe earthquake occurred in the island of St. Lucia, Windward Islands. Every building in the town of Castries, the capital, was damaged. oe PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. g The greatest earthquake on record occurred November 1st, 1755, causing great damage and loss of life, extending over all Spain, throughout other parts of Kurope to Scot- land, North Africa, and in one of the towns of Morocco 10,000 people perished. Six hundred feet of water was afterwards found where the quay stood at Lisbon; the effects of the wave were noticed far out to sea; it swept the whole coast of Spain, Portugal, Madeira and across the Atlantic and both shores of the West Indies. In March the Tokio correspondent of the Daily Telegraph - reported that in the earthquake at Formosa thousands of people were killed. The whole island was shaken, and several towns were completely destroyed. The damage was estimated at £9,000,000. In one district alone 1,000 persons were killed and 700 injured. The Total Eclipse of the Sun on August 30th, 1905.— This event excited much interest amongst astronomers in the northern hemisphere, and all who could take part did their best to record the various phenomena. Unfortunately many were disappointed by the cloudy state of the weather during the few minutes (3°6) that the period of totality lasted. The following gives an outline of the various parties’ experiences :— The westerly end of the line of totality at Labrador was cloudy. Sir W. Macgregor, Governor of Newfoundland, and EK. W. Maunder were at Canada under Dr. King at Hamilton Inlet. At Burgos in Spain, the overcast sky greatly interfered, but some photographs of the corona were taken through broken clouds. At Oropesa, east coast of Spain, Professor Callendar of the Royal College of Science was unfortunately entirely shut out by clouds from taking any observations. ‘Torreblanca, only a little north of Oropesa, had quite clear sky, and the observer describes the corona as being very bright and with clearly defined 10 H. A. LENEHAN. edges—like ‘‘fortifications.’’ The light generally was so great that he was unable to detect any stars; Venus was visible. The prominences were of a violet colour, well defined at the commencement and ending, but not during the totality. This might give a practical clue to the height of the prominences. At the Balearic Islands uncertain weather conditions prevailed; near Palma, the Solar Physics Observatory party had a good position. Sir Norman Lockyer’s party included Dr. F. W. 8S. Lockyer, C.-P. Butler, Howard -Pagmaat McClean, and a number of officers and men of H.M.S. Venus; under the unfavourable conditions they succeeded in getting some fairly good results. In the centre of the town of Palma, Mr. Crommelin and other English astrono- mers took up their position on the hotel roof, and also had fairly good observations; shadow bands were observed 3 a few miles from the town clear sky was noted. Many of the parties preferred viewing the phenomena from steamers anchored in the line of totality in preference to staying in Spanish towns. On board the Ortona the prominences were well seen, being described as “‘rose-colour’’ with bases of yellow, noted on one side of the sun at a time; the corona of “‘a soft pearly blue,’’ with streamers projecting about two diameters, two pairs “‘above and below’’ the Sun; Venus, Regulus, and Mercury were visible. On the “‘Arecadia,”’ Baily’s beads and the shadow bands were observed. The conclusions were that the corona was very compact, bright and of a silvery hue. Only one ray stretched out con- spicuously from the corona—four or five minor streamers also showed themselves—but paler than usual; the tem- perature fell from 82°4 to 72°5. Hine weather, better than they obtained at Palma, was experienced at Phillipville, Algeria, where the Solar Physics Observatory party originally intended to locate. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 11 At Guelma favourable conditions occurred, and Mr. Newall made many good observations with the Cambridge great spectroscope; M. Tripied, Director of the Algiers Observatory was at this place also. The corona was reported very bright, not extensive, and uniformly dis- tributed round the sun. Red protuberances were well seen and also Baily’s beads, Mercury, Venus, and Regulus were visible ; the temperature fell during the eclipse from 91° to 82°; shadow bands were observed, The Astronomer Royal of Greenwich was at Sifax, in Tunis, assisted by the crew of H.M.S. Suffolk; a French party was also there, under M. Bigourdeu: partial cloud interfered, and the eclipse was fairly well observed and photographed; nothing extraordinary was noted in the corona, which was of the characteristic maximum type, with streamers extending as much as two diameters from the disc, and of a “‘rosy colour.’? There was no definite beginning to the eclipse, the crescent never wholly dis- appeared, or rather it merged into a magnificent group of prominences spread over an are of almost 30 degrees, near the spot where the last of the sun’s true disc was seen. They must have been of immense height, and it seemed at least 30 seconds before they were hidden by the advancing moon; at the same time, gradually too, the corona emerged. Observers who have seen many eclipses say it was but a poor corona; to others it did not seem so. In place of the sun’s crescent an inky black disc hung in the sky, with a great span of rosy prominences east of its vertex, and at all other parts of the circumference streaks and streamers of pale but defined substances were set with the strangest irregularity, brilliant, round the edge of the disc, and lost to the eye some two diameters distant. Many observers saw arosy tint in it; others called ita pure silver or aluminium grey. It was most unmistakably 12 H. A. LENEHAN. of the type associated with sun spot maxima. Many stars were visible, though the sky was never very dark. Too soon its 200 seconds duration were gone, and with amazing brilliance the sun’s disc began to appear. Most of the observers took successfully as many as seven photographs out of eight. In Tripoli, Professor Todd observed under favourable conditions. The American Expedition from Amherst College set up their station at the British Consulate. Shadow bands were seen 10 minutes before totality, and had many remarked and pronounced peculiarities, wavering and narrow, moving swifter than one could walk, at right angles to the wind, their length with it, and waxing and waning five times during the eight minutes preceding totality. Baily’s beads were photographed. The corona was “not impressive,’’ being evenly developed, with long streamers. Other parties under Professor Millesovici of Rome, and M. Libera of Paris, were at the same station. At Assouan on the Nile, there were parties of three nationalities—British, American, and Russian. Professor Turner, of Oxford, assisted by Mr. Bellamy, observed specially the corona light; Captain Lyons and the officers of the Survey Department obtained five exposures with the astrographic telescope, one with a green screen and one enlargement, six polarised by reflection in the horizontal plane and two in a vertical plane. Mr. Gunther of Magdalen College, Oxford, obtained with a Goertz lens, six plates for comparion with similar ones taken at Labrador. The party of the Lick Observatory under Professor Hussey, had similar instruments to those used at Labrador, so that any change in the corona might be detected; the sky was hazy which detracted somewhat from the clear view of the corona; change of temperature very slight. The corona appeared small with its longest PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 13 streamer to the S.H. about 2 diameters long and three shorter ones. A very interesting article’ by Mrs. Hussey detailed the arrangements of the Expedition. As there would be considerable duration of the passage of the moon’s shadow across the earth, it has been supposed that it might be possible to detect the progress of some change in appearance in special parts of the corona, due to any process of disturbance that might be going on there, particularly ifthey might be situated above a large promin- ence in active eruption. Some slight indications of this kind have indeed been seen, but it was especially hoped that they might be established by means of photographs intended to be taken last August in Labrador, when com- pared with others taken with similar instruments in North Africa. The distance apart of the places of observation would have allowed a difference in time of fully two and a quarter hours. It was therefore thought that some clearly distinguishable change of appearance might occur in that length oftime. But the sun was wholly obscured by clouds in Labrador, as so often happens in connection with some specially important observation; the weather was at its worst where it was most needful that it should be fine, and the journey to a most inhospitable region was all in vain. The desired comparison must consequently be postponed until another suitable opportunity shall again occur,in which it may be possible to find accessible and suitable localities for the observation situated at a long distance apart on the earth’s surface. The following notes are extracted from W. J. Hussey’s Report on the Heclipse, August 30th 1905: Nineteen pho- tographs were obtained, having exposures varying from half a second for the inner corona, to sixty-four seconds for the fainter outlying streamers. With the intra-mer- ' Independent Magazine, November, 1905. 14 H. A. LENEHAN. curial apparatus the time of totality was divided as nearly as might be to obtain duplicate plates along the ecliptic in the vicinity of the sun. The exposure with.the spec- trograph lasted throughout totality, except for a second or two at the beginning and the end. No detailed study of photographs is made at an eclipse camp. This requires the resources of measuring-engines, microscopes, compari- son-plates, and other records. At the observing station the one object is to bring out all the detail the plates will yield and fix them against the chance of accident from hght or chemical change. Professor M. Moye at Alcala de Chisvert, a little town on the east coast of Spain, was favoured with a clear sky, observations were restricted to the shadow bands, and he describes them; they were greyish ribbons, not black, tolerably distinct and wavy: “T noticed their direction from 8.W. to N.E. and their motion perpendicular to this, 7.e., from N.W. to 8.E., both before and after totality. The shadow bands reminded one of a rope tied at one end and made to wave by the hand at the other end. At the totality, ight was surprisingly bright, had no dithculty in sketch- ing or reading small letter press, features of landscape, details of railway engine; divisions of watch easily seen. Owing to the general illumination, decidedly lighter than a full moon night, I was unable to see any star or planets, with the exception only of Venus. The eclipse wind was very noticeable, coming to a perfect calm some minutes after totality; temperature in shade fell about 5° Fahr.” Observations of these shadow bands hitherto made have been quite discordant, and the cause of the phenomenon is not known with certainty, although there are theories, one of these assumes that the bands are a diffraction effect when the sun becomes a narrow strip; another is described by Professor Cleveland Abbe, this, he says, should not be a z PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 15 called a diffraction phenomenon, though it does occur when a thin sheet of light from the edge of the sun passes the edge of the moon at the moment of totality. The diffrac- tion bands would necessarily move onward over the earth’s surface with the same relative speed as that of the moon and the earth, approximately a mile a second, whereas the observed shadow bands have a velocity of only a few feet or yards per second. On the other hand, the bands may be considered as phenomena of interference of rays of light slightly inclined by reason of the irregular refractions ina non-homogeneous atmosphere. M. Deslandres directed the Bureau des Longitudes Mission to Burgos, where the actual duration of visible totality was curtailed by clouds to one minute, which did not include either the second or the third contacts. The proposed photographing of the chromosphere spectrum was therefore impossible. Photometric observations of the corona were obtained, and M. d’ Azambuja was able to measure the corona radiation, obtaining figures which were decidedly lower than those obtained by M. Charbonneau in 1900. M. Kamapell obtained four photographs of the corona polarised by reflection. M. Blum obtained two photographs of the corona through coloured screens so arranged as to transmit only the gaseous radiation of the prominences. By comparing these with the ordinary photo- graphs, it will probably be possible to determine whether or not the prominences emit a more intense continuous spectrum than that emitted by the surrounding regions. At El Arrouch, 32 km. from Philippeville, M. Andover simply attempted to obtain as many direct photographs of the phenomena as possible. His instrumental equipment consisted of a photographic objective of 14 em. (5°6 inch) aperture and 60 cm. (24 inch) fecal length, mounted with two enlarging cameras which increased the diameter of 16 H. A. LENEHAN. the image by three and eight times, respectively. Alto- gether 44 plates were exposed, eleven of these during totality. A negative exposed two minutes before totality, shows a reversed image, due to over-exposure, and a silhouette of the corona. | Attention has recently been given during total eclipses to the question of the existence of any planet or planets nearer to the sun than Mercury. Such planets, if so situ- ated, would be illuminated by a very intense solar light, if only one-half or one-quarter of the diameter of Mercury. It might be possible that such planet could be hidden in some eclipses of the sun or moon, or its light be over- powered by the corona, if our line of sight to it pass very near the sun; but, if so, it should be visible in other eclipses when in other parts of its orbit ; up to the present no such planet has been detected. In the eclipse of May 18th, 1901, the remarkably long duration of totality (65 minutes) was very favourable for these observations. Unfortunately for some time to come there will not be so good an opportunity to observe. In 1907, it would involve a trip to Turkestan or Mongolia; in 1908, or 1911, to the Pacific, and in 1912, when the very rare occurrence of two total eclipses (only six months apart) will take place in South America and the Spanish peninsula; these will be of short duration. In 1919 an eclipse of long totality will be visible in Brazil and central Africa. Changes on the Moon’s surface.—FYrom time to time, astronomers who make special studies of the lunar surface, have intimated their belief that changes of various kinds may be occurring on the surface of our satellite. Professor W. H. Pickering, as the result of a long series of speciay observations in Peru, Jamaica, and California, believes that physical changes do occur, and that they may be classified under three heads, due respectively to PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 176 (a) volcanic action, (b) formation and melting of hoar frost, (ce) vegetation. The first class is illustrated most forcibly by the crater Linné, which according to Lohrmann, Madler and Schmidt, prior to 1848, had a diameter of between four and seven miles, whereas its present diameter is three-quarters of a mile. A new crater has also been announced in the vicinity of Hyginus. The floor of the crater Plato has repeatedly furnished new formations at various times—Pickering’s latest observations show the existence of a crescent- shaped bank, six miles long by one or two miles broad, not shown on maps made by A. 8S. Williams during the period of 1879-1890. Turning to the second class of changes, there appears to be numerous examples of formations which would be most simply explained by supposing them to be composed of hoar-frost. It is considered that the strongest evidence that water in the liquid state ever existed upon the surface of the moon lies in the dried up river-beds of which the best example lies on the eastern slopes of Mount Hadley, at the base of the Appenines. Another, discovered only in the summer of 1904, lies about 60 miles due south of Conon. The author also brings direct observational evidence to show that changes in the forms of lunar features e.g. the small craters Messier and Messier (a)-may be actually seen to vary with the period of the lunar day. Regarding the third class of variable phenomena, these are stated to be more conspicuous than those due to the former two causes. Reproductions are given in the paper of four photographs obtained in Jamaica in 1901, showing distinct evidence of changes on the crater Hratosthenes with the age of the moon. Hvery precaution has been taken to exclude any conclusions based on changes of shadow resulting from B—May 2, 1906. 18 H. A. LENEHAN. varying illumination ; but after all, it is quite certain that intrinsic growths of dusky matter have taken place, and as no mineral is known which could give this appearance, it is ascribed to the growth of vegetation. As the lunation progresses the western portion of the dark area slowly fades out, and the eastern is absorbed in the growing shadows of the lunar night. A more detailed account of the phenomena will be found in Harvard College University Annals, Vol. 53. In a paper called “‘The reality of supposed changes on the moon’s surface,’’ M. Puiseux discusses at some length the various observations of alleged changes on the lunar surface under the influence of the solar radiation. Going back to the earliest observations of details, he considers each authoritative report of suspected change up to the most recent observations of the reported increase of the diameter of Linné during lunar eclipses. Summing up the evidence thus examined, M. Puiseux arrives at the conclusion that the case for real changes taking place on the surface of our satellite is not established. He believes that the change of sensitiveness of the retina when observing faint objects is sufficient to account for the changes usually observed, whilst the different conditions of exposure when photographing the eclipsed moon might easily introduce the changes suspected from the examination of photographs. Mars.—Mr. G. D. Hirst, F.R.A.S., who was president of the New South Wales branch of the British Astronomical Association 1904-1905, during the 1905 opposition of the planet Mars, obtained some good drawings of more than special interest, and has been pleased to. give the Observatory copies from which lantern slides have been made and colored very delicately, but no signs of the canals were shown with the optical facilities he possessed. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 19 Even with the largest telescopes yet made, these markings are not so clearly defined as to cause the acceptance of them as positive. The Savilian professor of astronomy at Oxford, Herbert Hall Turner, F.R.S., has the following remarks on this subject :-— “We have heard a good deal of late years of the canals of Mars, and there is no doubt at all that certain straight markings on the planet’s surface have been detected. Many of us have sufficient faith in that wonderful observer Schiaparelli to believe that these are occasionally seen double. But as regards the interpretation of such markings—the notion that because they are called canals it is implied that there are inhabitants on Mars, who have dug them for irrigation purposes—we must exercise more caution. To realize the value of our information, consider first how much further away Mars is than the moon—about 200 times at least, and generally much more. Now 200 is the magnifying power of a good telescope, that is to say, the magnifying power which can be used with advantage. It follows then, that whatever a fair telescope enables us to see on Mars could be seen on the moon with the naked eye; and it may be added that whatever the largest telescope in existence would enable us to see on Mars could be seen on the moon with a pocket opera-glass, for our gain from the recent increase in size of telescopes is well within that represented by a small opera-glass as compared with the eye. Hence, let any one look at the moon with the naked eye, or even with a small opera-glass for traces of canals or other signs of life of any kind, and he will begin to understand the caution which must be exercised in drawing conclusions, however attractive, as to the habitability of the planet. We want, in fact, an increase of our optical resources by a thousand times at least to get any satisfactory intelligence of this kind, whereas the advances of the last century would be represented by a factor not greater than 10, and there seems no chance at present of our getting to 100; we might manage 20, perhaps, by slow and costly advances, but 100 seems impossible. 20 H. A. LENEHAN. A brief statement, and especially a numerical statement, of this kind should not be criticised too closely in detail ; but it may be accepted unhesitatingly as giving a general idea of the situation. Professor E. E. Barnard, who has had probably more experience of the largest telescopes in favourable conditions than any one, is of opinion that the naked eye view of the moon better represents the view of Mars through the best telescope.” Professor W. H. Pickering states that on examining a number of photographs of Mars, which were secured with the 11-inch Draper telescope during March 31st to April 30th, 1905, it was seen that no snow-caps properly so-called appeared until April 23rd. The photograph of March 31st showed clouds on both the terminator and the limb, but no polar caps. On April 23rd, a clearly visible and extensive light area appeared at the southern pole, but was not bright enough for snow, rather resembling an extensive region of clouds. A very small light area appeared near to the northern pole on April 15th, but was only seen with difficulty; a visual examination with a 24-inch reflector revealed the southern polar cap on April 30th, as extending far towards the north in longitude 340. Professor Pickering thinks that when the clouds disperse snow will probably be revealed lying in their place. He also contends that the observed seasonal coJour, changed from brown to green, on such features as the Mare Erythrzeum is the surest evidence of the existence of vegetation on Mars. Sixth Satellite of Jupiter.—This new satellite was discovered while observations were being made with the 36-inch Crossley reflector at the Lick Observatory during December 1904, and was confirmed by further observations on January 4th, 1905. Perrine, the discoverer, states that its distance from the planet on the latter date was 45 so that it is situated at a cousiderably greater distance PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. V/A | from the primary than any of the other previously known five satellites. Its photographic magnitude was fourteen, so that it is fainter than the fifth, which was discovered by Barnard in 1892. Seventh Satellite of Jupiter._A telegram containing a message from Campbell was received stating that the previously announced discovery of a seventh satellite to Jupiter had been confirmed ; it was discovered by Perrine with the Crossley refiector at the Lick Observatory. The Astronomer Royal of England exhibited and explained some photographs of the sixth and seventh satellites of Jupiter, obtained with the 30-inch reflector of the Thompson equatorial of Greenwich. The results of the provisional measures of the photographs, and _ their comparison with the angles and distances given by Dr. Ross’s ephemeris, the dates, and exposures are given in No. 1 VOL. Lxvi of the Monthly Notices. The exposures for the seventh satellite varied from 17 to 177 minutes. Solidification of the interior of a Planet.—_MM. Loewy and Puiseux have a short note concerning the extensive enquiry prosecuted by the authors into the evidence bearing on the physical state of the lunar crust as determined from a minute study of the features of the moon’s surface on the photographs taken with the equatorial Coudé at the Paris Observatory. Starting with a short reference to the views of Kelvin, Darwin, King, and Barns, advocating the view of the earth’s solidification as opposed to those of Suess and Lapparent, who think it to consist merely of a thin solidified crust enclosing a liquid viscous interior, the evidence supplied by the lunar formations is discussed and considered to favour the latter view. As evidence supporting the idea of gradual solidification from the surface inwards, the successive terrace formation seen in many lunar craters and seas is p4p4 H. A. LENEHAN. cited. In almost every case there appears evidence of five successive stages of solidification and consequent retreat of the confined fused materials. Some of the definite objections to this theory of solidification from the outer parts inwards are discussed and criticised in detail. Saturn.—Professor W. C. Pickering of the Harvard University has discovered a tenth satellite of Saturn. The stages of the discovery from the first suspicion of its presence to the confirmatory evidence extended over some years. The discovery of the ninth satellite was also made at Harvard Observatory by Bond. The new satellite has a period of revolution of twenty-one days, or a little less than that of Hyperion, a near by satellite, which revolves around Saturn in twenty-one days and six hours; it has an estimated diameter of 200 miles, and just beyond even telescopic vision, and only the sensitive plate can catch it, the motion of the satellite is direct—against the hands of the watch viewed from the north in the plane considerably inclined from the plane of the rings. Observations of the satellites of Saturn and Uranus involving some hundreds of individual settings were made by Messrs. Frederick and Hammond with the 26-inch equatorial of the United States Naval Observatory during 1904. Secondary shadow of Saturn’s rings.—In the course ofa series of observations of the planet Saturn at Aosta, in Italy, during the latter part of 1904, a secondary shadow was seen projected on the rings. It was definitely noted that the new shadow was curved, but in the opposite sense to the primary. The curvature appears to vary irregularly, sharply defined on the side nearest the planet; the shadow becomes attenuated towards the exterior border, while on drawings made from December 22nd-27th, there is shown a bifurcation of the part of the secondary shadow which was projected on the inner ring. Taking PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 23 the equatorial diameter of Saturn as unity, the mean distance of the shadow from the edge of the disc was found to be 0°13. All the observations were made with an equatorial of 17 cm. aperture and 2°02 m. focal length, using powers from 157—350 diameters, under atmospheric conditions generally very favourable. Lost Double Star.—A remarkable chapter of coincidences is recorded in No. 7, Vou. xitt of Popular Astronomy, by Professor Doolittle, of the Flower Observatory, U.S.A. In Sir John Herschel’s first catalogue of double stars, No. 165 was described as a 3” pair with a position angle of 330°, its position being given as R.A. 10h. 26°8m., Dec. + 12° 32’ (1825). In 1878 Professor Burnham directed his attention to the pair and recorded position angle as 205°.3' and distance 2°59". Again in 1901 he observed the double with the 40-inch refractor, and obtained a measure agreeing with Herschel’s record, but in 1902 he could find no trace of the pair observed in the previous year, nor of the star measured by him in 1878. Observations made in 1905, with the 18-inch refractor of the Flower Observatory, failed to reveal the double given by Herschel, but showed a very wide faint pair in the exact position given by him. Thinking that Professor Burnham in 1901 might have confused the sign of the declination, Professor Doolittle turned his telescope to the same R.A. and Dec. minus 12°, and there apparently found exactly the pair that was wanted. This seemed to have cleared up the mystery; Professor Burnham had in 1901 observed the wrong star. A letter from that observer showed, however, that this is not the correct explanation. The truth is that Herschel made a mistake of exactly one hour in recording the R.A. of H.165, and Professor Burnham had, unwittingly, made precisely the same mistake in 1901. Thus the latest observation of Herschel’s 94 H. A. LENEHAN. No. 165 shows its position to be R.A. 9h. 31m. 13s.— Dec. = + 12° 25’ (1880), and its position angle and distance, at the epoch 1905°38, were 333° 1’ and 2’04 respectively. In 1878, Professor Burnham, observing in the position given by Herschel, saw a pair which was not identical with H. 165, and in the year 1902 was too faint for him to see. In 1901, repeating Herschel’s mistake in the R.A., he observed the true H.165, whilst in 1905 Professor Doolittle found a similar pair to H.165 in the same declination south and in the R.A. given in mistake by Herschel. Magnetic Storms and Sun Spots.—William J. 8. Lockyer M.A., Ph.D, remarks :— “ During the year several interesting papers have been read on the subject of the magnetic disturbances 1882-1903 as recorded at Greenwich. The relationship between sun spots and the occurrence of these storms is evidently not yet solved, for to mention simply two of the deductions arrived at— Professor Schuster sums up his remarks in the following words :—‘ At present we are only able to form more or less plausible guesses as regards the necessary mechanism,” while Father Cortie comes to much the same conclusion, that no law has been established. An important question relative to the above problem is what is the period of rotation of the sun at sun spot level, and does this period remain the same at sun spot minimuin and maximum 4 Dr. Halm has shown that the spectroscopic observations at the level he examined exhibited different values of the velocity at maxima and minima for corresponding latitudes, and _ the differences in the velocities increase, the greater the heliographic latitude of the level at the solar limb. This important research, which has now been published more than a year and a half, opens up a field of inquiry of great interest.” Distribution of Actinic Sunlight on the northern hemi- sphere at summer solstice is considered, the conditions would reasonably be supposed to apply also to the southern hemi- PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 25 sphere. Mr. J. Sebelien (Phil. Mag., March 1905), after briefly reviewing the work of Halley and other authorities, brings together some values obtained by Bunsen and Roscoe into tabular form, showing the extent to which diffused daylight tends to equalise the numbers for the total quantity of light at the different latitudes. It is further shown that while at the equator the effect of the direct insolation on the said day has double the value of the daily effect of the diffused daylight these numbers will become equal in the neighbourhood of 49° north latitude, the further we get towards the north or south (if in the southern hemisphere) the more diffuseddaylight will dominate. Also it is shown that the preference conferred upon the northern and southern latitudes with regard to their actinic illumination at the equinoxes will increase with the declination of the sun, and reach its maximum value at the summer solstice. Then using the formulze of Bunsen and Roscoe, Mr. Sebelien has calculated the quantity of actinic light which on a midsummer day falls upon an horizontal element of surface from sunrise to sunset for every tenth degree of latitude ; the resulting values are plotted graphically. Meteorites.—H. KH. Wimperis states that it is probable that the velocities of meteorites are by the resistance of the atmosphere changed by a fractional part of the velocity, which fraction is independent of the velocity of approach; that the superior limit for incandescence is about 150 miles above the earth’s surface, and that no iron nfeteor, the original weight of which was less than 10 to 20lbs, reaches the earth’s surface, and that when a meteor does so, the temperature of its centre is not in general above that of liquid air (assuming the temperature of space to be absolute zero). Zodiacal Light.—A. H. Hansky gives details of observ- ations made on the evenings of September 21-22, 1904, at the observatory on the summit of Mount Blanc :— 26 H. A. LENEHAN. Under the exceptionally fine conditions it was possible to see that the form of the zodiacal light was a spherical triangle, with its apex near the ecliptic. At the time of observation (3h. 40m. Paris mean time) the height of the apex was 92 degrees; the length of the light, reckoning from the centre of the sun, 80 degrees, and its width at the horizon 25 degrees. The intensity increased towards the centre, but its maximum was not situated on the ecliptic, being about 3 degrees from it. Three zones were distinguishable in the body of the light, that described above, and of general feeble luminosity; a medial portion slightly parabolic in outline, and a central luminosity in the form of a parabola. As an approximate measure of intensity, the light at 55 degrees from the sun was estimated to be equal to that of the Milky Way, at 40 degrees about double this, and at 30 degrees three times. The colour was very difficult to define on account of the faintness of the light, but it was thought to be white with a trace of green. The paper concludes with various suggestions concerning the probable cause of the phenomenon. Reflecting Powers of Glass and Silvered Glass Mirrors.— Mr. C. A. Chant in a paper read before the Royal Astronomical Society of Canada, presents a review of former investigations on the reflecting power of various substances. For perpendicular incidence on numerous metals and alloys for wave-lengths ranging from 250 to 1500 mm., the general conclusion is that the reflectivity increases with the wave-length. Work on glass mirrors shows that the reflection will gradually fall off with age, although there may be no perceptible tarnish on the polished surface. A special arrangement was a photo- metric optical bench to admit of the mirror under comparison and its illuminant (a Hefner lamp) to be PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 27 turned together through any determined angle. Measure- ments of the light intensities were made with a Lummer-Brodhura photometer, arranged for equality of contrast. Tables and curves are given showing the results obtained at varying incidences with different types of plain glass and silvered surfaces. The initial superiority of silver before glass is about 6 per cent., but when the factor is considered, the silver behind glass is much more permanent in reflecting power. Thus a_ silver-fronted mirror after three months’ exposure had fallen to 68 per cent., whereas an ordinary commercial back- silvered mirror at least three years old, was still capable of reflecting 86°7 per cent. of the incident light. Lectures on Meteorology.—The Council of the Royal Meteorological Society, London, being desirous of advanc- ing the general knowledge of Meteorology and of promoting an intelligent public interest in the science, has appointed a lecturer, who is prepared to deliver lectures to scientific societies, schools, and institutions, on payment of a moderate fee and the cost of travelling expenses. The subjects are:—How to observe the weather, weather forecasting, climate, rainfall, thunderstorms, meteorology in relation to agriculture, health, etc. The Society is also prepared to lend and fit up a complete climatological station for exhibition, showing the necessary instruments in position and ready for use, and to lend, for a nominal sum, sets of lantern slides illustrating meteorological phenomena. This is work that could with advantage be introduced and carried on in our State. Bruce Telescope of Yerkes Observatory. —Details are given of the construction and performance of an important addition to the instrumental equipment of the Yerkes Obser vatory—a photographic doublet of 10 inches aperture equatorially mounted, with subsidiary companion teles- 28 H. A. LENEHAN. copes of 5 and 63 inch aperture clamped to the same frame—work. As for the work planned with this instrument it is necessary to make long uninterrupted exposures; the mounting has been so designed as to give a continuous motion across the meridian without reversal of the telescope. The focal length of the 10 inch lens is only 50 inches (128cm.) so that it is exceedingly rapid; it gives exquisite definition over a field about 7 in width, and by careful averaging may be made to cover a region of 9°. The plates used are 12 inches square, and the scale of photograph such that lin = 1°14° or 1°. = 0°88 inch. Guiding is performed with a high power eye piece on a o-inch telescope. For use in southern latitudes reversal gearing is provided in the driving train from the clock. The instrument was taken in Decemher, 1904, to Mount Wilson, in Southern California, where there is being established a branch Observatory of the Yerkes Institution. It is intended to replace the 6; lens by a new one of Jena glass, and an objective prism of the same aperture for spectroscopic investigation. The Mount Wilson Observatory.— HE. \W. Maunder, F.R.A.S., gives the following description of the Observatory on Mount Wilson, California, U.S.A. :— A most important step for the advancement of astronomy has been taken by the establishment of a Solar Observatory on Mount Wilson in Southern California, at an elevation of about 6000 feet, in an atmosphere free, through exceptionally long periods, from cloud, water vapor, dust, fog, or wind; its position is in latitude 34° 13’ 46” north and longitude 118° 3’ 40”, and is not far distant from the cities of Pasadena and Los Angeles. The plan of work proposed includes the following classes of observation :—(1) Frequent measures of the heat radiation of the sun, to determine whether there may be changes during the sun spot cycle in the amount of heat received from the sun by the ae = PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 29 earth, and the relative radiation of the various portions of the solar surface. (2) Studies of various solar phenomena, particularly through the use of powerful spectroscopes and spectroheliographs. (3) Photographic and spectroscopic investi- gations of the stars and nebulae with a very powerful reflecting . telescope for the principal purpose of throwing light on the problem of stellar evolution. There will be an attempt to realise more completely laboratory conditions in astrophysical research through the employment of fixed telescopes of the coeleostat type, and through the adoption of a Coudé mounting for the 5 ft. reflector, which will be one of the chief instruments employed. This would permit the use of mirrors or objectives of great focal length, providing a large image of the sun for study with spectroscopes and spectroheliographs, the use of long focus gratings mounted in a fixed position in constant temperature, laboratories, and the use of various laboratory instruments, such as the radiometer, which cannot now be used with a moving telescope. The Observatory will also have a workshop for the providing and designing of new instruments, and for the repair or adapting of the older telescopes. The Yerkes Observatory has lent the Snow telescope, which is already installed on Mount Wilson ; this instrument will eventually be returned when the Mount Wilson workshop has provided its Observatory with a similar instrument. The Bruce telescope has also been installed on the mountain during the summer of 1905, and Professor Barnard has been engaged with it in completing his photographic studies of the Milky Way. The present staff consists of Professor Hale, the director ; Professor G. W. Ritchey, astronomer and superintendent of instrumental construction; and Professor Ferdinand Ellerman and Professor W. S. Adams, assistant astronomers. Conference of Australian Astronomers.—From 10th-16th May, 1905, a conference of the Directors of the different Australian State Observatories was held in Adelaide under the chairmanship of Sir Charles Todd, M.A., K.C.M.G., 30 H. A. LENEHAN. etc., the oldest and most honored of our astronomers. He is one to whom we all look up with respect, and was complimented at the close of the conference on the able manner he had conducted the business and the happy way he had of smoothing over the difficulties of discussion. All topics of the various work of each Observatory, astronomical and meterological, were discussed, and consideration given to the proposition of the Federal Government to take over the various State establishments and form them under one control; also the problem of individual State administration. The various views of each member of the Conference were discussed, and a final set of resolutions and recommendations was _ for- mulated and embodied in the final report, which was presented later in the month to the respective Ministers of the various States controlling the Observatories. One feature brought out was the accumulated manuscript of astronomical results in the various Observatories, which in my own case (Sydney Observatory) represents the unpublished Transit Circle observations since 1881. I have repeatedly drawn attention to this matter, but have met with the same reply—‘‘the difficulty of obtaining money to publish.’’ This silence on the part of the Sydney Observatory has been questioned adversely, but in the face of the difficulty of getting Ministerial authority to print the matter, the comment is not just. Other recommendations as to the publishing of all results on a formulated basis, so that all the information could be comparable was suggested, and we look forward to this desired uniformity in the future. Much improvement can be introduced and obtained by either one central authority, for certainly meteorology; or by periodically meeting in conference of the heads of the Observatories who will carry out the decisions of the majority. This arrangement PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 31 we hope will be for the general good and will raise the tone of work in Australia. Visit of Dr. Alessio._-On January 8th, 1906, a distin- guished visitor in the person of Dr. Alberto Alessio, navigating Lieutenant of His Italian Majesty’s ship Calabria, visited Sydney for the purpose of verifying the investigations of previous observers in gravity and magnetic variation, dip, and intensity. These observations were carried out on the same sites as previously adopted at the Sydney Observatory, and the comparisons of deductions will be made some time in 1908, when the results of the whole of the places visited by the Calabria will be under discussion. Vastness of the Astronomical Work to be done.— Robert Hall Turner, F.R.S., states that the attention of astronomers has recently been claimed in so many new directions that they cannot possibly do justice to all, and some of the most attractive problems have accordingly failed to attract solvers. The astronomical standing army is a very small one, and much of it is wanted for home defence for keeping a watch on objects already discovered, and doing routine work that must be done. It is nobly reinforced by volunteers, and there is perfect accord between the regulars and the reserve forces. But we are in the presence of a vast extension of the Astronomical Hmpire and we begin to find how small our numbers are. Is it a vain hope that our ranks may be materially increased shortly ? Professor Darwin, president of the British Association, makes allusion to the number of stars visible and probable number in the heavens. Only a few thousand stars are visible with the unaided eye, but photography has revealed an inconceivably vast multitude of stars and nebulae, and every improvement in that art seems to disclose yet more and more. About 20 years ue oe “7 ee 4 32 H. A. LENEHAN. ago the number of photographic objects in the heavens was roughly estimated at about 170 millions, and some 10 years later it had increased to about 400 millions. Although Professor Newcomb, in his recent book on ‘The Stars,” refrains even from conjecturing any definite number, yet [ suppose that the enormous number of 400 millions must now be far below the mark, and photographically still grows year by year. It seems useless to consider whether the number of stars has any limit, for infinite number, space and time, transcend our powers of comprehension. We must then make a virtue of necessity, and confine our attention to such more _ limited views as seen within our powers. A celestial photograph looks at first lke a dark sheet of paper splashed with whitewash, but further examination shows that there is some degree of method in the arrangement of the white wash spots. It may be observed that the Stars in many places are arranged in lines and sweeping trains, and chains of stars, arranged in roughly parallel curves seem to be drawn round some centre. A surface splashed at hazard might present apparent evidence of svstem in a few instances, but the frequency of the occurrence in the heavens renders the hypothesis of mere chance altogether incredible. Expedition to the North Pole.—Commander Peary sailed in July to make a further attempt to reach the North Pole. He intends going by the Smith Sound or American route to the Pole, and force his ship to a base within 500 miles of the Pole itself, and sledge across the polar pack. The arctic ship Roosevelt has been built for this expedition, constructed so as to withstand ice pressure, and so shaped that this ice pressure will have the effect of raising the vessel out of water. A wireless telegraphic outfit will be carried, and one or two relay stations in Greenland will keep her in permanent communication PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 33 with the permanent telegraph station at Chateau Bay, Labrador, and thence by existing lines with New York; by the same means communication with the Hxpedition will be possible for some of the distance. In February, 1906, the sledge party intended to move forward for the northern dash. The ship carries two years’ supply. A permanent sub-base is established at Cape Sabine, west coast of Smith’s Sound, where the services of the necessary Eskimos will be secured. The vessel will be forced through Kane Basin and Kennedy and Robeson Channels to the north coast of Grant Land, or of Greenland, if the conditions compel it, and there winter within the 500 miles limit of the Pole. This dash may occupy five months. In the event of the Roosevelt failing to force Kennedy and Robeson Channels during the first summer, the dash for the Pole will be postponed until the following February, 1907. Reinforced Concrete.—During the session just ended a paper on steel and iron reinforced concrete was before the Society, and the following interesting preliminary report issued by the Mines branch of the Canadian Department of the Interior bears on this question; it has reference to raw materials, manufacture, and uses of hydraulic cements in Manitoba. It has been drawn up by Mr. J. Walter Wells, and involved an examination of the limestones, marls, clays, shales and coal deposits of the province— particulars are added of the cement mills in North Dakota, in Minnesota, and in South Dakota, and much information is given regarding the manufacture of cement from the raw materials available, that cannot fail to be of practical value in furthering the cement industry of Manitoba and generally throughout the world. In that province, timber is becoming scarce, and suitable stone and bricks are expensive; cement is therefore coming into increasing use C—May 2, 1906. 34 H. A. LENEHAN. in house and farm construction, in railway work, in municipal work, and in factories and mills. Within the last eight years the uses of concrete have been greatly extended by the introduction of iron and steel re-inforcements, consisting of skeleton structures so arranged in the concrete masses, that rods, bars, wires, and bands help in resisting stresses in tension. A very important application of re-inforced cement concrete in Manitoba is the construction of grain elevators. The various applications of cement in the province are well shown in the photographic illustrations of the report. Decimal System.—An important step in the direction of the adoption by England of a decimal system of weights and measures has been taken by the Board of Trade, in which the Board was asked to authorise weights of 20tbs., 10tbs., and Slbs., as aliquot parts of the cental. Lord Salisbury writes :— “Your suggestion that new denominations of weights of 20hbs., 10lbs., and 5lbs., should be legalised for use in trade. The Board of Trade have given careful consideration to the representations which have been made, and they are prepared to assent to the application. Steps will therefore be taken for the preparation of standards of the same octagonal form as the present 50tbs. weight. The Chambers consider that this concession will save time, labor, and expense, as the 50ibs. weight has done already.” A Botanical Congress.—A Botanical Congress at Vienna, June 11th to 18th, 1905, adjourned from Paris, October 1900, was an impressive demonstration of the activity of botany as a science, and of the enthusiasm of its members. Over 600 botanists, men and women, representing nearly all the important, and many of the less important botanical institutions of the world met there (New South Wales was unfortunately not represented). Nearly every European country, America, China, and other countries PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 35 sent representatives. The opening of the Botanical Exhibition, in the orangery of the historic palace of Schonbrunn just outside the city, occupied the first day. This exhibition was an exceedingly interesting one, and showed the present position of botany from a teaching as well as from a general view. A series of diagrams and coloured photographic lantern slides of microscopic preparations, flowers and plant associations and other objects; living cultures of Algae—all kinds of apparatus and photographs of tropical vegetation in Brazil, Malaya, etc., were shown. A remarkable feature was the unique specimen of Fockea capensis, a member of the family Asclepiadaceae, which, originally brought from the Cape, still remains the only known specimen. The plant has a hard woody rhizome as big as a child’s head from which in rainy seasons numerous shoots are developed. It was described and drawn by Jacquin in his “* Fragmenta ”’ at the beginning of the last century. Jacquin wrote repeatedly to Sir Joseph Banks’ secretary Dryander, and the London Society are pleased to possess these communications together with the many _ exquisitely delicate drawings. Jacquin’s herbarium, consisting largely of plants cultivated in Vienna and the Schonbrunn gardens, was bought by Banks and is now in the general collection of the British (Natural History) Museum. During the sitting of the Congress a bust of Nicholas Joseph Jacquin, who was Professor of Chemistry and Botany at Vienna from 1769-1796 was unveiled in his honour in the Fest-Saale of the University. Quoting from Professor Wiesner’s appreciation at the ceremony :— “His broad horizon and great powers of organisation were shown in the fact that, in the second half of the 18th century, no scientific, and especially no natural scientific undertaking was started in which Jacquin did not take an important part. He embodied the ideal of the academic teacher.” 36 ‘ H. A. LENEHAN. On the same occasion was also unveiled the bust of Jan. Ingenhousz (1730-1799) a Netherlander by birth, who spent the greater part of his working life in Vienna. He was physician to the Empress Maria Theresa and the Emperor Joseph II. Botanists know him best as one of the earliest workers in the sphere of plant physiology. The principal practical outcome of the Congress was the adoption, after much debate, of a revised code of nomenclature. This code will be duly promulgated and until this is the case details cannot be discussed, but we know from the reports of delegates that the advanced innovators in nomenclature were in the minority. General matters of interest occupied the attention of the members during the following days, and Brussels was selected as the place of meeting of the third Congress which will be held in 1910. Memorial to Banks.—_In the preceding paragraphs mention is made of the connection between Jacquin and Sir Joseph Banks. This would be a fitting opportunity to draw the attention of the members who can assist to the fact that a “‘ Fund ”’ for the purpose of erecting a suitable memorial to Banks, who has been fittingly described as the ‘“‘Father of Australia,’’? has been established. This movement has been set on foot by some of the principal citizens of Sydney, who hope to enlist the sympathy and practical assistance of those who can afford to help to establish a public memorial, in order that Australians can be reminded of the credit due to the beneficent guardian of the interests of Australia in the early days, and an investigator of her vegetation, zoology and material resources. Our indefatigable Hon. Secretary Mr. J. H. Maiden has been appointed Hon. Secretary of the move- ment; I have had the honour of being appointed Hon. . Treasurer, and I would certainly like to have an PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 37 opportunity of giving receipts for additional funds to the object. Mr. Maiden informs me that he is at work on a lantern-lecture and also on a popular life of Banks; so that Australians may be readily informed as to the principal occurrences in his useful life, particularly as regards this continent. Science and Education.—Sir William Huggins, president of the Royal Society of London, in his annual address before vacating the chair, dwelt upon the influence which discoveries of science have had upon the general life and thought of the world, especially during the last 50 years, and the place science should take in general education and in the direction of bringing out and developing the powers and freedom of the individual, under the stimulation of great ideas. To become all that we can attain as individuals, is our most glorious birth- right, and only as we realise it, do we become at the same time of great importance to the community. From individual minds are born all great discoveries and revolutions of thought. New ideas may be in the air and more or less present in many minds, but it is always an individual who at last takes the creative step and enriches mankind with the living germ-thought of a new era of opinion. This opinion from a man of the standing of Sir William Huggins is one that ought to be borne in mind by all who can in anyway help in the march of scientific thought. Many will perhaps fail, but others may be the fortunate solvers of problems. We in Australia have had our successes in physical development, why not in other and more glorious investigations? Young men of the greatest ability are with us and take the premier positions in our Universities, and under the able tuition of our professors are exceptionally well favoured ; these success- ful students have the ball at their feet—let them do their 38 H. A. LENEHAN. best to leave to posterity a name that will be honoured. One other sentiment Sir William Huggins expresses is :— “Glorious will be the days when, through a reform of our higher education, every man going up to the Universities will have been from his earliest years under the stimulating power of a personal training in practical elementary science; all his natural powers being brought to a state of high efficiency, and his mind actively proving al] things under the vivifying influence of freedom of opinion. Throughout life he will be on the best terms with nature, living a longer life under her protecting care, and through the further disclosures of herself rising successively to higher levels of being and of knowledge.” The sentiments of the whole of the valuable report ought to be embedded in the minds of all who value education and the march of science. Then in speaking of the early education of youth, elementary science, taught with the aid of experiment during a boy’s early years, cannot fail to develop the faculty of observation. However keen in vision, the eyes see little without training in observation by the subtle exercise of the mind behind them. From the humblest weed to the stars in their courses, all nature is a great object lesson for the acquirement of the power of rapid and accurate noting of minute and quickly changing aspects in the simpler methods of scientific observation; it confers upon a man for life the possession of an inexhaustible source of interest and delight, and is of no mean advantage in the keen competition of the intellectual activities of the present day. PLANTS WHICH IN DRYING STAIN PAPER. 39 NOTHS on somME PLANTS WHIcH IN DRYING STAIN PAPER. By J. H. MAIDEN, Government Botanist and Director of the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. [Read before the Royal Society of N. 8S. Wales, June 6, 1906. } EVERYONE with herbarium experience must have made the observation that some plants stain the papers to which they are attached. Some, indeed, stain so persistently (e.g. Drosera Whittakeri) that the colouring matter will penetrate a dozen sheets or more. I have not observed that any botanist has drawn special attention to the matter and do not know that any one has given an explan- ation of these phenomena. I say phenomena, because the colouring or rather staining may arise from various causes, e.g. the presence of a specific colouring matter in the root or other portion of the plant, or the formation of a coiour- ing matter by oxidisation or other chemical change. The subject is of course one for a chemist, who will subject the paper itself to examination. It will be observed that the plants, in many cases, leave sharp photographic impressions on the paper. The phenomena arise from an emanation,—a dry distillation possibly. It is proper to point out that herbarium speci- mens in the National Herbarium, Sydney, are protected from insect ravages by means of naphthaline. No bichloride of mercury is used, but most plants are placed in a bisul- phide of carbon chamber before they are placed in the herbarium boxes. Most of the stains appear to be purplish, of varying intensity; the remainder are mostly greys and browns. The drying black of plants which do not stain is a cognate 40 J. H. MAIDEN. matter which must not be confused with the subject of staining. Many saprophytes and root parasites dry black, e.g. Monotropa (Monotropacez), Gerardia (Scrophulari- aces), Comandra (Santalaceze). Some Veronicas, appar- ~ ently not root-parasitic dry black, as also do some Utricu- larias. In Zygophyllum there is some stain, but this apparently emanates from the juice only of the succulent plant, and this belongs to a different class of phenomena. I submit to you alist of a few plants (arranged iu natural orders alphabetically) which I have observed as having stained paper in my own herbarium. The list is too small for me to deduce much as regards botanical relationships ; it may be added to as search in this and other large herbaria will undoubtedly being forth many additional instances. BIXACEA. Scolopia Gerrardi, Harv. (South Africa). Oncoba spinosa, Forsk. (Arabia). Azara microphylla, Hook. (Chili). These plants, from widely different countries, produce a greenish-grey, greasy looking stain, the Scolopia and the Azara very abundantly, the Oncoba to a less extent. BORAGINACEA. Alkanna tinetoria, Tausch. The root produces a purple stain, the weil known alkanet. COMPOSIT. Helichrysum baccharoides, F.v.M., Australia. The whole plant produces a red to purple blush. CONVOLYVULACE. Ipomecea heterophylla, R.Br. The young leafy tips of this Australian plant produce a reddish-brown stain. . or PLANTS WHICH IN DRYING STAIN PAPER. 41 DROSERACEA. The first reference to the staining power of Australian Droseras I can find is as follows’ :—‘*‘ These Droseracous plants appear likely to be in some cases of commercial value as dyers’ plants. Every part of D. gigantea stains paper of a brilliant deep purple; and when fragments are treated with ammonia they yieldaclear yellow. The bulbs of D. erythrorrhiza and stolonifera possess the same property; in these there is a deep scarlet powder secreted by the scales of the bulbs, which is instantly dissolved in ammonia, forming at first an orange-colored fluid of great richness, but it soon changes to the rich purple above mentioned.” Hooker’ largely follows Lindley in some remarks on D. stolonifera, Endl. Later on, Bentham’ remarks, ‘‘ Nearly all the species of this section (Hrgaleium) dye the paper in which they are preserved a rich carmine or purple colour.”’ It remained, however, for Prof. H. H. Rennie of Adelaide to examine the colouring matter of this genus. He first extracted two beautiful red colouring matters from the corms,’ and subsequently submitted these colouring matters to an exhaustive examination.’ GENTIANACEA. Gentiana saxosa, Forst., from the Australian Alps, gives a yellowish-brown, but not strong stain. LOGANIACEA. Logania linifolia, Schlecht. A specimen from the Mallee district, Victoria, stains paper very strongly purplish; the stain actually goes through the paper. 1 Appendix to Edwards’ Botanical Register :—‘* A sketch of the vegeta- tion of the Swan River Colony,” by John Lindley, xxi. (1839). * Icones Plantarum, Vol. tv., tab. 389 (1841). 3 Flora Australiensis, 11., 462. * Journ. Chem. Soc., April 1887. j * «The colouring matter of Drosera Whittakeri,” Journ. Chem. Soc., LXIII. 1083 (1893). 49 J. H. MAIDEN. L. ovata, R. Br. and L. longifolia, R. Br., also Australian plants, likewise exhibit marked stains. Strychnos psilosperma, F.v.M., N.S. Wales and Queens- land, affords a purplish stain, not so intense as Logania. OLEACE. Jasminum simplicifolium, Forst. Specimens from New South Wales, and Lord Howe Island exhibit a greasy-looking grey stain. MYRTACEA. Some species of Eucalyptus exhibit a greyish stain, which does not appear to he an oil stain. Instances are H. virgata, Sieb., and its variety obtusiflora; also E, Luehmanniana, F.v.M. POLYGALACEA. Comesperma retusum, Labill., C. sylvestre, Lindl., and C. ericinum, DC., stain the paper purplish. This tends to confirm the close affinity between these three Hastern Australian species, already ascertained on morphological grounds. The stain is also seen in C. flavum, DC., and C. calymega, Labill., two Western Australian species. The stain is of considerable persistence, it being well marked in Dr. Leichhardt’s specimens collected in 1843. The stain is most marked in C. retusum so far as my specimens go. I have also observed that in some specimens (e.g., C. ericinum) the purplish stain is succeeded by a dull brown one. This opens the enquiry as to how long the purple stain persists as such and when it changes colour in the cases in which it appears to change with age. RANUNCULACEA, Clematis pubescens, Huegel, a Western Australian species affords a purplish-brown stain which I[ notice in no other species. | | PLANTS WHICH IN DRYING STAIN PAPER. 43 RHAMNACEA. Alphitonia excelsa, Reissek. A well marked brown Stain is observable in specimens from the Kurrajong, N.S. Wales. I donot notice it in specimens from other localities. This may be connected with the colouring matter surround- ing the seeds, but the pigment which has made such a marked photographic representation of the included plant must be somewhat volatile. SAMYDACEA. Homalium rufescens, Benth., a Natal plant, exhibits a grey, not abundant, stain. SANTALACEA. Fusanus persicarius, R. Br., and F. acuminatus, DC. (Quandong), both Australian plants, show a profuse brown stain, Fusanus is, according to some botanists, congeneric with Santalum. Ido not notice the stains in any species of Santalum (as recognised by Bentham). SCROPHULARIACEA. The Veronicas are very interesting in this connection, affording a dark purplish stain. This is seen in Australian species including V. formosa, R. Br., V.nivea, Lindl., V. arenaria, Cunn. Amongst New Zealand species we have V.vernicosa, Hook. f.,V. loganioides, Armstrong, V. Lyalli, Hook. f., and V. Traversi, Hook. f. In Huropean species I have noticed it in V. fruticulosa, Linn. (very abundant); V. alpina, Linn.; V. serpyllifolia, Linn. (England); V. saxatilis, Jacq. (Switzerland). 7 VERBENACEA. Lippia nodiflora, Linn. I noticea stain in one specimen from Byron Bay, N.S. Wales, but not in specimens from other parts of the world. se) peks eee 44 J. H. MAIDEN, I have taken no cognizance of Cryptogams, but Mr. Richard Helms, a member of our Society, has obligingly exhibited some species of Hymenophyllum, and has furnished the following notes on them :—*‘ There are three species of New Zealand ferns known to me which stain the dry- ing paper. These are Hymenophyllum polyanthos, H. villosum and H. bivalve. ‘There is no difficulty with ordinary care to dry the filmy fernsin their natural colours, and each of these men- tioned are no exception. H. polyanthos sometimes develops fronds to 7 inches (without the stalk) which are of a dense dark green, and show the venation indistinctly, making when first dried exceptionally handsome specimens. Soon after getting perfectly dry this fern develops a peculiar, rather strong odour, of which I do not know anything similar. It is however not unpleasant, although neither exactly pleasant. The strength of this odour increases for a considerable time and then it gradually diminishes, yet lasting for many years. My specimens collected upwards of twenty years ago still retain it slightly. Ti ever so carefully kept in a perfectly dry state and excluded from moisture variations in the atmosphere, this fern will become discoloured in often less than a month after first being dried, getting soon quite brown. At this time it begins to stain the paper. The stain like the frond brown is undoubtedly of an oily nature, and soon will penetrate a sheet of tissue paper leaving on both sides of it a perfect impression, which may gradually penetrate a number of layers of even thicker paper. “H. villosum is a mountain species occurring from 2,500 to 5,000 feet. It isin my opinion purely a very charac- teristic variety of H. polyanthos. It is not of the dark even green colours as this fern, but when first dried rather faintly streaky and showing the venation distinctly. Its TESTING OF BUILDING MATERIALS BY SAND BLAST APPARATUS. 45 fronds are generally not over 24 to 3 inches long, excluding the fine stalk which varies in length according to situation. It discolours in a similar manner as H. polyanthos and Stains the paper likewise with an oily impression. The peculiar odour is however not so strong as with H. poly- anthos. Distinct differences may be observed in these two ferns, but the peculiar odour as well as the oily exudation common to both characterises them as mere varieties of the same species. ‘“‘H. bivalve can also not be keep green for many months after preparation. It dries a peculiar delicate green with a faint milky hue and discolours to a pale brown in a few months. It does not develop any peculiar odour after being dried, and does not always stain the paper and generally only faintly when it does. The stain however looks oily.” THE TESTING or BUILDING MATERIALS on ABRASION By THE SAND BLAST APPARATUS. By H. BurcHARTZ, Mitarbeiter des Koniglichen Material- prifungsamtes ftir Gross Lichterfelde, (Germany). (Communicated by Prof. W. H. WARREN, m. Inst. c.B. ) (With Plate I.] [Read before the Royal Society of N. 8. Wales, July 4, 1906.) IT is very important to select for building purposes the best materials, more especially if they are used for paving roads and sidewalks, or for covering floors. In addition to the price, the durability of the material must receive due con- sideration, but it is not so easy to find out a method for testing the wearing qualities, or the resistance to abrasion of materials which will give satisfactory and reliable results 46 H. BURCHARTZ. in a comparatively short time. While it is true that one can pave small tracts of a street, etc., with various materials and expose them to the trafiic, which would be the best method of determining the resisting force against the influence of mechanical wear, or of the atmosphere, such practical experiments often last several years before the question is definitely decided as to which is the most dur- able and the cheapest material. No modern community can afford to wait such a long time. It is most desirable to be able to determine the relative values of different materials for paving and similar purposes in a comparatively short time. However, the method generally used is the abrasion tests proposed by Bausch- inger, which consists in grinding specimens of material on cast iron discs with corundum, or the materials are treated in tumbling cylinders, (rattlers), with or without steel balls. Neither of these methods gives a reliable result. The small parts of the material under trial are separated in the grinding process and increase the wearing out; on the other hand, they reduce the effect of the shocks in the rattler by filling the interstices of the material. Again, as the grinding material itself is used up it is impossible to prevent the same grains being used repeatedly, thus changing their shape and effect, and with soft elastic materials the hard grains of the grinding powder partly penetrate the test piece, thus reducing the grinding effect; the grains now rub each other instead of the surface of the specimen, as this is protected by the grains fixed in it. In consequence of the defects of this method of grinding, the results obtained do not give a true guide to the behaviour of the materials under practical conditions. A new method of treating the materials, by which the difficulties and errors of the methods now in use are avoided, which moreover possesses the great advantage that the TESTING OF BUILDING MATERIALS BY SAND BLAST APPARATUS. 47 grain producing the grinding acts independently of its bearer, and that each grain touches only once, is demon- strated by the test with the sand-blast. The effect of the sand-blast is well known by the examples offered by nature, and by the various uses of this medium in some industries. What can be effected by the grinding influence of the sand blown by the wind during centuries is shown, for instance, by the renowned pyramid of Ghizeh; and it can be seen frequently how the dust and sand particles, in a few years, wear out and round off the edges and outstanding parts of buildings. This slow action of the natural sand- blast is imitated in a much higher degree by the artificial sand-blast employed for making dim glass, and cleaning the surface scales of rolled iron. The sand blast apparatus used for industrial purposes has undergone some changes in order to use it for testing building materials. Such an apparatus in use for abrasion tests in the Royal Institute for testing materials at Gr. Lichterfelde (Germany), is shown in the annexed figure. The working of this apparatus and its effect may be shortly described as follows :—From the sand chamber n the sand falls through small tubes q on to the plate a and thence by smali openings into a slit where it is raised by the steam and blown upwards against the piece under test. The steam entering through the pipe is dried in the cylinder b. To shut off the steam from the apparatus a valve is inserted in the steam pipe (this valve is not shown on the drawing). Another valve is placed at e and must be closed for some minutes before using the apparatus in order to heat the sand, as otherwise it would become wet by condensation of the steam; r is a valve for shutting off the sand. The 1 Gary—Versuche mit dem Sandstrahlgeblase. Mitteilungen aus dem Kgl. Materialpriifungsant, Gr. Lichterfelde, 1904, Heft 2, S. 103, ff. Verlag J. Springer, Berlin. 48 7 H. BURCHARTZ. steam and the dust from the sand being raised by the steam exhausterd; dry sand only is thrown against the specimen. The slide e allows the immediate stoppage of the sand stream. The test piece g is fixed in the frame f and is moved over the sand blast by turning the handle by means A new apparatus for testing building materials on abrasion. Scale 1 : 10. of a planet driving gear. Under the sample is placed a sheet iron templet with a round opening of 6 c/m.=(2°4 inches) diameter, and the sand blast makes a recess in the material only on this area of 28 sq. c/m. = (4°34 sq. inches). This recess shows the quality and the characteristic quali- ties of the material, and the more or less homogeneity of TESTING OF BUILDING MATERIALS BY SAND BLAST APPARATUS. 49 the different parts, the finer or coarser grain, the uniformity or the irregularity of the wearing out, and as a result whether the material or its constituents are of equal or unequal hardness. It shows the thickness of the coloured layer of burned plates, and of the fine grained covering of concrete plates, as well as the fibrous structure of the various kinds of wood. All these effects of the sand blast on various materials will be clearly seen from the accompanying photographs. These peculiarities and characteristics of materials are not shown by the grinding or rattling process. By treating materials on a Bauschinger grinding disc a flat surface only is obtained. Some results obtained in the Prussian Testing Laboratory, mentioned above, on abrasion tests made with different materials on the Bauschinger machine, and also by means of the sand blast apparatus are given in TableI. The data given by these results sufficiently prove that the new method described above is most suitable for testing road and floor materials, as it gives reliable infor- mation on their quality and on their resistance to wear and abrasion in practical use. At the same time the test under the sand blast gives valuable suggestions as to the possibility of protecting building materials. The duration of the exposure to the sand blast has been fixed at two minutes after many experiments, the steam gauge indicating 2 atms. pressure, or 44 Ibs. per sq. inch. This short time suffices to get a good summary of the structure of the materials tested and their resisting force. The sand used in the Prussian testing institute isa natural quartz sand of fine and nearly round grains, obtained by washing and drying the original sand, and sieving the same on a sieve with 120 meshes per sq. c/m., or about 784 meshes per sq. inch (28 meshes per lineal inch). It is the waste of the manufacturing of the German standard sand D—July 4, 1906. 50 H. BURCHARTZ. used for testing Portland Cement, the grains of which pass the sieve of 60 meshes and are retained on the sieve with 120 meshes per sq. cm. The dried specimens of material (a) size 7 x 7°1 em. (2°8 x 2°8 inches)=50 sq. cm. or 7°75 sq. inches area, are weighed before and after the exposure to the sand blast; also the weight of volume (b), that is the weight is deter- mined (in grammes of the unit of volume of the material; including interstices r (in gem.) Loss of weight in grammes Weight of volume r in grammes gives figure expressing the resistance of the material to abrasion, and may be used in comparing the value of different materials. The value of, The sand blast apparatus is built by Alfred Gutmann, Actiengesellschaft in Ottensen near Hamburg, Germany). (a) The specimens are either cut out of the materials by means of diamond saws, or formed in moulds if the material is made out of a plastic mass like mortar. (b) The weight of volume is not to be confounded with specific gravity, that is the weight (in grammes) of the unit of volume of the material without interstices (in ccm.) Weight of volume r Specific gravity s The value of = ¢L The difference :—1 —d =u; the contents of the inter- stices, or the porosity. ~ D1 TESTING OF BUILDING MATERIALS BY SAND BLAST APPARATUS. oe SSOT OT} O4 p soya ST awnyo O€ 196 O&€FOs 0808 0008 Os LIT OTOTP OL6LE OOESE ‘Tout savnbs red unod ut qj3sue14s du10d asViloAy Sp @AIssod €0-0 08-0 90-T G§-0 C6-8 OS-TT Fc0-0 99.0 G10 160-0 65-0 89:0 A}YV[NOTBo/aq youueR) (¢ 9-T OJoIIT} ‘S|[VItayVUU 0-2 OJ poulm|teqyop you ee A jo 4yS\temoyg, | \ 6-T OT-0 OT-S 86:6 19-0 0€-¢ 10-8 9Z-0 TPL 9Z-F1 9T-O LoD co. 11 ST-0 O€-P OV-IT é1-0 68-4 20-0T 9T-0 6V-P t9-6 61-0 68.¢ LV-11 90-0 99.1 90-7 96-T G9-SE TS-EL LL.0 18-16 IP-8P 86-0 60-8 69-16 ST-0 UG-V 40-11 GL-O 66-& FI-8 60-0 79-6 16-9 ‘uld “Ds Jed ‘m100 vale "uldD dD “Sury) jo Jun 94 074 psonnsy ‘snqereddy yseiq pueg WO poqsay, SS 86 ; 88-1 TV-0 v-06 86 OS 869.1 ¢¢0.0 L£L-T 86 OG TéTL 620-0 LV 8G OS SSL-T te ye 9z ago aco 9Z 500 see p00 QZ ere 500 600 : QZ 000 p00 61-0 G-6 86 og SPT-0 OT-0 TS 86 OS 08¢-0 9S 0 L-L6 86 v-9V 666-1 c6-0 Pol 86 OS) 61V-6 66:0 Vv VI 86 OS L146 cé-0 LG1 83 Og L966 96-0 L-€1 & OS 9PT-S ST-0 v4 8G og 961-3 80-0 LV 8Z Og GEP-G 70-6 0:c0T 86 0g | £90-6 98.0 G.cV 8Z OS V1G-G 69 0 L166 86 Og 619-6 cé-0 Vv cl 86 OS) 09:6 LT-0 8 86 OS) DVT-G O1-0 T-G 86 Og G19-6 ne ‘Ds Bo: ida. are 8) . . “Wo ‘bg 04 poonpow cantare pees ‘ur09 aod aulpoey, tosurtposucg ASIA PUSS) -yosneg (| “SoH uo poe}say, (1)ouIN[OA ‘sqsoq, OMY, JO O8BIDAV) [VILOFVI[ JO SSO'T JO 4Ysto {| ‘“poqzeeay, vory POEL EES ‘NOISVUaV ig <, PUOIDAT ,, ‘GUIIOAOD LOO, aes key Joop Mou VW oe (q) Mnefoury (y) mnooury ould IQ) “"qoved 8414 M qoved ped ould ped ould soye{d (9401000) yueWIE_ a * qoulog , ‘seqyeid proyiuvay "* yooqso[d py ‘Sv[s eovusnj 4se[q ae wmnyoog ‘sujs eovusny se] q SJOYUI[D SUIACT soyeid 1OyUILO soyetd Av OD i QLOMISI() SSOINH) ‘OUOJSOML'T Youq[nszeqgO ‘euoyspuvg "* souueg fo4B]souuag eyyurmsuny ‘dey, ueqejedoy ‘Aadydaog ome ‘oJIURAy eee eee oon oes eee coe ooo ooo eee eee ove eee eee eee ‘TULLOPV]T 9} JO UTSIIQ puv owMVNy ‘SALVUVddY LSVIG GNVS HHL OGNV WNIHOVIN THONTHOSOAVEA AHL NO SONIUMAOO VOOTA GNV SIVISMELVN ONIAVd HALIM HAVA S.LSH.L fO SLTOASASA St bo R. T. BAKER AND HENRY G. SMITH. VITIS OPACA, F.v.M., anD A CHEMICAL INVESTIGA- TION oF Irs ENLARGED ROOTSTOCK (TUBER). By RIcHARD T. BAKER, F.L.S., Curator, and HENRY G. SMITH, F.c.s., Assistant Curator, Technological Museum, Sydney. [With Plates II., III. ] {Read before the Royal Society of N. S. Wales, August 1, 1906. } Ovk attention was first drawn to this subject by Mr. B. H. Sampson, Superior Public School, Tamworth, who in June, 1905, sent to the Museum some very fine specimens of ‘tubers’ from the roots of a Native Grape, and which were exhibited the same month at the Linnean Society of New South Wales. Specimens of the so-called ‘tuber’ were afterwards received, attached to a whole plant bearing inflorescence and fruits and from which the species was determined as Vitis opaca, F. v. M. Investigation also proved that of all the species of Vitis recorded by Bentham and Mueller in the *‘ Flora Austral- iensis,’? not One possesses so great a leaf variation as V. opaca, and the leaf variation is so great that it is doubtful whether its description would not almost cover that of V. angustissima, F. v. M., a West Australian species, which however has perhaps a distinct inflorescence from that of V.opaca. Bentham’s description of the leaves of V. opaca, F. v. M.,’ covers a fair amount of latitude of morphological variation, but the systematic material examined by us shows that this species has a greater leaf variation than that of the material he examined. Under these circum- stances we now submit the following amended description of the morphology of the leaf of V. opaca. 1B. Fl, Vol. L, p. 450; ~ 6 CHEMICAL INVESTIGATION OF THE ROOTSTOCK OF VITIS OPACA. 93 **Leaflets 5 to 3 rarely 4, up to 5 inches long, linear, cuneate, elliptical, oblong, obovate, narrow lanceolate to full lanceolate, occasionally irregularly toothed or crenate, narrowed at the base into either a long or very short petiolule, or even sessile; membranous, dull or not shining, finely veined, the underside of the leaves paler than the upper.”’ A specimen obtained by Mr. Carne, F.G.s., Assistant Goverment Geologist, from Mount Dangar, Goulburn River, N.S. Wales, has one solitary fair sized leaf which is deltoid in shape, the base being quite straight and the lateral sides below the middle lobed or irregularly toothed. Baron von Mueller in his Kragmenta, Vol. v., p. 210, mentions that V. opaca produces from 8—10 tubers weighing from 20 — 25 lbs., and Dr. Woolls is also mentioned (loc. cit.) as recording tubers in connection with V, clematidea, F. v. M. 3 It would appear from data published concerning the. edible character of these “‘tubers”’ that it was not unknown to the autochthonous tribes of Queensland, for Dr. Roth records that the tubers of V. trifolia are roasted and used for food, and of V. clematidea that the roots are eaten after being beaten on stones and then roasted. Thozet states that the “‘yams’’ as he calls them, of V. opaca, the subject of this paper, are eaten without any preparation. Chemistry—The tuber taken for analysis weighed 2 Ibs. and was in quite a fresh state. It had a diameter of 95 mm. anda length of 190 mm. Externally it had much the appearance of a large potato, and when cut had an odour which also resembled that of the potato. It was covered externally with a thin brown, papery coating. In trans- verse section it was at first light in colour, but soon became of a pinkish tint when exposed to the air. The juice on 54 R. T. BAKER AND H. G. SMITH. the cut face was not opaque, was quite mucilaginous in appearance, and could be readily drawn out into threads. The ‘tuber’ as can be seen from the photograph was formed of concentric rings from the centre to the outside, some of these rings were darker in colour than others, and altogether the appearance resembled that shown by the annual rings in timber. There were twelve rings in the specimen taken, so that if the rings are annual the tuber would be 12 years old. Radiating from the centre to the exterior were medullary rays, built up with vascular bundles, spiral vessels being very pronounced. A transverse section was composed almost entirely of ordinary cells, together with the spiral vessels of the vascular bundles forming the radiating portions. A very marked feature of a microscopical section was the presence of an abundance of raphides of calcium oxalate, and the ‘tubers’ of this species form excel- lent material for the demonstration of raphides in plant sub- stance. Portions were taken from several tubers and they all presented the same appearance. The raphides were in bundles of needles in the cells, and also as isolated needle crystals, radiating in all directions, or parallel. When a portion of the “‘tuber’’ was stained with an aqueous solution of rosaniline and afterwards cleared with glycerol, the ligneous portion of the ‘tuber’ was seen to be restricted almost entirely to the spiral vessels. A portion stained with iodine coloured alone the starch, and had no action whatever on the cell tissue. The starch granules had much the appearance of those of potato starch, but were generally smaller. There appeared to be no regular deposition of the starch in particular cells, and the granules were sparsely distributed through the mass. The amount of starch present could hardly equal one tenth of one per cent., judging from the microscopic determination and the result of the extraction. Inulin could not be detected; it was specially sought for in the aqueous extract at 50 —60° C. CHEMICAL INVESTIGATION OF THE ROOTSTOCK OF VITIS OPACA. 5D When the mucilage was removed from the pulverised ‘tuber,’ by treating with water at 50 —60°C., the remainder showed the raphides in an excellent manner; the mass appeared to be laced together by them, both in bundles and in single crystals. When thin slices were put into boiling water the substance did not dissolve or break up to any great extent, although it swelled considerably. A portion boiled continuously for four hours, became pinkish- brown in colour, but was then as hard and as uninviting as a food material as when first cut. The liquid was quite acid to test paper, and contained a reducing sugar. Thin pieces of the tuber were entirely soluble in concentrated sulphuric acid on gently warming, and without much darkening. On the addition of water and boiling some time, a considerable amount of reducing sugars had been formed. 100 grams of the tuber were taken and which was in as fresh a state as possible; the outer portions were removed and the remainder cut into small pieces and ground intoa pulp in amortar. Water was added, and the whole stood over night, it was then heated at 50 - 60° C. for two hours. The liquid was quite mucilaginous and dropped from the rod in strings. It was squeezed through cloth, as it was impos- sible to filter it; a considerable amount had apparently gone into semi-solution. The residue was repeatedly heated at 50—60° C. ina fresh supply of water, squeezing through the cloth between each addition until 600 cc. had been obtained, and the extraction was thought to be complete. 60 cc. of this solution, when heated until constant at 100—105° C. contained 0°2870 gram total solids, equal to 2°8707. The amount of inorganic residue obtained from this on ignition was 0°820 gram equal to 0°8207, This inorganic residue consisted of potassium and magnesium carbonates, a small amount of phosphates and 56 R. T. BAKER AND H. G. SMITH. a little chlorine. Only a very small amount of calcium was detected and this was evidently due to the accidental presence of a few of the raphides which had passed through the cloth. It is thus apparent that the mucilaginous portion of this tuber consisted largely of the organic salts of potassium and magnesium, On the addition of an equal volume of 90% alcohol to the mucilaginous solution and shaking, a glairy mass separated in strings, which quickly floated to the top of the liquid. The filtrate was quite clear and bright, and on addition of two volumes of alcohol to this, and standing over night only a very small amount had separated; this had the character of a vegetable substance allied to arabin, but was too small in amount to determine with certainty. Moisture-10 grams of the ‘tuber’ cut through the centre, were heated at 100-105 °C. until constant; the solids weighed 0°4824 gram, so that the water present was 95°176%. A duplicate determination gave 0°4825 gram solids. The dry substance was of a light brown colour and had an odour strongly resembling that of chicory, for which substance it would form a good substitute. It was difficult to prevent any portion becoming brownish when exposed to the air, or to heat, and the aqueous extract soon became slightly coloured, although it was colourless at first. The dried residue when ignited and fully car- bonated gave an inorganic residue equal to 1°276% on the tuber. Ash—As the ash of the above contained alumina (a very unusual thing with plant substances belonging to the Phanerogams), a portion of the ‘tuber’ was taken from the centre so that no possible contamination could take place. The total ash from this was 24°11 on the dried substance a little less than that of the whole tuber and alumina was present. This material was taken for a quantitive deter- CHEMICAL INVESTIGATION OF THE ROOTSTOCK OF VITIS OPACA. 57 mination. As none of the exterior portion of tbe ‘tuber’ was present, and as the ignition was carried out in platinum, the alumina could not have been of accidental origin. The fully carbonated ash was treated with water and, when thoroughly extracted, 100 cc. of alcohol was added and the whole allowed to stand some time. The filtrate was evaporated down and made up to 100cc., it did not contain either lime, magnesia, sulphuric or phosphoric acids, but chlorine was present. The insoluble portion contained alumina, ime, magnesia, sulphuric acid, phosphoric acid, and carbon dioxide. The amount of alumina (Al,O3) found was 4°955% on the total ash, only the merest trace of iron was present. Almost the theoretical amount of the platinum salt of potassium was obtained and the K.O calculated from the total chlorides also agreed, thus indicating that sodium was absent. The percentage amount of CaO in the ash was 20°9; of P.O; 2°87; of K,O 15°74; and of MgO 5’d2. The nitrogen was determined by Kehldahl’s method giving 2°847% of nitrogen in the perfectly dried substance, or 0°138% on the ‘tuber.’ The amount of fats and allied substances soluble in ether was 0°788* on the perfectly dry material, or ‘038% of the tuber; a very small amount of a resin was present insoluble in petroleum ether, but this was more readily extracted by alcohol. Sugar—Only a small amount of substances was extracted by alcohol, and this after removal of the small amount of resin, was found to, be largely a crystallised sugar. Special efforts were taken to identify it, and it was determined to be dextrose on the following evidence. A large amount of the pulverised ‘tuber’ was treated with 90% alcohol for three days. ‘The filtrate, which was colourless, was evaporated to dryness and allowed to stand some time. It was then treated with ether until the resin was dissolved. 58 R. T. BAKER AND H. G. SMITH. The remainder was dissolved in water clarified, and crystallised. Its solution was dextrorotatory, it crystal- lised well, reduced Fehling’s solution readily, had an odour of sugar strongly marked and the osazone melted at 204-—5° C. Dextrose is the common sugar of the fruit of the vine, and it is thus also shown to occur in the root of this Vitis. A quantitative determination of a portion of the aqueous solution of the tuber gave 0°402% of reducing sugars. Mucilage—The mucilage was determined in the aqueous extract of the original ‘‘tuber’’ at 50—60° OC. as described above. The extract from 100 grams was precipitated with an equal volume of alcohol, the separated glairy mass removed, washed in alcohol, and dried at 100-—105°C. 0°6816 gram was obtained equal to 14°13° of the total dried ‘tuber,’ of this 0°1416 gram represented the fully carbonated ash, or 2°93» of the dried ‘tuber.’ This ash contained alumina, potassium and magnesium, and a trace of phosphoric acid. Only asmall amount of lime was detected and this was due to the few raphides which had passed through the cloth. The mucilage appeared to alter but slightly on long boiling with pure water, and even on boiling with dilute soda, as it separated in an identical manner with an equal volume of alcohol as before treat- ment; when boiled with very dilute hydrochloric or sulphuric acids it was entirely altered, and on continued boiling reducing sugars were largely formed. When the boiling was only continued sufficiently long that no precipitate took place with two volumes of alcohol, a turbidity was shown; on adding two more volumes of alcohol and on standing, a precipitate was obtained allied to arabin. It is thus seen that the mucilage resembled the ordinary vegetable mucilages soluble in water. CHEMICAL INVESTIGATION OF THE ROOTSTOCK OF VITIS OPACA. 59 The amount of substance in the dried residue soluble in dilute soda after the water extraction was very small, of no particular interest and was too small to specially determine. Nearly the whole of the substances soluble in dilute hydrochloric acid (0°570%) consisted of calcium oxalate, and the ash (0°3397) was almost entirely calcium carbonate. The amount of cellulose, lignin and allied substances insoluble in the above menstrua was 1°343 gram equal to 27°84% of total dried substance. The small amount of ash from this consisted almost entirely of alumina, indicating that the alumina in the ‘tuber’ is partly associated with this group of substances. The above results show that the ‘tuber’ or enlarged root- stock of this Vitis contained :— Waters 9 ..: ane Se So AAS Fats etc., soluble in ether ... 0°038 contained a resin. Reducing sugars ae .. 0°402 largely dextrose. Other substances soluble in water 2°468 largely mucilage. Substances soluble in HCl... 0°570 largely calcium oxalate Cellulose, lignin, etc.,... .. 1°343 contained alumina. Soluble in NaOH by difference 0°003 100°000 Nitrogen 0°138 per cent. Carbonated ash 1°276 ,, Fee There seems to be a somewhat close affinity between the carbohydrates of this ‘tuber’ and those belonging to the group which includes the true gums. The formation of salts indicates the acid nature of these organic substances, and the alteration products are more in the direction of the sugars than the starches. No active principle was detected at any time during the investigation, and tannins seem also to be absent, as the dried ‘tuber,’ when boiled in water, gave no reaction for tannin with ferric chloride or 60 R. T. BAKER AND H. G. SMITH. with the usual reagents. From the results of this investigation it appears most probable that the ‘tubers’ of this species of Vitis are simply enlarged root stocks, and as found have comparatively little food value. Cultivation might perhaps improve them somewhat in this respect, but this result is not promising. We are indebted to Messrs. G. Smith and J. W. Tremain for photographs illustrating the paper. EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Fig. 1—‘Tuber” with root attachment. Fig. 2—Section (transverse) through fresh specimen. Fig. 3—Transverse section through withered specimens. This shows more distinctly than Fig. 2 the medullary rays. THE AUSTRALIAN MELALEUCAS AND THEIR ESSENTIAL OILS. By RICHARD T. BAKER, F.L.S., Curator, and HENRY G. SMITH, F.C.S., Assistant Curator, Technological Museum, Sydney. Pant i [With Plates IV. - VII.] [Read before the Royal Society of N. 8. Wales, August 1, 1906.] THE Melaleucas commonly known as “‘ Tea Trees,’’ and which are distributed throughout the whole continent of Australia, (being found in the dry interior as well as on the mountain ranges and coast districts), may almost be regarded as endemic. M. Leucadendron, which is recorded also for the Indian Archipelago, may have escaped from this austral mainland. It was upon material of this latter species that Linnaeus founded the genus in 1767, and since then over 100 species have been described as Australian, AUSTRALIAN MELALEUCAS AND THEIR ESSENTIAL OILS. 61 and a few from the Pacific Islands, New Caledonia, Tahiti, etc. With so extensive a geographical distribution, they are necessarily a common object in the bush and are well known to settlers who utilise the timber for such economics as corduroy road making, posts, mallets, etc., the wood being very hard and durable in the ground and under water. The bushes are also extensively used for fascine dyke construction, for which they are more suitable than any other Australian shrub. Some species attain tree size, thus furnishing timber of sufficient dimensions for piles, bridging, wharf-decking, etc. The genus affords little study for the ecological student of botany for the Species are as much at home on the dry sandstone country as in moist swampy ground or even the rich humus of the shady gullies. The Melaleuca oils of Australia apparently differ among themselves in regard to their several constituents and the. amount, as do the oils of the Hucalypts, although the genus is not so extensive as Hucalyptus, nor does it contain nearly aS many species. It is not to be expected therefore that the constituents will be anything so numerous or so diverse, nor is it considered that the inquiry will be of so interesting a nature, when judged from a_ botanical and chemical standpoint. It is the intention during these investigations to apply the same methods in the determination of the Melaleuca species and their oils as has already been done by us in our work on the Hucalypts; and as the results are obtained they will be submitted for publication. It is recommended that similar care be taken in the commercial exploitation of the Melaleucas as is necessary with the Hucalypts. With the HKucalypts, the species name, if authentic, should be a guarantee of the quality of the product, and Melaleucas should not depart from this rule. An _ indiscriminate 62 R. T. BAKER AND H. G. SMITH. mixing of the leaves of species when used commercially will, of course, give no constant product and detract from the value of any standard which might be formulated. The following species are investigated :—(1) M. thymifolia, Sm. (2) M. linariifolia, Sm. (1). Melaleuca thymifolia, Sm., B. FI. iii. p. 134. ‘*Thyme-leaved Tea Tree.”’ | This was one of the very first Melaleucas described from Australia, the description being published by Smith in the Transactions of the Linnean Society in 1797. It is recorded now from the coast ranges and districts from Southern Queensland to the Blue Mountains and Port Jackson, in the neighbourhood of which it is rather plentiful. It is a small shrub with glabrous leaves and inflorescence; the flowers are purple in colour and quite characteristic of the species, and on this account as well as its valuable oil constituent it is a plant worthy of cultivation. The leaves appear almost veinless but are thickly studded with oil glands, which are scattered irregularly throughout the whole underside of the leaves, but quite absent from the upper or concave side, a provision probably of nature to protect them from the volatilising influence of the sun’s rays. Histology—The transverse vertical section of the leaf blade here given, affords a good type of histological leaf structure. The ventral and dorsal surfaces are covered with only one well defined layer of epidermal rectangular, elongated cells. On the dorsal side and round the edges of the leaf the epidermal cells appear to have the stronger walls, as those on the ventral surface have evidently a thinner wall structure as they break away in cutting. Stomata are more numerous on the upper surface, giving it a broken appearance in section, and are more clearly shown than generally obtains in most leaf sections. The guard cells are in shape like a pair of anthers and strongly AUSTRALIAN MELALEUCAS AND THEIR ESSENTIAL OILS. 63 developed, as also are the numerous and spacious air cavities into which they lead, and these form a marked feature of the section. Below the epidermal cells of the upper surface are found characteristically arranged cells, t.e., the palisade paren- chyma, which is composed of a double row of closely opposed columnar celis, whilst below the lower surface one row of palisade cells only occurs. The palisade parenchyma encloses a loosely disposed area of spongy parenchyma. The position of the midrib and a lateral vein hear each edge of the leaf is well brought out in the plate, and each is seen to be constituted by a fibro-vascular bundle con- sisting of en. endodermic cells, 8. scelerenchymatous conjunctive tissue or woody fibre, T. bast, C. cambium, wax Vem, G. Briosi in his research on the leaves of Eucalyptus globulus, Labill., published by Istituto botanico della R. Universiti di Pavia, (1891) names the cells which I make to be similar to en. as collenchymatous, but as no thickening of the walls at the angles could be found, I have preferred to classify those in this instance as endodermic. Essential Oil—The yield of oil of this species is con- siderable, no less than 82% ounces of oil being obtained from 227 pounds of leaves with terminal branchlets, equal to 2°28." The material was collected in the month of April in the neighbourhood of Sydney. The crude oil was but slightly coloured, it being yellowish in tint. The rectified oil was colourless. In appearance, odour and taste it differed but slightly from those Hucalyptus oils which are rich in eucalyptol, and which do not contain either the aldehyde aromadendral or the terpene phellan- 1 J. F. Bailey (Queensland Flora) gives the yield of oil as 13 ounces from 112 pounds, which is only about % per cent. The pronounced oil glands in the leaf of this species, however, indicate a large yield of oil. 64 R. T. BAKER AND H. G. SMITH. drene. The oil was rich in cineol, but neither the terpene pinene nor the terpene phellandrene could definitely be determined in it. The amount of esters was small, the saponification number. being only 3°1 with the crude oil, and the higher boiling portion did not become acid when distilled under atmospheric pressure. Volatile aldehydes were present but only in very small amount. The optical activity was but slight and to the right, and the refractive index was comparatively low, indicating that there was hardly any constituent present having a high refractive index. This is also shown by the comparative absence of Sesquiterpenes in the third fraction. The oil of this species has a marked resemblance to the better class Kucalyptus oils, and with present methods it would be difficult to detect its presence in those oils if the rectified oil was used for mixing, or even to decide the identity if it were substituted entirely for the superior Eucalyptus oils. The insolubility in 70 alcohol of the crude oil, together with its forming a turbid solution with excess of 80% alcohol, should be a ready means of detection if this is found to be a constant feature with the crude oil of this species, but this difficulty could easily be got over by rectification. The crude oil had a specific gravity 0°9134 at 15°C.; a refractive index 1°4665 at 23° C., and a rotation in 100 mm. tube at the same temperature a, + 2°1°. On rectification only 1°° came over below 172°C. (cor.) but 42% distilled between that temperature and 174°C. This fraction had specific gravity 0°9093 at 15° C.; refractive index 1°4657; and a rotation dp) + 3°2°.. Between 174-183'C., 48% dis- tilled, this had specific gravity 0°9144; refractive index 1°4653; and a rotation ap + 1°2°. Between 183-214°C., 6°> distilled, this had specific gravity 0°9192; and refractive index 1°4733. The phosphate method gave 53% of cineol in AUSTRALIAN MELALEUCAS AND THEIR ESSENTIAL OILS. 65 the crude oil. The saponification number for the esters was 3°'1. A portion of the oil was esterised in the usual way; 1°999 gram of this required ‘0672 gram KOH, thus giving a saponification number = 33°6. This shows the presence of a fair amount of an alcohol and which gave an odour to the saponified oil with a striking resemblance to that of borneol when treated under the same conditions. The crude oil was not soluble in 10 volumes 70% alcohol, or any quantity below that amount, but the rectified oil, distilling below 183° C., was soluble in 1°3 volumes of 70? alcohol and remained clear with 10 volumes. With 4 2 ° volume of 80% alcohol, or with the same amount of 90% alcohol, the crude oil dissolved but became very turbid with 15 volumes and did not clear again with 10 volumes. The rectified oil was soluble in all proportions with both 80 and 90% alcohol. This peculiarity of solubility in alcohol distinguishes the crude oil of this species of Melaleuca from any of the crude Hucalyptus oils rich in eucalyptol. As the third fraction was soluble in 1°2 volumes 70%) alcohol, it appears that the constituent which is insoluble in alcohol is not volatile under ordinary distillation. The crude oil of M. linariifolia was soluble in excess of 80% alcohol, thus differing from the oil of this species. The comparative absence of high boiling constituents in the oil of M. thymifolia accounts for the somewhat low specific gravity, and it cannot therefore replace oil of cajuput while the pharmacopoeia standard remains as at present, a standard in which the specific gravity, 0°922 to 0°930 is required. Whether there is now any need for such a standard is questionable. (2). Melaleuca linariifolia, Sm., B. FI., iii. p. 140. ‘Tea Tree.’ This is one of the tallest of tea trees and occurs in the coast district of New South Wales and Southern Queensland. E—Aug. 1, 1906, 66 R. T. BAKER AND H. G. SMITH. It is well described by Bentham in the ‘“ Flora Australiensis,’’ (loc. cit.) and so need not again be described here. A passing reference however might be made to the marginal and lateral veins of the leaf which are distinctly marked, but are not referred to by Bentham (loc. cit.) The material upon which this research is founded was obtained at Gosford and was carefully examined in order to correctly establish its botanical identity. There can be no doubt that the chemical results are founded on botanical material true to specific name i.e., M. linariifolia, Sm. Like its congener described in this paper it was one of the first Melaleucas recorded, being described by Smith synchronously with that species, M. thymifolia. The oil glands are evidently less numerous than those of M. thymifolia, but are just as prominent in the lower as the upper surface of the leaf, and the yield of oil is considerably less than in that species. Histology—The histological characters of the leaves of this species differ in a few particulars from those of M. thymifolia. The palisade parenchyma occupies much less of the leaf structure, the difference being occupied by a greater development of spongy tissue. The oil glands, whilst fewer in number, are much larger than those of M. thymifolia, an individual gland extending almost from the ventral to the dorsal surface. Collenchymatous cells which are entirely absent in the sections of M. thymifolia, are here very numerous between the midrib and the dorsal epidermis, a character common in the leaves of Hucalyptus globulus, Labill. The large air cavities, so distinctive a feature in the leaves of M. thymifolia are almost quite absent in this species, the more numerous and larger air cavities of the spongy parenchyma probably compensating for this deficiency. AUSTRALIAN MELALEUCAS AND THEIR ESSENTIAL OILS. 67 We have to acknowledge our indebtedness to Mr. S. J. Johnston, B.sc., for kindly cutting the section upon which the above histologic remarks are based. Essential Oil—The yield of oil obtained from the leaves with terminal branchlets of this tree was 1°214’, 260 pounds of material giving 503 ounces of oil.’ The material was collected at Gosford, a few miles north of Sydney, and in the month of September. The crude oil was pale yellow it being of a light lemon tint, and .had a turpentine-like odour which was much more strongly marked than with the oil of M. thymifolia. Therectified oil was colourless. The cineol content was low; phellan- drene could not be detected, nor was evidence obtained of the presence of pinene. The higher boiling portion contained a sesquiterpene which in its colour reaction with bromine (a few drops dissolved in acetic acid and the fumes of bromine passed into the liquid, a violet colour at once forms which falls through the liquid, the whole becoming deep violet changing to indigo blue after some time), correspond to the sesquiterpene of LHucalyptus oils. Volatile aldehydes were present in the first few drops distilling but the amount was very small. The optical activity was slight and to the right, and the refractive index higher than with the oil of M. thymifolia; this was due to the larger amount of high boiling constituents present. The oil of this species is largely a terpene one, but an alcohol was present which evidently corresponded with that occurring in the oil of M. thymifolia. The crude oil had a specific gravity 0°9129 at 15°C., a refractive index 1°4741 at 22° C., and a rotation in 100 mm. tube dp + 2°5°. On rectification only 1 ce. distilled below 172° C., (cor.) but between 172—175° C. 17 ce. distilled. * In the Technologist, Vol. III and other places, the yield is given as about 1°5 per cext. 68 R. T. BAKER AND H. G. SMITH. This fraction had specific gravity 0°8976; refractive index 1°4681; and rotation ap + 3°0°. Between 175-—183°C., 52” distilled, this had specific gravity 0°9003; refractive index 1°4692, and rotation ap + 2°9°. Between 183 — 250° C., 23°> distilled, this had specific gravity 0°9136; refractive index 1°476; androtation ap + 4°4°. Between 250 — 258° C., 4°) distilled, this consisted largely of the sesquiterpene; it had specific gravity 0°9233; and refractive index 1.5011. It was distinctly acid, thus showing the presence of an ester. By the phosphate method the crude oil contained 16” of cineol. The saponification number for the esters in the crude oil was 6°4. A portion of the oil was esterised; 2°0134 grams of this required 0°0812 gram potash, saponification number =40°3. The amount of the alcohol in the oil of this species is thus a little more than with that of M. thymifolia. The crude oil was insoluble in 10 volumes 70” alcohol. It was soluble in 1 volume 80” alcohol and was only very slightly turbid with 10 volumes. EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Transverse Sections of Leaves. Melaleuca thymifolia. Fig. 1—Shows the irregular occurrence of three oil glands in the leaf tissue. Fig. 2—Shows oil glands in a different position to those in fig. 1 and also the large number of air cavities on the ventral surface. The guard cells are also very clearly seen. Fig. 3—This section contains two large oil glands. Fig. 4—Here only one small oil gland is seen in that portion of the leaf sectioned; the air cavities are very numerous. Figs. 1 to 4 are all magnified 50 diameters. Fig. 9—An enlarged portion of the edge of a leaf blade of thymifolia, x 250. Fig. 10—Rough sketch of Fig. 9, x 250. (a) Epidermic cells. (6) Palisade parenchyma. (c) Spongy parenchyma. (d) Vascular PORT SYDNEY. 69 bundle. (e) Air cavity. (f) Guard cells of stoma. (g) Oil gland. g. 11—Rough sketch, central vascular bundle x 250. (e) Endo dermic cells. (s) Sheath of sclerenchymatous conjunctive tissue or wood fibre. (¢) Sieve tube of the bast, phloem. (c) Cambium. (x) Xylem. Melaleuca linariifolia. ig. 5—This shows the leaf structure of this species, and the large size of the oil glands. g. 6—Only one gland is sectioned in this portion of the leaf blade. 7.—A small oil gland is shown near the central vascular bundle. . 8—No oil glands shown. Figs. 5 to § are all magnified 70 diameters. PORT SYDNEY. . By LAWRENCE HARGRAVE. [With Plate VIII.] [Read before the Royal Society of N. S. Wales, September 5, 1906. | WiTHOUT preamble I place before you the following state- ments as being axiomatic; and the plan and sections annexed as sufficient for any patriotic New South Wales- man to thoroughly grasp the situation and see that the railway and eastern quay of Port Sydney are wanted by the city, now; and the rest of the work at an early date by the State and the continent. 1. The wharfage accommodation of Sydney is inadequate to the immediate future requirements of the State. 2. That lengthening and dredging existing wharves and berths in sites tortuous of approach and already crowded by ferries will only increase the congestion. 70 LAWRENCE HARGRAVE. 3d. That an area of at least 147 acres with soundings of 5) fathoms and under, clear of the fairway, is avail- able at the Sow and Pigs shoal for the construction of Port Sydney, without the payment of a penny for resumption or compensation. 4. That eight thousand yards of quay can be placed thereon as shown in plan. Ol . That there is ample room to turn for vessels of 1,000 feet in length drawing 40 feet of water. 6. That the sectional area for scour being unaltered, no complications with the holders of riparian rights can ensue. ~ . That with our present knowledge of subways, from the Thames tunnel to date, the one shown on the plan presents no difficulties. 8. That there is no obstruction to the fairway while the work is in progress. 9. That the whole of the work is well within the scope of local contractors. 10. That the Panama Canal must make Sydney one of the most important seaports in the Pacific, if we make it easily accessible to existing shipping. The railway shown is remarkable for leaving city property untouched, except at Gipps and Barcom Streets. The grade shown as 158 feet per mile, becomes 52 feet per mile if the line terminates on the western quay instead of the eastern. I have purposely omitted detail of construction, because any staff of engineers will review known methods and evolve better ones, but of course I have my views on the best course of procedure. Description of Plan and Sections.—Plan shows continu- ation of railway from Redfern Station crossing a bridge over Elizabeth Street north of Albion Street to tunnel from PORT SYDNEY. 71 Gipps Street to Barcom Street near the Public School, thence through Chinese gardens to near the junction of Glenmore Road and New South Head Road to tunnel under Darling Point from west side of Glenmore Road to east side of Lower Ocean Street, thence through village of Double Bay PORT SYDNEY. Dotted line ts the section through Port Sydney. Port Sydney the sectional area for scour 1s not. curtatled Section of Ratlway trom Redtern to Seerion trom Ceorge’s Head through Beacon Showing that nge's Hal Cro fps LAWRENCE HARGRAVE. to tunnel under Bellevue Hill from creek at Doubie Bay to scrubland at Rose Bay, thence across low land and scattered houses to north-east side of Lyne Park, where down grade to Vaucluse Tunnel commences: this tunnel begins near ‘Tivoli’? and ends on the east or west quay of Port Sydney. A shaft at Bottle and Glass would hasten the work by providing two extra working faces for Vaucluse tunnel. The section of the railway shows on an exagger- ated scale the tunnel work and grades. The section from George’s Head through Sow and Pigs beacon to the Military Reserve at South Head is taken from the Admiralty Chart. The dotted section on the same line shows the dredged levels through the east and west channels and the position of Port Sydney therein, and it is obvious that the cross section of water is not reduced in area but its form improved for scouring purposes. A Discussion followed the reading of the above paper in which Messrs. G. H. HALLIGAN, R. V. Hopeson, Dr. F. H. QUAIFE and Mr. T. H. HOUGHTON took part. Mr. HARGRAVE replied as follows:—Mr. HopGson men- tioned the great cost of carting goods to and from the quays. There is no carting about the job, only six miles extra rail transit and the trucks are alongside the ships. Some one asked about the cost of the work. I have made no estimate, but whatever it is, it will be small compared with the advantage of securing the over- sea traffic of the continent of Australia. The prize is equally within the grasp of the Queenslanders: but their works include a standard gauge railway from the South Australian boundary to Moreton Bay. Another speaker said the site was exposed to attack in case of war. Ido not see that a few shells in the concrete would do much damage, nor why Port Sydney should draw the fire when our beautiful public buildings are within sight and range: besides, PORT SYDNEY. 73 anyone at all acquainted with the present state of aeronautics knows that matters will be settled by “‘ bolts from the blue.”’ As to exposure tostorms. Our dangerous weather comes from S.E. to N.E. The S.E. seas run on to Manly and Dobroyd ; the N.H. seas are broken by North Head. The visible horizon of Port Sydney is «. by N. to N.EH. by E., and seas from this point are more or less broken up by North Head and South Reef; and taking a free estimate of stormy weather, we may safely say that during a fort- night per annum the outside berths of Port Sydney would be what shellbacks call uneasy, the other 6,000 yards are in a pond. The exposure is nothing compared to Plymouth breakwater that shows a mile front to a S.W. Atlantic gale. Lessons may be learnt from London; once Londoners © embarked in galliots at the Fleet Ditch, now they enjoy the facilities of Tilbury. At Dover the rise and fall of the tide makes a vast difference in the quantity of work when we compare it with our insignificant five or six feet. Cherbourg and Colombo are also made ports. Galveston in the Gulf of Mexico has also done a lot of similar work to ours; and then we have the wealth of experi- ence gained and being acquired at New York with sub- ways to profit by. Dr. Quaife described at length the freezing process for driving subways; it is an excellent method and enables us to penetrate any rubbish. As one of the speakers pointed out, it is delineated by Mr. Norman Selfe for found- ing the piers of his Great Sydney Bridge. Another speaker said he would prefer to use up-harbour frontages, but picture to yourselves the “* Lusitania”’ in Darling Harbour being turned end for end; and besides most of the fore- shores are cliffs and you have to carve out the wharf, and 74 LAWRENCE HARGRAVE. then only get one side for berthing, whereas at Port Sydney’’ you have most of.the required depth already and both sides of the quays available. NotTe.—Mr. Halligan pointed out that the Western Channel was all continuous rock from George’s Head to Sow and Pigs, and there would be trouble in getting the 40 feet soundings shown on the section. The best way is to tackle the job from below, as was done at Hell’s Gate, and need not be again described here. THE INTERNATIONAL RULES OF BOTANICAL NOMENCLATURE. (ADOPTED BY THE INTERNATIONAL BOTANICAL CONGRESS, VIENNA, 1905.) By J. H. MAIDEN, Government Botanist and Director of the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. [Read before the Royal Society of N.S. Wales, September 5, 1906. ] ARTICLE I. of the International Rules reads, ‘‘ Natural history can make no progress without a regular system of nomenclature, which is recognised and used by the great majority of naturalists in all countries.’’ Thisisan axiom. Linnzeus enunciated certain principles in his ‘‘ Fundamenta (1736), his ‘‘Philosophia botanica’’ (1751), his “‘Genera plantarum’’ (1737), his “Species plantarum ’’ (1753), his ‘‘Systema Naturee’’ (1735), and other classics. The first serious attempt to adopt a regular system of botanical nomenclature in modern times was made at the International Congress of Botany held at a former Paris Exhibition (that of 1867), which discussed and adopted, INTERNATIONAL RULES OF BOTANICAL NOMENCLATURE. 15 without important alterations, the carefully prepared laws’ submitted by Alphonse De Candolle. To bring them up to date Alphonse De Candolle himself proposed amendments in 1883.’ Then followed the works of Otto Kuntze, beginning with his ‘‘ Revisio,’’ an erudite work, but which, instead of tending to a stable nomenclature has done a good deal to unsettle and confuse it. It is the work of a man who, while being a good botanist, bases his claims to considera- tion as a nomenclature reformer not on being a botanist at all, or at all events not primarily, but on being a literary man with a penchant for botanical archeology. Thereupon followed increased discussion amongst botanists, and various Congresses, amongst the most important of which may be enumerated those of Rochester and Madison, U.S.A. Then advantage was taken of the Paris International Exhibition of 1900 to assemble botanists for an International Congress to discuss nomenclature. The business was carefully set out some time before and the chief reason why I chose 1900 for my extended leave of absence, earned 1 «Lois de la nomenclature botanique adoptées par le Congres Inter- national de Botanique tenu & Paris en Aout 1867, suivies d’une deuxiéme édition de introduction historique et du commentaire qui accompagnaient la redaction préparatoire presentée au Congrés,” par M. Alph. De Candolle. Geneve et Bale; Paris 1867, roy. 8vo., pp. 64. 2 « Nouvelles Remarques sur la Nomenclature botanique. Supplément au commentaire du méme auteur qui accompagnait le texte des lois.” Genéve, 1883, roy. 8vo., pp. 79. ° « Revisio generum plantarum,” Pars i. (1891), Pars ii. (1891), Pars iii. (1893); Pars iii. includes ‘‘ Codex Nomenclature Botanice Emenda- tatus.” See also ““Supplementum ” and “ Editio Italiana” (1899). * See the Rochester Rules, promulgated at a meeting of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, held at Rochester, N.Y., August 1892. Also “‘ Proceedings of the Madison Botanical Congress. Madison, Wisconsin, August 23 and 24, 1893, published by the generosity of the citizens of Madison, June 1894.” 8 vo. pp. 60. 76 J. H. MAIDEN, for twenty years’ continuous service, was in order that I might be present at that Congress. It was attended by very eminent men, and took the wise course of not attempting to ‘‘settle’’ certain difficult points, but, bearing in mind the great interest that had been aroused, of remitting important decisions to a second International Congress to be held in Vienna in 1905. It also enunciated the principle of holding an International Congress or Parliament of Botanists thereafter every five years, for the discussion of such matters of nomenclature as might be brought before it. There is therefore now in existence a duly constituted International Tribunal of nomenclature. I have already pointed out,’ that “‘the way is gradually being paved for the establishment of a ‘Tri- bunal of Nomenclature’ whose decisions no botanist may afford to disregard.”’ The next Congress is fixed for 1910 at Brussels. In 1903 I published a presidential address” dealing with the great question of nomenclature, and ever since the Paris Congress I have been in touch with M. Emile Perrot the General Secretary of the Paris Congress, and Dr. John Briquet of Geneva, the ‘‘ Rapporteur Général’’ of the Vienna Congress, voting, asa member of the Paris Congress on certain points remitted for the consideration of members. Invitation was extended to members of the Paris Con- gress, and indeed to all botanists, to prepare resolutions and data for consideration of the Vienna Congress, whose members might therefore debate with the fullest knowledge. In consequence, a considerable number of valuable docu- ments were circulated amongst members including the following :— * Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, 1903, p. 687. 2 «On the principles of botanical nomenclature,” Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S. Wales, 1903. INTERNATIONAL RULES OF BOTANICAL NOMENCLATURE. =U “I 1, “Nomenclature botanice Codex brevis Maturus etc.” auctore Otto Kuntze, Stuttgart, 1903, 8 vo., pp. Ixiv. “Zweiter Anhang zum Nomenclature Botanicee Codex brevis Maturus,” von Dr. O. Kuntze, pp. lxv. -— Ixxvi. Additions aux lois de Nomenclature botanique (code Parisien de 1867) d’apres le Codex Emendatus de M. Otto Kuntze (Journal de Botanique, pp. 15, t. xiv., 1900). Exposé sur les Congres pour la Nomenclature Botanique, et six propositions pour le Congres de Paris en 1900,” par le Dr. Otto Kuntze, 8 vo. pp. 16 (no date ? 1900). ‘Protest gegen die zweite ‘Commission internationale de Nomenclature botanique,’” Dr. Otto Kuntze. Allg. Botan. Zeitschr. No. 9, 1902, pp. 4, together with leaflets. See also “Lexicon generum phanerogamarum, inde ab anno 1737 cum nomenclatura legitima international et systemati inter recentia medio,” auctore Tom von Post, opus revisum et auctum ab Otto Kuntze, a valuable bibliographical work. 2. “Propositions de changements aux lois de la nomenclature botanique de 1867 . . . par un groupe de botanistes belges et suisses.” (15 Janvier, 1904). ; 3. ‘Projet de la revision des lois de Nomenclature presenté par la Société Imperiale de Naturalistes de Moscow,” 8 vo. pp. 10. 4, “Code of Botanical Nomenclature.” In English, French and German. Signed by various representative American botanists. Bull. Torrey Botanical Club, 31, 249 - 61, May 1904. 5. “ Motion au Congres international de Botanique, Deuxieme Session, Vienne 1905.” Nyt Magazin f. Naturvidenskaberne B. 42, pp. 217-20. Kristiania, 1904. Signed by Drs. N. Wille and V. Wittrock. 6. “Amendments to the Paris Code of Botanical Nomenclature, suggested for the consideration of the Vienna Congress of 1905 by the botanists of the Gray Herbarium, the Crypto- gamic Herbarium, and the Botanical Museum of Harvard University,” 9th June, 1904. In French, English, and German. 78 J. H. MAIDEN. 7. “Des diagnoses et de la Nomenclature Mycologiques.” Pro- positions par P. A. Saccardo. ull. Soc. bot. ital., Fase. 6, 12. Guigno 1904. “De diagnostica et nomenclatura mycologica. Admonita quae- dam.” Auctore P. A. Saccardo. Ann. Mycol.ii., No. 2, 1904. 8. ‘Amendments to the Paris Code of Botanical Nomenclature, suggested for consideration of the Vienna Congress of 1905 by the botanists of the British Museum, and others.” 8 vo. pp. 3. 9. “WVorschlag zur Erginzung der ‘Lois de la Nomenclature botanique de 1867’ dem in Wien 1905 tagenden Nomen- clatur-Kongress zur Annahme empfohlen,” von H. Harms. Notizbl. des Kinigl. bot. Gartens etc. zu Berlin. Appendix xi, 20 Juni, 1904. 10. Motion présenteé au Congres international de Botanique, Vienne 1905, par Joseph Brunnthaler. Verkandl. der K. k. Zool. bot. Gesells. in Wien., 1904, p. 1. Recommending that the matter of Cryptogamic botany be remitted to the next international botanical congress. ll. “Antrage zur Regelung der botanischen Nomenklatur fiir den internationalen Botaniker-Kongress, Wien 1905,” von Dr. August v. Hayek. J6id, pp. 341 — 351. 12. “Adjonctions au code de Paris de 1867, proposées par quelques botanistes Italiens.” Florence, Juin 1904 (In French and Italian) 8vo. pp. 12. 13. “Additions et Modifications aux lois de la Nomenclature botanique de 1867, approvées par les membres de la Société botanique de France,” 1904, pp. 12. 14. ‘‘Motions Supplementaires présentées au Congres International de Botanique de Vienne,” par P. A. Saccardo, Avellino, Juin 1904, p. 1. 15. “Motion présentée au Congres international de Botanique de Vieune,” par Mr. Ernest Malinvaud, Paris, 25 Juin, 1904, p. & INTERNATIONAL RULES OF BOTANICAL NOMENCLATURE. 79 16. ‘‘Additions et Modifications aux lois de la Nomenclature botanique de 1867,” proposées par M. Georges Rouy, pp. 4. “Questions de Nomenclature,” par M.G. Rouy. ev. bot. Syst. et de Géog. bot, 1 Juill. 1904, pp. 81 — 102. 17. “Observations et propositions présentées au Congrésde Vienne” par B. P. G. Hochreutiner, 26 Juin, 1904 (Supplementary to No. 2, above). They form a library of information in regard to the principles of nomenclature for careful reference at all times. The main decisions of the Vienna Congress were soon made known by means of botanical and other scientific journals, and I give references to some’ of the excellent, though necessarily brief accounts which appeared at the time. But, although these accounts are based on the reports of eminent botanists, they are all unofficial, and I have the honour to bring under your notice the official document’ which I received early last month, and which is, probably, the only copy in New South Wales at present. It is an epoch-making document, and every Australian botanist will require to make himself acquainted with its provisions. He can no more ignore the decisions than can a citizen ignore the laws of his country. This document isan extract froma larger volume* which contains a report of the debates which led to the adoption of these Interna- tional rules of botanical nomenclature. 1 For example, Gard. Chron., 1st July, 1905, p. 10; Journal of Botany, July 1905, p. 215, (Rendle); Nature, 20th July, 1905, p. 272; Botanical Gazette (Chicago), July 1905, Reprinted in Amer. Journ. Pharm., Sept. 1905, p. 417; Park and Cemetery (Chicago), Sept. 1905, p. 353 (Trelease). * Regles internationales de la Nomenclature botanique adoptées par le Congres International de Botanique de Vienne 1905 et publiées au nom de la Commission de Rédaction du Congrés par John Briquet, Rapporteur Général.’ (Verlag von Gustav Fischer in Jena, 1906). 3 Actes du Congres international de Botanique tenu 4 Vienne (Autriche) 1905.” (G. Fischer, Jena). 80 J. H. MAIDEN. The document before usis based upon the De Candollean ‘‘lois’’? of 1867, and pages 5—16 are taken up with a synoptical table or “‘Concordance des Lois de la Nomen- clature botanique de 1867 et des Regles et Recommanda- tions de 1905.”’ Then follow the “International Rules’’ in three languages, French, English, and German. This is succeeded by a table of Nomina Conservanda of the greatest interest to Australians and which must be respected by every Austra- lian botanist. J extract the Australian genera as an appendix. Lastly we have a useful “Index analytique.”’ Examination of these International Rules shows that the more conservative or moderate botanists have exercised the greatest influence. Personally, whatever the decisions might be, I have always been prepared to respect them. I have discussed the matter with various infiuential Kuropean and American botanists who have been in Sydney during the last three years and who intended to go to Vienna, and who indeed went, and have written to various EKuro- pean and American botanists in the same strain that, while it was very possible that the great distance would prevent Australian botanists from attending the Congress at Vienna, I believed that they would be loyal to its decisions. I believe that to be the case, and my object in reading the present paper is to point out some of the decisions which Specially affect us or are of more or less local interest to us and to enjoin my Australian brethren to obtain copies of the International rules and make them their daily guide of botanical practice. I have no intention of going over the whole of the rules. Article 2 enunciates “ principles, rules and recommenda- tions.”’ Iam obliged to extract the article as otherwise I cannot be understood. INTERNATIONAL RULES OF BOTANICAL NOMENCLATURE. 81 “The principles (Art. 1-9, 10-14 and 15 - 18) are the foun- dation of the rules and recommendations. The rules (Art. 10 — 58) destined to put in order the nomenclature which the past has bequeathed to us, and to form the basis for the future, are always retroactive: names or forms of nomenclature which are contrary to a rule cannot be maintained. Recommendations bear on secondary points, their object being to ensure for the future a greater uniformity and clearness in nomenclature: names or forms of nomenclature contrary to a recommendation are not a model to copy, but cannot be rejected.” Article 9. “The rules and recommendations of botanical nomen- clature apply to all classes of the plant kingdom, reserving special arrangements for fossil plants and non-vascular plants.”? Article 14. “‘The fertilization of one species by another, gives rise to a hybrid (hybrida); that of a modification or subdivision of a species by another modification of the same species gives rise to a half-breed (mistus, mule of florists). Recommendations—1. The arrangement of species in a genus or in a subdivision of a genus is made by means of typographic signs, letters or numerals. Hybrids are arranged after one of the parent species, with the sign x placed before the generic name. The arrangement of subspecies under a species is made by letters or numerals; that of varieties by the series of Greek letters a, /, y, etc. Groups below varieties and also half-breeds are indicated by letters, numerals or typographic signs at the author’s will.” Article 19. ‘‘Botanical nomenclature begins with the Species Plantarum of Linneus, ed. 1 (1753) for all groups of vascular plants. It is agreed to associate genera, the names of which appear in this work, with the descriptions given of them in the Genera Plantarum ed. 5 (1754).” 1 These special arrangements have been reserved for the Congress of 1910. They comprise: 1. Rules bearing on special points in relation to the nature of fossils or the lower plants; 2. Lists of nomina conservanda for all divisions of plants other than Phanerogams. F—Sept. 5, 1906, 82 J. H. MAIDEN. Article 20. ‘However, to avoid disadvantageous changes in the nomenclature of genera by the strict application of the rules of nomenclature, and especially of the principle of priority in starting from 1753, the rules provide a list of names which must be retained in all cases. These names are by preference those which have come into general use in the fifty years following their publication, or which have been used in monographs and important floristic (floristiques) works up to the year 1890. The list of these names forms an appendix to the rules of Nomenclature.” Article 25, Recommendation v.c. ‘“‘Not to dedicate genera to persons who are in all respects strangers to botany, or at least to natural science, nor to persons quite unknown.” Recommendation vh. “Not to make names by the combination of two languages (nomina hybrida ). Article 26, Recommendation viii. ‘The specific name should, in general, give some indication of the appearance, the characters, the origin, the history or the properties of the species. If taken from the name of a person, it usually recalls the name of the one who discovered or described it, or was in some way concerned with it.” Recommendation ix. ‘‘ Names of men and women and also names of countries and localities used as specific names, may be substan- tives in the genitive (Clusi, saharew) or adjectives (Clusianus, dahuricus). It will be well, in the future, to avoid the use of the genitive and the adjectival form of the same name to designate two different species of the same genus (for example Lysimachia Hemsleyana, Maxim. (1891) and L. Hemsley, Franch. (1895)). Recommendation x. “Specific names begin with a small letter except those which are taken from names of persons (substantives or adjectives) or those which are taken from generic names (sub- stantives or adjectives). Examples: Ficus indica, Circaea fatetiana, Brassica Napus, Lythrum Hyssopifolia, Aster novibelgu, Malva Tournefortiana, Phyteuma Hallert.” + See Appendix p. 87. INTERNATIONAL RULES OF BOTANICAL NOMENCLATURE. 83 I do not see my way to accept’ these recommendations in full, Names derived from persons should be always written with a capital letter, e.g., Phyteuma Halleri. Names derived from substantive generic names I would recommend also to be written with a capital letter, e.g., Brassica Napus.’ Names derived from adjectival generic names should be written, in my opinion, witha small letter, in spite of the recommendation to the contrary. Thus if we write Lythrum Hyssopifolia,?’ as recommended, we must logically write Acacia Myrtifolia, Boronia Ledifolia, Ricinocarpus Pinifolius and numerous other barbarisms. I trust this point will be brought forward at the Brussels Congress of 1910. Article 26, Recommendation xive. ‘‘Adopt unpublished names found in travellers’ notes and herbaria, attributing them to the authors concerned, only when those concerned have approved the 3 publication. I have in several cases ofiended against this recommenda- tion, having been a party to the publication of several new varieties under Mueller’s name from his herbarium notes. For instance: Boronia ledifolia, var repanda, F.v.M.* It is my intention not to so offend in future. Recommendation xivg. ‘Do not name a species after a person who has neither discovered, nor described, nor figured, nor in any way studied it.” Article 31. “‘Hybrids between species of the same genus, or presumably so, are designated by a formula and, whenever it + See Art. 2 as to the discretion allowed to botanists in regard to ** Recommendations.” * These cases are based on Linnzus’ recommendation in Species Plan- tarum (1753). I have already discussed this point, Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S. Wales, 1903, 704. ° I have gone into this matter, in which there have been differences in practice, in Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, 1908, 698. * Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, 1904, p. 735. 84 J. H. MAIDEN. seems useful or necessary, by a name. The formula consists of the names or specific epithets of the two parents in alphabetical order and connected by the sign x. When the hybrid is of known experimental origin the formula may be made more precise by the addition of the signs 9, ¢. The name, which is subject to the same rules as names of species, is distinguished from the latter by absence of an ordinal number and by the sign x before the name. Examples: x Salix capreoia = Salix aurita x caprea,; Digi- talis lutea 2 x purpurea 8; Digitalis lutea § x pupurea 9.” Article 35. ‘Publication is effected by the sale or public distribu- tion of printed matter or indelible autographs. Communications of new names at a public meeting, or the placing of names in collections or gardens open to the public, do not constitute publi- cation.” Article 36. “On and after January 1, 1908, the publication of names of new groups will be valid only when they are accompanied by a Latin diagnosis.” ’ A “group” is defined in Article 138, and includes a species. Article 37. “A species or a subdivision of a species, announced in a work, with a complete specific or varietal name, but without diagnosis or reference to a former description under that name, is not valid. Citation in synonymy or incidental mention of a name is not effective publication, and the same applies to the mention of name on a ticket issued with a dried plant without printed or autographed diagnosis. Plates accompanied with analyses are equivalent to a description; but this applies only to plates published before January 1, 1908.” Article 39. “The date of a name or of a combination of names is that of their effective publication. In the absence of proof to the contrary, the date placed on the work containing the name or combination of names is regarded as correct. On and after January Ist, 1908, the date of publication of the Latin diagnosis only can be taken into account in questions of priority.” INTERNATIONAL RULES OF BOTANICAL NOMENCLATURE. 85 Recommendation xix. “To avoid publishing or mentioning in their publications unpublished names which they do not accept, especially if the persons responsible for these names have not formally authorised their publication.” See Rec. xive. Recommendation xxi. “To give the etymology of new generic names and also of specific names when the meaning of the latter is not obvious.” Recommendation xxiv. ‘Separate copies should always bear the pagination of the periodical of which they form a part; if desired they may also bear a special pagination.” Article 43, Recommendation xxv (in part). “ Authors’ names put after names of plants are abbreviated unless they are very short. . . When it is a well established custom to abridge a name in another manner, it is best to conform to it (L. for Linnaeus, DC. for De Candolle, St. Hil. for Saint Hilaire), In publications destined for the general public and in titles it is preferable not to abridge.” : In Germany and France it is the custom to write Linné (Linnaeus) with a simple L. or L. f. for his son, not Linn. as in the Hnglish habit. This is not an important matter, but I recommend that the continental practice be, followed. Linné is so pre- eminent in Botany that this privilege of a simple letter can be granted him as a solitary exception; nobody would mistake L. for Lindley or for any other botanist. Article 50. ‘‘No one is authorised to reject, change or modify a name (or combination of names) because it is badly chosen, or disagreeable, or another is preferable or better known, or because of the existence of an earlier homonym which is universally regarded as non-valid, or for any other motive either contestable or of little import. (See also Art. 57).” I have already dealt with this point.* 1 Proc. Linn. Soc. N. 8. Wales, 1903, p. 708. 86 J. H. MAIDEN. Article 58. “The rules of botanical nomenclature can only be modified by competent persons at an International Congress convened for the express purpose.” Then as an Appendix we have several recommendations including :— cxxiv. The metric system only is used in botany for reckoning weights and measures. The foot, inch, line, pound, ounce etc., should be rigorously excluded from scientific language.” xeaxvit. Temperatures are expressed in degrees of the centigrade thermometer of Celsius.” Finally, these laws have been adopted by a duly constituted International Botanical Congress and they should be accepted. Australian botanists live under the freest political institutions in the world; if they desire to alter the laws, they proceed, by constitutional means, to bring their desires about. Let the same method be adopted in regard to any of the rules of which they disapprove, but, in the meantime I feel sure that Australian botanists will obey them and obey them loyally. These rules seem to bea crystallization of common-sense and moderation. No friend of our science can ever con- template, without regret, the botanical anarchy which has been gaining ground during the last two decades and which the pronouncements of the Vienna Congress will do much to stem. In this connection Dr. John Briquet, the Reporter-General, has laid botanists throughout the world under a great debt of obligation. It will take us some time to get used to these laws, and therefore mutual forbearance is required. But they are worthy of careful study and of every respect, and I submit them with courtesy and earnestness to all Australian and New Zealand botanists. | ‘ « a 2 be ‘ ‘ INTERNATIONAL RULES OF BOTANICAL NOMENCLATURE, 87 APPENDIX. “Index nominum genericorum utique conservandorum secundum articulum vicesimum regularum nomenclature botanice inter- nationalium. Phanerogame (Siphonogame).” (Australiensum. )' Taxacez—’ Podocarpus L’ Her. ex Pers., Synopsis ii. (1807) 580. [ Vageia, Gaertn. | Phyllocladus, L. ©. Rich, Conif. (1826) 129, t. 3. [ Podocarpus Labill. | Pinacez— : Agathis, Salisb. in Trans. Linn. Soc., viii. (1807) 311. [Dam- mara, Lam. | Potamogetonacee— Cymodocea , Ch. Koenig. in Koenig et Sims, Ann. of Bot. ii. (1805) 96, t. 7. [Phycagrostis, O. Ktze]. Graminez— Rottboellia, L.f., Nov. gramin. gen. (1779) 19. [ Manisurs, L. | Tragus, | Hall., Hist. stirp. Helvet. ii, (1768) 203]. Scop., Introd. (1777) 73. [Mazia, Adans. | Zorsia, (“Zoysia”) Willd. in Neue Schrift. Ges. naturf. Fr. Berlin iii. (1801) 440. [Osterdamia, Neck. | Leersia, Swartz, Prodr. veg. Ind. occ. (1788) 21. [Homalo- cenchrus, Mieg. | Ehrharta, Thunb. in Vet. Akad. Handl. Stockholm (1779) 216, t. 8. [Trochera, L. C. Rich. | ? The original should be referred to in ali cases of doubt, as | may have omitted a genus. In this Journ. xxxix., 38, (1905), I undertook to bring under notice the names attached by Mr. Britten to the Banks and Solander plants, and the names which stand can now be readily ascer- tained by reference to the list which follows. . 2 In this list we have firstly the Family (the term Natural Order is now suppressed), secondly the nomina conservanda with bibliographic refer- ences, and thirdly the nomina rejicienda. The change from Natural Orders to Families is so important that it seems desirable to emphasise it. The old term “Natural Order ” signified a group of genera; now it means a group of Families; e.g., the Order Glumiflore includes the Families Graminee and Cyperacee. 88 J. H. MAIDEN, Hierochloe [J. G. Gmel., Fl. sibir. i. (1747) 1001] Ry are Prodr. (1810) 208. [Savastana, Schrank; Torresia, Ruiz et Pav.; Dissarrenum, Labill. | Cynodon, L. C. Rich. in Persoon, Synops. i. (1805) 85. [Capriola, Adans ; Dactilon, Vill.; Fibichia, Koel. ] Glyceria, R. Br., Prodr. (1810) 179. [| Panicularia, Fabr. | Cyperacex— Lipocarpha, R. Br., in Tuckey, Congo (1818) 459. [LHypae- lyptum, Vahl.] Fimbristylis, Vahl., Enum. ii. (1806) 285. [Jria, L. C. Rich. Iriha, O. Ktze. | Rhynchospora, Vahl., Enum. ii. (1806) 229. [7 riodon, L. C. Rich. | Restionace — Hypolaena, R. Br., Prodr. (1810) 251. [| Calorophus, Labill.] Juncacee— Luzula, DC., in Lamarck et De Candolle, FI. frang. ed. 3, iii. (1805) 158. [Juncoides, Adans. | . Liliacee— Thysanotus, R, Br., Prodr, (1810) 282. [Chlamysporum Salisb. ] Cordyline, Comm. ex Juss., Gen. (1789) 41. [ Zerminalis, Rumph. | Astelia, Banks et Sol. ex R. Brown, Prodr. (1810) 291. [Punckia, Willd.] Iridacex— Libertia, Spreng , Syst. i. (1825) 127. [Zekel, Adans. ] Patersonia, R. Br., Prodr. (1810) 303. [Genosiris, Labill. | Orchidaceex— Spiranthes, R. C. Rich. in Mém. Mus. Paris iv. (1818) 50. [Gyrostachis, Pers.; I[bidium, Salisb. | Inparis, L. C. Rich. in Mém. Mus. Paris iv. (1818) 43. [ Leptorkis, Thou. | Oberonia, Lindl., Gen. and Spec. Orchid Pl. (1830)? 15. (Lridorkis, Thou.; Lridorchis, Thou. | INTERNATIONAL RULES OF BOTANICAL NOMENCLATURE. 89 Calanthe, R. Br., in Bot. Reg. (1821) sub t. 573. { Alismorkis Thou.; Alismorchis, Thou. | Eulophia, R. Br., in Bot. Reg. (1823) t. 686. [Graphorkis, Thou.; Graphorchis, Thou. | Dendrobium, Swartz in Nova Acta upsal. vi. (1799) 82 et in Vet. Akad. Nya Handl. xxi. (1800) 244. [Callista, Lour.; Ceraia, Lour. | Bulbophyllum, Thou., Hist. pl. Orchid. (1822) Tabl, des espec. iii. [Phyllorkis, Thou.; Phyllorchis, Thou. | Saccolabium, Blume, Bijdr. (1825) 292. [Gastrochilus, D. Don. | Urticacee— Laportea, Gaudich. in Bot. Voy. Freycinet (1826) 498. [Urticastrum, Fabr. | FProteacezx— Persoonia, Smith in Trans. Linn. Soc. iv. (1798) 215. [| Linkza, Cav. | Isopogon, R. Br., ex Knight, Proteac. (1809) 93 et in Trans. Linn. Soc. x. (1810) 71. [Atylus, Salish. ] Telopea, BR. Br., in Trans. Linn. Soc. x. (1810) 197. [ Hylogyne, Salisb. | Lomatia, R. Br., in Trans, Linn. Soc. x. (1810) 199. [Zri- condylus, Salisb. | Stenocarpus R. Br., in Trans. Linn. Soc. x. (1810) 201. [ Cybele, Salish. | Dryandra, R. Br., in Trans. Linn. Soc., x. (1810) 211 #. 3. [ Josephia, Salish. | Santalacee— Exocarpus, Labill., Voy. i. (1798) 155 t. 14. | Xylophyllos, Rumph.; Xylophylla, L. | Polygonacez— Emex, Neck., Elem. ii, (1790) 214. [Vibo, Medik.] Chenopodiacee— Suaeda, Forsk., Fl. aegypt. arab. (1775) 69 t. 18. [Dondia, Adans.; Lerchea, Rueling]| 90 J. H. MAIDEN. Portulacacez— Calandrinia, H. B. K., Nov. gen. et spec. vi. (1823) 77 t. 526. [Cosmia, Domb. ex Jussieu ; Baitaria, Ruiz et Pav. | Caryophyllacez— Spergularia, J. et. C. Presl., Fl. cech. (1819) 94. [ Buda, Adans; Jissa, Adans] Menispermacez — Cocculus, DC., Syst.i.(1818) 515. [Cebatha, Forsk.; Leaeba, Forsk.; EHpibaterium, Forsk.; Nephroia, Lour.; Baum- gartia, Mcench.; Androphylax, Wendl.; Wendlandia, Willd. | Myristicacez — Myristica, [L., Gen. ed. 2 (1742) 524] Rottb. in Act. Univ. Hafn. (1778) 281; L. £., Suppl. (1781) 40. [Comacum, Adans ; Arwana, Burm. | Laurace — Litsea, Lam., Encyel. ili. (1789) 574. [ Malapenna, Adans ; Glabraria, L.; Tomex, Thunb. | Cruciferz — Capsella; Medik, Pflanzengatt (1792) 85. [ Bursa, Weber.; Marsypocarpus, Neck. |] Malcolmia, R. Br. in Aiton, Hort. Kew. ed. 2, iv. (1812) 121. [ Wilckia, Scop. | Capparidacez— Gynandropsis, DC., Prodr. i. (1824) 237. [| Pedicellaria, Schrank. Cunoniacez — Weinmannia, L., Syst. ed. 10 (1759) 1005. [ Windmannia, P. Br. | Leguminose— Peltophorum, Walp., Rep.i. (1842) 811. [ Baryxylum, Lour.) Podalyria, Lam., Illustr ii. (1793) 454, t.327, £. 3, 4. [Aphora Neck. | Oxylobium, Andrews, Bot. Repos. (1809) t. 492, [Callis- tachys, Vent. | | INTERNATIONAL RULES OF BOTANICAL NOMENCLATURE. 91 Tephrosia, Pers., Synops. ii. (1807) 328. [Cracca, L.; Colinil, Adans.; Needhamia, Scop. | Clianthus, Banks et Soland. ex G. Don, Gen. Hist. ii. (1832) 468. [ Donia, G. Don] Desmodium, Desv., Journ. de bot. i. (1813) 122 t. 5. [Mei- bomia, Adans.; Plewrolobus, J. St. Hil. | Dalbergia, L. f, Suppl (1781) 52. [Amerimnon, P. Br.; Ecastaphyllum, P. Br.; ? Acouroa, Aubl. | Lonchocarpus, H. B. K , Nov. gen. et spec. vi. (1823) 383. [Clompanus, Aubl.; Robina, Aubl.] Pongamia, Vent., Jard. Malmaison (1803) 28. [Galedupa, Lam. | Derris, Lour., Fl. cochinch. (1790) 432. [Salken, Adans.; Solori, Adans.; Deguelia, Aubl.; Cylizoma, Neck. ] Kennedya, Vent., Jard. Malmaison ii. (1804) 104. [Caulinia, Meench. | Mucuna, Adans.,, Fam. ii. (1763) 325. [ Zoophthalmum, P. Br.; Stizolobium, P. Br. | Ehynchosia, Lour., Fl. cochinch. (1790) 400. [ Dolicholus, Medik. | Rutacez— Acronychia, Forst, Char. gen. (1776) 53 t. 27. [Cunto, | Adans.; Jambolana, Adans. | Atalantia, Correa in Ann. Mus. Paris vi. (1805) 383. [ Mal- naregam, Adans. | Simarubace— Brucea, J. F. Mill., Fasc. (1780) t. 25. [Zussa, Rumph. | Ailanthus, Desf. in Mém. Acad. sc. Paris 1786 (1789) 265 t. 8. [Pongelion, Adans| Euphorbiacez-— Codiaewm [Rumph. ex] A. Juss., De Euphorb. gen. tent. (1824) 33. [Phyllaurea, Lour. | Rhamnaceze— Colubrina, L. C. Rich. ex Brongniart in Ann. sc. nat. x. (1827) 368 t. 15 f. 3. [Marcorella, Neck.; Tubanthera, Comm. ex DC.] 92 J. H. MAIDEN, Tiliacee— Berrya, Roxb., Hort. bengal. (1814) 42 ; Pl. Coromandel iii. (1819) 60 t. 264. [Hspera, Willd. | Malvacez— Malvastrum, A. Gray in Mem. Amer. Acad., New Ser. iv. (1849) 21. [ Malveopsis, C. Presl | Pavonia, Cav., Diss. 11. (1786) App. 2; ii. (1787) 132 t. 45. [Zass, Adans.; Malache, B. Vogel; Prestonia, Scop. | Sterculiacez — Pterospermum, Schreb., Gen. ii. (1791) 461. | Velaga, Adans. | Cochlospermacez — Cochlospermum, Kunth, Malvac. (1822) 6. [Maaximiliana, Mart. | Violacee— Hybanthus, Jacq. Enum. pl Carib. (1760) 2. [Calceolaria, Loefl. | Flacourtiacee— Xylosma, Forst f. Prodr. (1786) 72. [Myroxzylon, Forst. | Thymelaeacex— | Wikstroemia, Endl, Prodr. fl. norfolk. (1833)47. [Capura, L. | Pimelea, Banks et Sol. ex Gaertner, Fruct. i. (1788) 186. | Banksia, Forst. | Sonneratiacex— Sonneratia, L.f., Suppl. (1781) 38. | Blatti, Adans.; Pagapate, Sonner. | Lecythidacez — Careya, Roxb., Hort. bengal. (1814) 52. [Cumbia, Buch.- Ham. | : Barrvngtonia, Forst , Char. gen. (1776) 75. [Huttum, Adans. | Rhizophoracez — | Carallia, Roxb. ex R. Brown in Flinders, Voy. Bot. ii. (1814) App. iii. 549. [Karekandel, Adans.; Diatoma. Lour.; Barraldeia, Thou. | Myrtacex— Agonis, Lindl., Swan River, App. (1839) 10. [Billottia, R. Br. ] INTERNATIONAL RULES OF BOTANICAL NOMENCLATURE. 93 Melaleuca, L., Mant. i. (1767) 14 [Cajuputi, Adans. | Verticordia, DC. in Dict. class hist. nat. xi, (1826) 400. [ Diplachne, R. Br. ex Desfontaines | Myrsinacez— Ardisia Swartz, Prodr. (1788) 48. [Kathoutheka, Adans ; ? Vedela, Adans.; Icacorea, Aubl.; Bladhia, Thunb. | Embelia Burm f., Fl. ind. (1768) 62. [Ghesaembilla, Adans.; Pattara, Adans. | Oleacez— Linociera, Swartz in Schreber, Gen. ii. (1791) 784. [ Mayepea, Aubl.; Thowinia, L.; Freyeria, Scop.; Ceranthus, Schreb. | Gentianacez— Villarsia, Vent., Choix, (1803) t. 9 pp. [Renealmia, Houtt. | Apocynacez— Carissa, L., Mant. i. (1767) 7. [Arduina, Mill.; Carandas, Adans. | é Alyxia, Banks ex R. Brown, Prodr. (1810) 469. [Gynopogon, Forst. | Ichnocarpus, R. Br. in Mem. Werner Soc. i. (1809) 61. [Quirivelia, Poir. | Convolvulacee— Calystegia, R. Br., Prodr. (1810) 483. [Volvulus, Medik. | Borraginacez — Trichodesma, R. Br., Prodr. (1810) 496. [| Pollichza, Medik:.: Borraginoides, Moench. | Labiateze— Plectranthus, L’Hérit , Stirp. nov. (1785 vel 1788 ?) 84 verso. [Germanea, Lam. ] Scrophulariaceze— Limnophila, R. Br., Prodr. (1810) 442. [Ambulia, Lam.; Diceros, Lour.; Hydropityon, Gaertn. | Stemodia, L., Syst. ed. 10 (1759) 1118. [Stemodiacra, P. Br. ] Artanema, D. Don in Sweet, Brit. Flow. Gard. 2 Ser. iil. (1835) t. 234, [Bahel, Adans.| 94 J. H. MAIDEN, Lentibulariaceze— Polypompholyx, Lehm., Pugill. viii. (1844) 48. [Cosmiza, Raf. | Acanthacez— Dicliptera, Juss. in Ann. Mus. Paris ix. (1807) 267. [ Dia- pedium, Koenig. | Rubiacez— Psychotria, L., Syst. ed. 10 (1759) 929. [Myrstiphyllum, P. Br.; Psychotrophum, P. Br.] Campanulacee— Wahlenbergia, Schrad., Catal. hort. goetting. (1814). [Cervi- cina, Del.| Goodeniacez— Scaevola, L., Mant, ii. (1771) 145. [ZLobelia, Adans.] Compositze— Vernonia, Schreb, Gen. ii. (1791) 541. [Behen, Hill.] Blumea, DC., in Guillemin, Arch. bot. ii. (1833) 514. [Placus, Lour. | Podolepis, Labill., Nov. Holl. pi. spec. ii. (1806 vel 1807) 56. [ Scalia, Sims. | Gynura, Cass. in Dict. sc. nat. xxxiv. (1825) 391. [Crasso- cephalum, Moench. | NOTES ON SOME NATIVE TRIBES OF AUSTRALIA. 95 NOTES on SOME NATIVE TRIBES or AUSTRALIA. By R. H. MATHEWS, L.S., Associé étranger Soc. d’ Anthrop. de Paris. [Read before the Royal Society of N. 8S. Wales, November 7, 1906. | In the following pages I shall deal with the sociology, language, and customs of some native tribes located in parts of the continent far removed from each other. I. SOCIOLOGY OF THE KURNU TRIBE. In 1902 I contributed a short article to this Society con- taining an elementary grammar anda Vocabulary of the Kurnt’ language.’ In 1904 I forwarded a supplementary grammar of this language to the Anthropological Society in Paris.” In the same year I submitted a description of their initiation ceremonies to the Anthropological Society in Vienna.’ Onthe present occasion an account of their sociology will be given. This tribe occupies both sides of the Darling River, from Bourke down to Winbar Station, extending back both northward and southward into the hinterland of the Darling for long distances. Their country also reaches up the Warrego River as far as Ford’s Bridge, asmall village onthat stream. The information contained in the three previous articles above referred to, as well as in the present paper, was gathered by me direct from the natives. The community is nominally divided into two primary cycles, moieties, groups or phratries, whichever of these hames we choose to employ for purposes of distinction. * Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales, xxxvi., pp. 154-179. ? Bull. Soc. d’ Anthrop. de Paris, Serie v., Tome v., pp. 183 — 139. * Mitteil. d. Anthrop. Gesellsch. in Wien., Bd. xxxtv., pp. 77-83. 96 R. H. MATHEWS. These cycles are named Mukungurra and Kilpungurra, with their feminine equivalents formed by suffixing ga to the masculine name. The Mukungurra cycle is again divided into two sections called Murruri and Kubburi, and the Kilpungurra cycle is similarly divided into two, called Ibburi and Ngumburi. In each of these four sections the names of the women are modified so as to distinguish them from those of the men. The following table exhibits the masculine and feminine form of each section name, the sections which normally or usually intermarry, and the section name of the offspring. Table I. Cycle. Mother. Father. Son. Daughter. _. ¢Ngummundyerra Murruri Ibburi Ibbundyerra Kilpungurra ( Ibbundyerra Kubburi Ngumburi Negummundyerra 7 . §Murrundyerra Ngumburi Kubburi Kubbundyerra Mikungurra (Kubbundyerra Ibburi Murruri Murrundyerra The above table gives the cycle, mother, father, son and daughter on the same line across the page, and requires no further explanation. Everything in the universe, animate and inanimate, belongs to one or other of the two cycles. And every individual in the community claims some animal or plant or other object as his or her totem. The section name is invariably determined through the mother, because the women of a cycle reproduce each other, in continuous alternation. The totems remain constantly in the same cycle as the women and are accordingly transmitted from a mother to her progeny. In an article contributed to this Society in 1905,’ I illustrated the sociology of the Barkunjee tribe as compris- ing only two divisions, Mukungurra and Kilpungurra, the men of one division marrying the women of the opposite one. In studying the above table, we observe that there is a bisection of each of the two divisions of the Barkunjee, 1 This Journal, xxx1x., pp. 118, 119. NOTES ON SOME NATIVE TRIBES OF AUSTRALIA. 97 so that in the Kirnti there are four divisions of the com- munity instead of two. The Kurnut, like the Barkunjee, possess a further distinc- tive division into Muggulu and Ngipuru, with their feminine forms Mugguluga and Ngipuruga, meaning sluggish or Leavy blood and swift or light blood respectively. Again, like the Barkunjee, the Kurnu are divided into Nhurré and Winggu, the Butt and the Branch shade. A man of the Muggulu blood and the’ Butt shade usually and normally marries a Ngipuruga woman of the Branch shade, subject to variations explained farther on. In regard to the off- spring, a Mugguluga mother produces Muggulu children who take their mother’s shade. A Ngipuruga mother pro- duces Ngipuru children belonging to her own shade. The castes of “‘blood’’ and “‘shade’’ are not necessarily coincident with the other divisions. For example, a Ngipuru man or woman may belong to either cycle or to any section and a Muggulu individual has the same varia- tions. In short, these castes divide the people of every section into two sorts or degrees. The cycles, sections, bloods and shades are used as the foundation upon which the betrothals and marriages are regulated. Before deal- ing further with this important subject, it will be desirable to introduce another table. Table II. | Ibburi C + A+Ngumburi B+Ngummundyerra D+ Ibbundyerra Kubbundyerra + Ibbundyerra + + Ibburi Ngumimundyerra Be + Ngumburi Murruri No.1 ae Ngummundyerra + K + Murrundyerra Murruri No, 2 + - - - - - - - - marries Ibbundyerra + + Kubbundyer ra In this table, in the lower left hand corner, we have Murruri No.1; above him is his mother Kubbundyerra ; and above her, at A, is her tabular or No. 1 father. A G—Nov. 7, 1906. es aN oe 98 R. H. MATHEWS. little way to the right of Ngumburi is his sister Ngum- mundyerra, marked B, below whom are her children, a daughter and a son. Her daughter Ibbundyerra has a daughter Ngummundyera; and her son Ibburi has adaughter Murrundyerra. Then Murruri No. 1, whom we shall assume tobe a Muggulu, marries Ngummundyerra H, as shown in Table 2. She is his normal or No. 1 wife and belongs to the opposite cycle as well as to the Ngipuru blood. I must digress a moment to explain why Ngummund- yerra Kisa Ngipuru. Because Murruri No.1 isa Muggulu his mother must have been a Mugguluga. His mother’s father Ngumburi, in the normal course of things, must therefore have been a Ngipuru to enable him to marry a Mugguluga and so produce Kubbundyerra. Ngumburi’s sister was consequently a Ngipuruga too, and as descent is counted through the women, his daughter’s daughter Ngummundyerra EK must also be a Ngipuruga. But Murruri No. 1 might be allotted Murrundyerra (see Table 2), who belongs to the Muggulu blood like himself. She is the daughter of Ibburi, a Ngipuru man, who must have espoused a Mugguluga and his daughter is accordingly a Mugguluga. In such a case Murruri No. 1 marries a woman of his own cycle and of his own blood division. She may be distinguished as wife No. 2. Looking again at Table 2 we find Murruri No. 2 in the lower left hand corner, with his mother above him; and higher up at C, her No. 2 father Ibburi. Away in the upper right hand corner is Ibburi’s sister Ibbundyerra, marked D, with her children and grand children below her. Then Murruri No. 2 marries Ibbundyerra, of the opposite cycle and opposite blood division who may be styled wife No. 3. Or Murruri No. 2 might have Kubbundyerra assigned him as wife No. 4. She belongs to his own cycle and to his ) own blood division. I have not considered it necessary to . trace out the blood divisions of the No. 3 and No. 4 wives. NOTES ON SOME NATIVE TRIBES OF AUSTRALIA. 99 The Kubbundyerra of our example in Table 2 had a Ngumburi as her No. 1 father, or an Ibburi as her No, 2 father. She might instead have had a Murruri or a Kubburi as her No. 3 or No. 4 father respectively, as follows :— Table III. Kubburi + + Murruri + Murrundyerra + Kubbundyerra \ fe / \ Kubbund a) me Kubbundyerra + + Kubburi Murrund yerra + 4+ Murruri Murruri No.3-+ marries Murrundyerrat . +Ngummundyerra Murruri No. 4+ - - - - - - - - marries Kubbundyerra + + Ibbundyerra Kubbundyerra is shown as the same individual for the sake of simplicity, but the woman in Table 2 might be a different Kubbundyerra to the one in Table 3. The Kub- bundyerra of our examples represents the section rather than the individual. This Kubbundyerra might have had a husband from any one of four sections. Perhaps her husband was Ibburi as in Table 1, or Kubburi, or Ngumburi, or Murruri, but it makes no difference to her progeny which of the four men she was mated with—her children are Murruri and Murrundyerra just the same. Owing, how- ever, to the above mentioned variations in her possible husbands and her possible fathers, it is evident that there could be four sorts or degrees of Murruris, depending upon their mother’s pedigree as well as upon her marriage. These four sorts of men are shown as Murruri Nos. 1, 2, 3 and 4 in the tables. It will be observed, however, that the wife of each of the four men will have nominally the same relationship to him, but through different channels. The human subject, animals, plants, inanimate objects, the elements, the heavenly bodies—everything on the earth or above it—are divided into Kilpungurra and Mukungurra, into Muggulu and Ngipuru, and into Butt and Branch shades. The normal and general practice is for one of these pairs of divisions to intermarry with each other. A 100 R. H. MATHEWS. Kilpungurra marries a Mukungurra, a Mugulu a Ngipuru, a Butt shade a Branch shade. In explaining Tables 2 and 3 we have seen that these general rules are subject to certain modifications. Sometimes a Kilpungurra mates with a Kilpungurra, a Muggulu with a Muggulu, and a Butt shade with a Butt shade. Another custom of wide prevalence is that a man of a given totem must espouse a woman whose totem is not the same as his. This law, like that of the cycles and other divisions, is subject to departures. For example, a man who is a bandicoot might be allotted a bandicoot wife, although this seldom happens. There is no such thing as a cast-iron partition of the com- munity into two exogamous moieties. The only law of the Kurnt sociology which admits of no variation, is that the cycles, sections, totems, bloods and shades, are irrevo- cably transmitted through the mothers. It is for the elders of the tribes to settle what par- ticular genealogy will be adopted when choosing a husband or wife for any particular person. Previous family mar- riages and a number of other matters are considered in arranging this point. There are also regulations depend- ing upon the totems of the affianced parties, and upon whether they are the elder or the younger members of the family. The maternal uncles of the parties are in all cases among the principal personages in conducting the betrothals. It is well known that in most Australian tribes a man’s brothers are treated as the nominal or tribal fathers of his children, and that his wife’s sisters are treated as nominal mothers. This fact introduces a disturbing element into the genealogies, but it is an advantage rather than otherwise, because it increases the chances of a given man or woman obtaining a spouse. For example, Kub- bundyerra’s father Ngumburi (Table 2) might not have a NOTES ON SOME NATIVE TRIBES OF AUSTRALIA. 101 sister, but some of his father’s brothers might have daughters, who would be called his (Ngumburi’s) sisters, and thus supply the Ngummundyerra marked B in Table 2, This custom also serves another useful purpose, by means of which we can explain why some old men have very young wives. Let us suppose that the Ngumburi last mentioned was the eldest of his father’s family. He (Ngumburi) might easily have a younger brother who was, say, fifteen years his junior. This younger brother, Z, who would in time be the father of a daughter, who would fill the place of Ngummundyerra B in Table 2. Again, Ngumburi might marry early and his tribal sister late, so that by a number of circumstances, all probable enough, Murruri No. 1 might get a wife who was twenty or thirty years younger than himself, although she would be of the strictly proper lineage. It has been said in an earlier page that the totems, con- sisting of everything alive and inanimate, are subject to the same divisions and subdivisions as the people themselves. Many of the plants, animals, etc., possess the same rela- tionship to each other as the people, a few examples of which will be given from the Kurnu. The iguana, carpet- snake and brown-snake are brothers and sisters; the por- cupine and bandicoot are similarly related; so are the emu and native companion. The turtle has no relations; neither has the mussel nor the crayfish. The relationships of brother-in-law, maternal uncle and many others are also current. These kinships extend to inanimate nature as well; a spring may be related to a tree; certain stars are brothers and sisters, husbands and wives, and so on. II. SHARING GAME AND OTHER Foon.’ There isa universal custom in every native camp, which regulates the partition of all kinds of game and vegetable 1 See also my remarks on food regulations in the article contributed to this Society in 1904, Vol. xxxvull., p. 258, seq. 102 R. H. MATHEWS. food among the relatives and friends of those who procure the supply. Let us say a hunter has killed a padamellin. Some of his relatives get their share from the fore part of the animal, and others from the hind part. There is a further regulation as to which side of the animal shall be given. Some are alloted their portion from the right side of the padamellin, others from the left side. For example, a certain relation may be given the right hind leg, another the left; the right and left fore legs would be similarly distributed to others. One man would get the loin, another the backbone, another the tail, another the head. The brisket, ribs and internal parts respectively would go to othen relatives. The portion which each person would obtain would depend upon his relationship to the hunter. The worst parts would be kept by the hunter for his own use. HKmus, opossums, iguanas, fish and other animals are divided on the same principle, with necessary variations according to their shape and size. A somewhat similar distribution is made of yams, grass seeds, berries and other foods. We have said that a man gets his share of food, accord- ing to his relationship to the person who captures it; but this does not restrict him to one special part of every animal, because his relationship to another hunter will entitle him to a different portion of such hunter’s game. Say that a man, A, is allotted the left hind leg of an opossum by his brother’s son. A may have a brother-in- law in the camp who will perhaps give him the loin of a kangaroo—the portion of the carcase given by a brother-in- law differing from that given by a brother’s son, and so on. Although a man distributes all the best portions of his own catch of game and eats only a little of the worst parts, yet he shares in the distribution of the game of his relatives and thereby gets some good pieces. Moreover, it looks at NOTES ON SOME NATIVE TRIBES OF AUSTRALIA. 103 first sight as if a hunter’s own wife and children would receive scant attention, but the father and mother of the hunter, and those of his wife if present, see that his family get a proper supply of food. Owing to the native law that a man’s father’s brothers rank as his fathers, the hunter’s children will probably have more than one paternal grand father to look after their food supply. A white man, unacquainted with the native food regula- tions, on going through a camp at feeding time and seeing them dividing the day’s takings, would conclude that the animals were merely cut up and divided among all the people. What actually takes place is, that each hunter gives away all the choice pieces of his own catch and receives donations from his relatives. In the end the result is substantially the sameasif the game were divided equally in the first instance, but with the advantage that every person is taught to divide with his own kindred. An old or feeble person, although not a relation, would be given something out of the day’s catch; and if any of the party had been unsuccessful in the chase or in obtain- ing other food, some of the people would see that he did | not go hungry. I have often heard stockmen and other uneducated white people say how greedy a blackfellow is, and how he will sit and eat up food without giving his wife any. He is acting in accordance with custom, because he knows that it is the duty of certain persons among the woman’s friends to give her a portion. The yarns we sometimes read in books and newspapers regarding the holding capacity of a blackfellow’s stomach are equally baseless. In 1882 Mr. Hdward Palmer, when describing the cus- toms of certain Queensland tribes, said :—‘' Division of game takes place according to old established rules, in which the natiyes practice considerable self denial, the 104 R. H. MATHEWS. hunter often going short himself that others might have their recognised share. When a kangaroo is killed, the hind leg is given to the hunter’s father, with the back bone; the other hind leg to his father’s brother; the tail to his sister: the shoulder to his brother; the liver he eats him- self. Sometimes his own wife will be left without any, but in that case it seems to be the rule that her brother gives her of his hunting, or someone else on her side. She will not get much from her blackfellow, unless there is a surplus. All game has to be shared according to rule, the best part going to the father’s camp, the next to the father’s brothers. A blackfellow would rather go short himself and pretend he was not hungry, than incur the odium of being greedy in camp, or neglecting the rights of hospitality. Snakes were broken in pieces and handed round.’” At my request, a valuable correspondent in the Alice Springs district, Central Australia, sends me the following rules regarding the partition of game there. Ifaman kills, say a kangaroo, he takes it to the camp and divides it amongst his relations. He gives the tail to his father’s brother’s son; the loin and fat to his father-in-law, if present; the right hind leg to his brother; the left hind leg to his father; the ribs to his mother-in-law, if present; the forelegs to his father’s younger sisters; the head to his Wife. The hunter himself takes only the inner parts and the blood. He then waits till he receives a share from some of the other hunters who are related to him. Mr. James Dawson, in dealing with the aborigines of the south-western district of Victoria, in 1881, reported as follows:—‘‘There are strict rules regulating the distribu- tion of food. When a hunter brings game to the camp, he gives up all claim to it, and must stand aside and allow the best portions to be given away, and content himself * Journ. Anthrop. Inst., xIII., 285. ., NOTES ON SOME NATIVE TRIBES OF AUSTRALIA. 105 with the worst. If he has a brother present, the brother is treated in the same way, and helps the killer of the game to eat the poor pieces, which are thrown to him, such as the forequarters and ribs of the kangaroos, opossums and small quadrupeds, and the back bones of birds. The aboriginal narrator of this custom, mentioned that when he was very- young he used to grumble because his father gave away all the best pieces of birds and quadrupeds, and the finest eels, but he was told thatit wasarule and must be observed. The women also divide the food they collect, which is mainly vegetable. This custom is called ° yirka bawhar,’ meaning ‘exchange.’ . . The grey bandicoot belongs to the women and is killed and eaten by them, but not by the men or children.’” Mr. J. P. Gell, reports that among the tribes about Adelaide, in South Australia, grubs living in the bark of trees were eaten by the men only.* Ill. SocIOLOGY OF THE CHAU-AN TRIBE. The Chau-an tribe have their hunting grounds on the Katherine River and surrounding country. On the south they are bounded by the Yungmunni community, about Hlsey Creek, whose sociology was described by me for the first time in this Journal in 1900.° With the help of a capable and reliable resident of that district, I have since then been studying the sociology of the Chau-an people; and am pleased to be able to supply the following infor- * Australian Aborigines of Western District of Victoria, (Melbourne, 1881) pp. 22 and 52. 2 Tasmanian Journal of Natural Science, (1842), I., p. 112. * This Journal, xxxiv., 130. The equivalence of the section names of the Chau-an, to those of the Yungmunni tribe about Elsey Creek, is as follows:—Plienban is equal to Eemitch, Aratchban to Uwannee, Kamaranban to Unmarra, and Wamood to Tabachin. In the lower half ot the table, Kangala corresponds to Yungalla, and the remaining sections correspond in the order in which they are printed. 106 R. H. MATHEWS. mation, which has never before been published. Like their Southern neighbours, their women can be classified into two cycles of four sections each, making eight divisions in all. Upto the present, [have not been able to discover feminine forms of the section names. I am informed that all the tribes from Katherine River to Port Darwin, have the same sociology as the Chau-an. The names of the eight sections are different from those at the Katherine, but the principle is just the same. Table IV. Cycle. Mother. Father. Children. Kangala Plienban Paralee re Watchban Aratchban Pongaree | Paralee Kamaranban Watchban | Pongaree Wamood Kangala ( Plienban Kangala Wamood | Aratchban Watchban Kamaranban B- : . Wamood Pongaree Aratchban | Kamaranban Paralee Plienban In studying the upper half of the above table, or cycle A, we see that the women in the “‘ mother ”’ and “‘ children ”’ columns reproduce each other in an established order, and this series is continaully repeated. Kangala has a Paralee daughter, who has a Watchban daughter, who has a Pongaree daughter, whose daughter reverts to the original Kangala section. A similar invariable order of succession exists among the women of Cycle B. As regards the marriages of the sections, a man of the Plienban section can marry a Kangala, as his direct or tabular wife, which can be called wife No. 1, or he can espouse Watchban as No. 2, or Aratchban as No. 3, or Plienban as a No. 4 wife. And as regards the progeny, if Plienban marries Kangala his children will be Paralee, who may be called his No. 1 family. If he takes a Watchban as his wife, his children NOTES ON SOME NATIVE TRIBES OF AUSTRALIA. 107 will be Pongaree, which we shall distinguish as his No. 2 family. If he weds an Aratchban his children will be Kamaranban, who can be denominated his No. 3 family. And if Plienban should espouse a Plienban woman his children would be Wamood, whom we shall set down as his No. 4 family. From this we can readily see that the children of a given man, may have any one of four section names, this matter depending altogether upon the woman who is his wife; and consequently there cannot be any recurrent succession of the section hames through the men. Two of Plienban’s possible wives and two of his possible families belong to Cycle A, and two to Cycle B. A No. 1 wife, and consequently a No. 1 family, which are those given in Table IV. on the same line across the page, are the most general, and may be considered the normal relationships. A No. 2 wife and family are the next most usual, No. 3 and No. 4 wives and resultant families are not so common, although quite legal in native society. We have just seen thata man may havea wife or family belonging to any one of four sections. Although a woman may likewise have a husband from any one of four sections, this fact makes no difference at all to her progeny. For example, a Kangala woman might be married to Plienban, or Aratchban, or Watchban, or Kangala, but her children would be Paralee all the same, because the succession of the sections through the woman is absolutely invariable. But owing to the four possible husbands obtainable by women of the Kangala section, it is evident that there could be four sorts of Paralees, according to whom their fathers were. In the Chau-an, as well as in all the other tribes reported by me, in the Northern Territory, succession of the totems does not depend upon either the father or the mother, but a? i ) "2 aN a 108 R. H. MATHEWS. is regulated by locality, and I shall now endeavour to describe how this is carried out. The folk-lore of these people is full of fabulous tales respecting the progenitors of every totem. Some of them were like the men and women of our own time, whilst others were mythologic creatures of aboriginal fairyland. In those olden days, as at present, the totemic ancestors consisted of families or groups of families, who had their recognised hunting- grounds in some part of the tribal territory. They were born in a specific locality, and occupied it by virtue of their birthright. Some of them would be, let us say, cockatoos, others dogs, others kangaroos, others snakes, and so forth. The members of these family groups were sub-divided into the same eight sections which we find among the people now. When one of these legendary individuals died, his spirit Was supposed to settle itself in some well known spot in his own hunting grounds, such as a rock, or tree, or hill, or soakage, or perhaps it went into the ground. The individual might, during his lifetime, have identified himself with different places, such as where he camped at various times, or did a notable deed, or worked some ceremonial in- cantation or the like. The sites of these several actions were scattered over different parts of the locality he occupied, as well as over the hunting grounds of neighbouring friendly tribes, whom he was in the habit of visiting. All the members of his own family group had, as a matter of course, equal rights to the same hunting grounds as he, and located their spirits at certain places in a similar manner. In the course of many generations, all the camping places, water-holes, large rocks, springs, hills, trees and remark- able objects in their own tract of country would become saturated, so to speak, with spirits of all sorts. There NOTES ON SOME NATIVE TRIBES OF AUSTRALIA. 109 would be bandicoots at one place; frogs would infest others; some would be reeking with porcupines; whilst other spots would be haunted by snakes. Certain of these fabled areas were large, and others were of small extent. Some of the traditionary totems were invested with greater authority than others, like the head men of totemic groups at the present time. Some animals of a kind were numerous, as now, and left a prolific family of spirits, whilst others were few, and left behind a limited number of representatives. The exact location of every one of these notable retreats has been handed down by oral tradition to all the present natives, who give a poetical and much embellished account of the doings of their various ancestors, freely mixed with superstition. The people of the far past time used to assemble, as at present, for ceremonial purposes, such as initiating the young men, making rain, etc., and consequently every man and woman had travelled over most of the tribal territory. After the death of a given individual, his spirit would re- visit all the places which had figured prominently in the man’s life, sometimes sojourning at one of these spots, sometimes at another, but the “‘headquarters’’ of the spirit would be at a particular soakage, rock, etc., in the old hunting grounds. Whether in human shape or as monstrosities, these creatures of aboriginal fancy or exaggeration were possessed of supernatural powers. Some of them could form springs and watercourses; some could raise up hills and rocks at certain historic spots, whilst others could cause trees or patches of scrub to grow in remarkable forms. Moreover, these fabled retreats are related to one another, in the same way that human beings are related. For example, a soakage may be the mother’s brother of a certain hill; a rock may be the father of a particular 110 R. H. MATHEWS. sand-hill; a tree may be the brother of a rock-hole, and so on. In all aboriginal tribes there is a deeply seated belief in the reincarnation of their ancestors. The original stock of spirits, so to speak, perpetually undergo reincarnation from one human being to another. The natives are quite ignorant of the natural facts of procreation, and believe that conception is altogether independent of sexual inter- course. When a woman for the first time feels the move- ment of the child inthe womb, commonly called quicken- ing, she takes particular notice of the spot where it occurred and reports it to the people present. It is believed that the spirit or soul of some deceased progenitor has just at that moment entered the woman’s body. The entry may have been by the way of some one of the natural openings, or through any part of the skin, the mode and place of ingress being immaterial to these ethereal beings. When the child is born, it will have assigned to it the totemic name of the mythic ancestor belonging to the particular locality. For example, if the quickening happened near a remarkable rock, or hill, or waterhole, or camping place, Which was known to be haunted by the traditionary spirit of a galah, the infant would belong to the galah totem, altogether independently of either the father or the mother. Regarding the succession of the totems, it is important to remember that in all our aboriginal tribes, a wife is taken away into the family group or triblet of her husband, and roams about with him through his country. If he be, for example, a crow, he and his wife will spend most of their time amongst the specific haunts of his ancestors. When his wife for the first time becomes conscious of being enceinte, she will probably be staying at a spot associated with some of the crows of earlier times, because NOTES ON SOME NATIVE TRIBES OF AUSTRALIA. 11] she is living in a crow man’s country. In such a case the child, when born, will be denominated a crow the same as its father. Should the woman, however, at the time of the quickening, happen to be on a visit to her own people in the district where she was born and brought up, the chances are in favour of the interesting fact being con- nected with one of her own ancestors, say a porcupine; then the child will get the totemic name of the porcupine, the same as its mother. Again, if the woman, at the critical moment, happened to be at a part of the common hunting grounds, where the pigeon spirits are supposed to predominate, her infant would be a pigeon. In this way there could be children of the same parents all possessing different totemic names, many examples of which are found among the Chau-an, Chingalee and other tribes. But as the married pair of our example would naturally frequent their own crow tract more than anywhere else, as stated in the last paragraph, their crow progeny would probably be the most numerous, or it might be that all their children would be crows. This has given rise to the erroneous statements made by other investigators that the descent of the totems is through the father. In some of these historic places the spirits of several different kinds of animals which were closely related to each other, are now sald to inhabit the same rock, tree, spring, etc., or at any rate to occupy places in close prox- imity to each other, and roam about in company the same as they did when “in the flesh.’’ If a mother first felt the movements of the foetus at that locality, it would be almost impossible to say which of the spirits had entered her body, and consequently in such cases it is always difficult for the oid men to decide the denomination of the totem to which the child shall be deemed to belong. Rev. L. Schultze, in speaking of the tribes on the Upper Finke River, states:—‘‘These natives believe that the Hy R. H. MATHEWS. souls of the infants dwell in the foliage of the trees, and that they are carried there by the good mountain spirits ‘tuanyiraka,’ and their wives, ‘melbata.’ The nearest tree to a woman when she feels the first pain of parturition, she calls ‘ngirra,’ as they are under the impression that the “guruna,’ or soul, has then entered from it into the child. Such a tree is left untouched, as they believe that whoever should happen to break off even a single branch would become sick. But if the tree should be injured or broken down by winds or floods, that person would get ill whose ‘ngirra,’ the tree was.’” | When Rev. C. G. Teichelmann, and Rev. OC. W. Schurmann were engaged in missionary work among the aboriginal tribes in and around Adelaide, the capital of South Australia, in 1840, the blacks called them ‘ Pindi-meyu,’ or ‘‘men of the den,’’ because in their white complexions and unusual activity, they believed that they recognised their forefathers returned from the habitation of the dead. *Pindi,’ a large den or pit, was the place of souls, and was situated in the far west, whence the souls of the unborn came, and, hovering among the grass-trees, waited for the hour of conception. When the infant into whom the spirit entered, had finished its course on earth, and was buried, the spirit, ‘towilla,’ returned to ‘ Pindi.” Rey. Geo. Taplin, speaking of the tribes about Mount Freeling, 300 miles northerly from Adelaide, describes how these spirits manage to secure a mother. A tiny spirit meets a woman in the bush and throws its little club at her foot, the end of the weapon making a little puncture under the great-toe nail, through which the spirit enters, and in due time isre-born. The entry may be under the thumb nail, and is accomplished in a similar manner, with the 1 Trans., Roy. Soc., S. Australia, (Adelaide, 1891), x1v., 239. ? Tasmanian Journal of Natural Science, (1842), I., pp. 111 and 120. NOTES ON SOME NATIVE TRIBES OF AUSTRALIA. V3 same result. The sex of the infant is determined by that of the spirit who enters the woman’s body.’ Mr. Schurmann, in 1846, reported the same belief among the tribes about Port Lincoln, more than 350 miles by land, via Port Augusta, from Adelaide.’ On the Daly River, in the Northern Territory, Rev. Donald McKillop reports that souls are shut up in hills. Daly River is twenty-one degrees of latitude distant from Adelaide, which shows the wide geographic range ‘of the native belief in reincarnation. He says:—‘'A few miles from where we live, and not far from the river (Daly), there is a hill, called in the native language ‘ Alalk-yinga,’ that is ‘‘the place of children.’’ The natives believe that the souls of future children—or perhaps the children, bodies and souls—are shut up there, They are under the care of one old man. He has to see that they do not escape, and to supply them with water. This he does by means of an underground communication with the river about a mile away. The range, of which the hill. in question is the last one, runs right to the river. When a child is to be born, this old man sees to the business.”’ Mr. G. W. Earl, when among the natives of Coburg Peninsula, in the extreme north of Australia, in 1846, stated that “‘ the spirits of the dead are recognised in the strangers who visit their country.’* Coburg Peninsula, where Mr. Har! observed the belief in reincarnation, and Port Lincoln, where Mr. Schurmann, in the same year, reported a similar belief, are separated by 24 degrees of latitude, or about 1,500 miles. When residing at Perth, Western Australia, in 1842, Mr. G. F. Moore reported that the word ‘djandga’ signified ? Folklore, Manners, etc., S. A. Aborigines, (1879), p. 88. ? Reprinted in Native Tribes of South Australia, (1879), p. 235. 3 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. A., (Adelaide, 1894), xvit., 262. * Journ. Roy. Geog. Soc., (London, 1846), xv1., 241. H—Noyv. 7, 1906. 114 R. H. MATHEWS, ‘“‘the reappearance of deceased persons. It is also applied to Huropeans, who are supposed to be aborigines, under another colour, restored to the land of their nativity.’” From Adelaide, where the same belief was recorded, to Perth, is about 1,300 miles in a direct line on a map of Australia. Mr. H.S. Parker, a protector of the aborigines of Victoria, wrote in 1854:—‘'The aborigines had a distinct belief of the existence of their souls after death. . . . There were also well defined traces of a belief in transmigration of souls. . . . It is well known that, on the Gece appearance of the colonists, the opinion was taken up, and long maintained among them, that they were their deceased progenitors returning to their former haunts.’” The few examples I have quoted, show that the aboriginal belief in the reincarnation of souls, has been known and reported upon by white men, from 1840 to the present time. The localities I have chosen for these examples are situated in the extreme north, the west, and the south of the Australian Continent. IV. LANGUAGES OF TRIBES ABOUT ALICE SPRINGS. During recent years, some friends of mine have had business at the mining fields, in the Alice Springs district, Northern Territory. The journey from Adelaide to Alice Springs, although a somewhat long one, is quite easily accomplished. On the Paleozoic Radiolarian Rocks of N.S. Wales,” by Prof. T. W. E. David, B.a., F.c.s., and E. F. Pittman, a-.Rs.m. Quart. Journ, Geol. Soc. London, Vol. tv., 1899. * « On the occurrence of a bed of fossiliferous tuff and lavas between the Silurian and Middle Devonian at Cavan, Yass,” by A. J. Shearsby. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S,W., Vol. xxx., part 2. SILURIAN AND DEVONIAN ROCKS. 139 Braidwood beds, both of which are generally considered, mainly on the presence of Lepidodendron australe, to be of Upper Devonian age. If we take the Canobolas beds as being of this age, it becomes necessary to account for the absence of the middle and lower Devonian strata (this applies also to the Mount Lambie and Braidwood districts). There are two possible explanations: (1) the Lower and Middle Devonian strata had been entirely removed by denudation prior to the deposition of the Upper Devonian, or (2) the areas where the Upper Devonian now occur were dry land during the Lower and Middle Devonian epochs. Both suppositions, but particularly the former, demand a long interval of time between the close of the Silurian and the beginning of the Upper Devonian, during which there must have been profound denudation and corresponding deposition elsewhere. Much might be said both for and against these two explanations, but in view of our present scanty knowledge of the Devonian strata of New South Wales, it is perhaps premature to endeavour to arrive at any definite conclusions. There is one other possible explanation that appears worthy of consideration. So far as the writer knows, wherever the so-called Upper Devonian strata occurs in New South Wales there is an absence of Middle Devonian strata, and conversely, where so-called Middle Devonian strata occur, such as the Mur- rumbidgee beds, there appears to be an absence of Upper Devonian beds. Might not these two types of Devonian strata be contemporaneous, the lithological and paleeonto- logical difference being due to the different conditions under which each was deposited; the Murrumbidgee beds being deposited in a more or less open sea, far removed from a shore line and containing an abundant coral fauna, while the beds of the Canoblas, Mount Lambie type, were deposited ina Shallow coastal sea, which was receiving abundant and relatively coarse sediment from the adjacent land. 140 C. A. SUSSMILCH. - V. THE VOLCANIC SERIES. It is not intended to give any detailed description of these rocks in this note. They form portion of the immense accumulation of lavas and tuffs which go to form the group of extinct volcanic peaks known as the Canoblas mountains. They consist, in the area mapped, mainly of basalt flows, but andesites, and andesitic and trachytic tuffs also occur, particularly towards the Canoblas. These deposits are everywhere unconformable with the underlying Silurian and Devonian strata, and are most probably of Tertiary age. VI. SUMMARY. The nature of the Silurian sediments indicates tranquil deposition in an open, comparatively shallow sea, consider- ably removed from any shore line, and accompanied by a slow, intermittent subsidence. Towards the close of the period vulcanism became an important feature, as evidenced in the thick beds of tuff and rhyolite. The Devonian sediments, on the other hand, indicate shallow water conditions of deposition, with dry land in the immediate vicinity to provide the coarse sediments of which most of the strata are composed. With the close of the Silurian Period, a deformative movement, perhaps already heralded by the pronounced vulcanism, began to affect the earth’s crust, resulting probably from the stresses in the earth’s body accumulated during the long continued sedimentation which marked the Silurian period. This resulted in the elevation of portion, at least, of the Silurian sediments into dry land, with the initiation of a new cycle of erosion. This deformative movement probably continued more or less throughout the Devonian period, and culminated in the great mountain building of the Carboniferous period, when all the Silurian and Devonian strata were folded into a great series of BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AUSTRALIAN AND NEW ZEALAND LICHENS. 141 anticlinal and synclinal folds of which only the remnants are now available for study. Since the Devonian period, there is no evidence of this part of New South Wales having ever again been beneath the sea. In conclusion I have to acknowledge the assistance given me in the field work by several of my students at the Sydney Technical College, and by Mr. H. A. Perry. Iam also inbebted to Prof. T. W. E. David for much kindly advice and assistance. BIBLIOGRAPHY or AUSTRALIAN, NEW ZEALAND, AND SOUTH SHA ISLAND LICHENS. (Second Paper.) By Epwin CHEEL. (Communicated by J. H. MAIDEN, F.L.S.) [Read before the Royal Society of N. 8S. Wales, December 5, 1906. } SINCE the publication of the “‘ Bibliography of Australian Lichens,”’ in this Journal, Vol. Xxxvil., pp. 171 — 182, 1903, I have received, through the kindness of M.Gustave Beauverd, the Curator of Herbier Boissier, Chambesy, Geneva, some additional works by the late Dr. Jean Muller on Australian Lichens. In Dr. Muller’s works, students of Australian Lichens are often referred to works by various authors on New Zealand and South Sea Island lichens, for descriptions of Australian species. For the benefit of those who may be interested in the Lichen Flora of Australia I have thought it advisable to submit this, as a supplement, and at the same time to extend the title, so as to embrace the works treating on the Lichen Flora of the adjacent islands 142 E. CHEEL. which, it is only natural to expect, have close affinities with that of Australia, and is, indeed sometimes identical. OA: 102. 103. 104. 100. 106. 110. AUSTRALIA. Acharius, Erich. Synopsis Methodica Lichenum, p. 248 and p. 343 (1814). Brown, R. Miscellaneous Botanical Works of Robert Brown—Fay Society, Vol. 1., pp. 69, 70; (1866). Hooker, Sir W. J. On Cenomyce retipora, Hook.—Lond. Journ. Bot., Vol. 1., pp. 292 — 294, (1842) [Tab. x., Fig. 1 -7.] Mueller, Baron F. von Census of the Genera hitherto known as indigenous to This Journ. Vol. xv., pp, 249 — 251, (1881) and Vol. xvi, p. 187, (1883). Australia. Mueller, Baron F. von List of Plants obtained during Mr. Giles’ travels in Australia in 1875, 1876.—Seemann’s Journ. Bot., p. 349, (1877). Nylander, W. Lichenes nonnull Australienses in Flora Ratisbon, Bd. Lx1x., No, 21, pp. 323 — 328, (1866) and succeeding years. . Nylander, W. —.- Bull. Soc. Linn. Normandie 2e serie, Tome 11., (1868) p. 47, and Tome tv.. (1870) p. 167. . Nylander, W. Parmeliz exotic nove.—Sflora, 68, pp. 605 — 615, (1885). . Knight, Charles. A description of a new species of Parmelia from Victoria.— Proc. Roy, Soc., Queensl., Vol. 1., p. 114. Krempelhuber, Dr. A. von Exot. Flecht. aus den Hb. Wien.— Verhandl. der k. k. zool. bot., Gesellsch. in Wren, (1868) Tome xvur, p. 313. BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AUSTRALIAN AND NEW ZEALAND LICHENS. 143 111. Krempelhuber, Dr. A. von Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Lichen-flora der Siidsee-Inseln.—- Journ. des Mus. Goddefroy, Hamburg, Heft 4, (1873) pp. 93-100 (Tab. xiv.) 112. Krempelhuber, Dr. A. von Geschichte und Literatur Lichenologei. 113. Stirton, J. Lichens British and Foreign.—Trans. Field Naturalists’ Soc. of Glasgow, (1873); (1875) pp. 85 — 95; (1876). 114. Stirton, J. Scottish Naturalist, 1877 and succeeding years. 115. Stirton, J. Lichens collected by Mr. Hugh Paton, during a tour through Southern Australia (Gippsland), [Communicated by J. E. Tenison-Woods].—Proc. Roy. Soc., Victoria, Vol. xvit., pp. 10 — 13 (1880). 116. Stirton, J. A new classification of the genus Pyxine. (Communicated by T. W. Naylor Beckett).—Trans. and Proc. of the New Zealand Institute, Vol. xxx., pp. 393 —398, (1897) ; Botanischer Jahresberichte, xxv1., (1898) p. 277. Erste Abth. Zweites Heft. 117. Stirton, J. On new Australian and New Zealand Lichens. (Communi- cated by T. W. Naylor Beckett).—T7rans. and Prec. N. Z. Inst., Vol. Xxx., pp. 382 — 393, (1897) and Vol. xxx11., pp. 70 — 82 (1899), and in Bot. Jahresb., t. xxvi., (1898) p. 277. 118. Stirton, J. Lichens in Bailey’s Contributions to the Flora of Queensland. —The Agricultural Journal, Queens!., Vol. v., pp. 37 — 40, and pp. 484 — 488, (1899). 119. Muller, Dr. Jean F.M.1L. 8S. [Argoviensis] Revisio Lichenum Australiensium Krempelhuberi.—Flora, (1887) Bd. uxx., No. 8, pp. 113-118. 144 E. CHEEL. 120. Muller, Dr. Jean. 121 122. a bo Lichenes epiphylli novi Geneve [H. Georg. ] (1890) p. 22. . Muller, Dr. Jean. Lichenes Africae tropico-orientalis.—Vlora, Lxxu., (1890) pp. 334 — 347. Muller, Dr. Jean. Lichenes Bellendenici a cl F. M. Bailey, Gov. Bot. ad Bellenden-Ker Australie orientalis lecti et sub numeris citatis missi.—//edwigia, (1891) Heft. 1, pp. 47 — 56. . Muller, Dr. Jean. Lichenes Brisbanenses, a cl. F. M. Bailey, Prope Brisbane Queensland in Australiae orientale lecti. Nuovo Giornale Botanico Italiano, Vol. xxut, No. 3, Guglio (1891) p. 385 — 404. . Muller, Dr. Jean. Lichenes exotici Herbarii Vindobonensis I. Lichenes in Aus- tralia et in ejus vicinitate lectii—Annalen des k. k. Hofmuseums, Wren., Bd. vi1., (1892) p. 302 - 305. . Muller, Dr. Jean. Lichenes exotici, 1. —111., 42 p.—Hedwzigia, (1892-5). . Muller, Dr. Jean. Tichenes Wilsoniani s. Lichenes a cl. Rev. F. R. M. Wilson in Australia Prov. Victoria.—ABulletin de l Herbier Boissier, Tome 1., pp. 33 — 65, (1893) Geneve. 7. Muller, Dr. Jean. Lichenes Australiae occidentalis a cl. Helms recenter lecti et a celeb. Bar. Ferd. v. Mueller comm:— Hedwigia, (1892) Heft 5, pp. 191 — 198, and also transcribed in Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Australia, Vol. xv1., (1893) pp. 142 —149. . Muller, Dr. Jean. Lecanoree et Lecidez Australienses novae.—#Bull. del’ Herb. Goiss., Tome 11, pp. 632 — 642 (1895). 129. Miiller, Dr. Jean. Pyrenocarpee Queenslandiz.—Aust. Assoc. Adv. Sct., pp. 449 — 466, (1895). BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AUSTRALIAN AND NEW ZEALAND LICHENS. 145 130. Muller, Dr. Jean. Sertum Austrahense (s. species novae Australienses Thelo- treme Graphidearum et Pyrenocarpearum),—Sull. de l’ Herb. Boiss., t. u1., No. 7, pp. 313 — 327 (1895). 13l. Shirley, J. Notes on Tasmanian Lichens.—Proc. Roy. Soc., Tas. (1893) p. 214. 132. Stizenberger, Dr. Hrnst. Die Griibchenflechten (Stictei) und ihre geographische Ver- breitung.—Flora, Bd. txxx1, Heft i, pp. 88 - 150 (1895). foe Eke, eA® NE. Lichenes exotici.i— Nouvelles Archives du Museum, Paris, Serie i, Tome 11., pp. 208 - 322 (1890); Serie ii., Tome ito ps loo, (leo): Sere mi.) Dome iv... pp. 103 — 210: (1892); Serie ii.. Tome x., pp. 218 — 280, (1898); Serie iv., Tome 1., pp. 27 - 210 | Plates i. - vi.] (1899); Serie ii., Tome 1., pp. 49 — 122, [Plates i. - vi.] (1900); Serie iv., Tome i11., pp. 21 — 196, [ Plates i. — vi.] (1901). 134. Zahlbruckner, Dr. A. von. Schedae ad Kryptogamae exsiccatae editae a Museo Palatino Vindobonensi, Decad. 4—6, No. 354; Decad. 16, 17, No. 570; Decad. 23, 24, No. 87; Decad. 25 - 28, No. 1045; Decad. 29-32, Nos. 1237, 1240, 1241, and published in Annalen Naturhistor. Hofmus, Wien., Band Mie (SIO) pols Bds xviii, (1903) pao10 2 Bde xa. (1904) p. 417. 135. Zahlbruckner, Dr. A. von. Lichenes rariores exsiccateae, Decad. 1., ii. (1902), ii, iv. (1903), v., vi. (1904), Vindobonae. 136. Zahlbruckner, Dr. A. von. Neue Flechten.—Annales Mycologici, Vol. 11., No. 3 (1904) p. 270. J—Dec. 5, 1906. 146 E. CHEEL. 137. Wainio, Edv. A. Monographia Cladoniarum universalis, Pars. 1., Acta Soc. pro Fauna et Flora Fennice iv., Helsingfors (1887) p. 509 ; Pars. i1., Bd. x., (1894) p. 498, et Pars. i: Bde xan (1897) p. 268. 138. Wainio, Edv. A. De subgenere Cladins.—Meddel. Soc. pro Fauna et Flora Fennica, Bd. xiv., (1888) pp. 31, 32. 139. Wainio, Edv. A. Clathrinae herbarii Miilleri.—Bull. de ? Herb. Boiss., Tome vi., (1898) p. 752. 140. Wainio, Edv. A. Reactiones Lichenum a J. Miillero-Argoviensis Descripto.— Memoires de ! Hert. Boiss., suite au Bull. del Herb. Boiss., No. 5 (1900) pp. 1 —7. 141. Maiden, J. H. A second contribution to the Flora of Mount Kosciusko.— Agric. Gaz. N.S. W., 1899, p. 29. 142. Cheel, Edwin. Director’s Report on the Botanic Gardens, Sydney, presented to the Legislative Assembly, N. 8. Wales, 1963-4, p. 7; 1904-5, p. 9; 1905-6. 143. Baker, R. T. Contribution to a knowledge of the Flora of Australia, No. iv.—Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S.W., Lichens, p. 544, (1902). 144. Bitter, G. Zur Morphologie und Systematik von Parmelia, Untergatung Hypogymnia.— [Tedwigia, Bd. xu., (1901) pp. 171 — 274. (Tab. x., x1. ] 145. Turner, F. A list of 37 species of Lichens principally from New England N.S.W.—Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. xxx., pp. 308 — 311, (1995), BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AUSTRALIAN AND NEW ZEALAND LICHENS. 147 NEW ZEALAND. 146. Hoffmann, Georg Francise. Plant Lichenose, 1790 — 1801. 147. Richard, A. Voyage de decouvertes de L’Astrolabe pendant les Annees 1826, 1827, 1828. De M. J. Dumont D’Urville, Paris, (1832). 148. Babington, Rev. Churchill. The Lichens of New Zealand in Dr. J. D. Hooker’s Flora of New Zealand (1835) and in separate work. 149. Cunningham, Allan Hooker’s Companion to the Botanical Magazine, Vol. 11, p. 232, (1836). 150. Dieffenbach, Ernest. Travels in New Zealand, Vol. 1.. (1843), Lichens, p. 422. 151. Taylor, Dr. Th. (See 41) 152. Raoul, E. Choix de plantes de la Nouv. Zélande (i846) pp. 33, 34. 153. Nylander, W. (See 98.) 154. Nylander, W. (See 97.) 155. Nylander, W. Circa Lichenes Crustaceon Novae Zelandiae in /lora (1865) pp. 337 — 340. 156. Nylander, W. Lichenes Novae Zelandiae, quos ibi legit anno 1861 Dr. Lauder Lindsay.—Journ. Linn. Soc. ( Bot.) Vol. 1x., pp. 244 — 259, (1865). 157. Nylander, W. Addenda quedam Lichenographiam Novae Zelandiae.— flora, pp. 438 — 440 (1867). 158. Nylander, W. Lichenes Novae Zelandiae, Paris (1888). 148 E. CHEEL. 159. Knight, Charles. On some New Zealand Verrucarieae.—TZrans. Linn. Soc., Vol. xxiiz, pp. 32, 100; (1860) Elsa) 160. Knight, Ch. and Mitten, W. Contributions to the Lichenographia of New Zealand.—Trans. Linn. Soc., Vol. xxu., pp. 101 - 106, (1860). 161. Knight, Charles. (See 44.) 162. Knight, Charles. Descriptions of some New Zealand Lichens. Tijoste and Proc. Vew Zeal. Inst., Vol. vi1., pp. 356, 357, (1874). 163. Knight, Charles. Notes on Stereocaulon Buchanani, Stirt.—7rans. and Proc. New Zeal. Inst., Vol. vit., p. 368, (1874). 164. Knight, Charles. Further contributions to the Lichen Flora of Nee Zealand.— Trans. and Proc. New Zeal. Inst., Vol. viu., pp. 313 — 328 (1875). 165. Knight, Charles. Contributions to the Lichenographia of New Zealand.—Trans. Linn. Soc., Vol. 1., Second series, pp. 275 — 283, (1877). [Table 37, 38.] 166. Knight, Charles. Lichenographia of New Zealand.—Trans. and Proc. New Zeal. Inst. Vol. x11., pp. 367 — 379, (1879). [Pls x1, x11] 167. Knight, Charles. Lichenographia of New Zealand.—Trans. and Proc. New Zeal. Inst., Vol. xv., pp. 346 - 358, (1882). 168. Knight, Charles. Lichenographia of New Zealand.—Trans. and Proc. New Zeal. Inst., Vol. xv1., pp. 400 — 408, (1883). 169. Knight, Charles. Descriptions of a new species of Thysanothecium, collected by Mr. Buchanan during his recent expedition to the Southern Alps.—Tyrans. and Proc. New Zeal. Inst., Vol. x11, p. 385, (1880) [Plate xvii. ] | BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AUSTRALIAN AND NEW ZEALAND LICHENS. 149 170. Massalonga, Dr. A. B. Sopra tre Licheni della Nuova Zelandia.— Bull. de la Societe Impériale des Naturalistes de Moscou, Vol. xxxi1., p. 254 (1863). | 171. Lindsay, Dr. Lauder. A list of 62 species of Lichens from Otago, New Zealand.— Trans. Bot. Soc. Edinburgh, Vol. vu11., p. 349; Journ, Bote WN Oly Wile. Papod 0: 172. Lindsay, Dr. Lauder. Observations on New Zealand Lichens and Fungi from Otago, Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, Vol. xxxiv., p. 407 — 456, (1866) | Plates xxix., xxx. ] 173. Lindsay, Dr. Lauder. Observations on New Zealand Lichens.—7rans. Linn. Soc., Vol. xxv., pd. 493 — 560, 1866, | Plates Ix. — lxiii.) 174. Leighton, Rev. W. A. Additions to the Lichens of New Zealand.—Journ. Linn. Soc. GB0te) Nol. xX: ps.30; (1801): 175. Leighton, Rev. W. A. (See 99.) 176. Hooker, J. D. Handbook of the Flora of New Zealand. Lichens, pp. 550 — 594, (1867). 177. Krempelhuber, Dr. A. von. Neue Beitrage zur Flechten Flora Neu Seelands.— Verhand. der k. k. zool.-bot. Gessellsch., in Wien, (1876), Tome xxv1., p. 441. 178. Krempelhuber, Dr. A. von. (See 6.) 179. Kirk, Thomas. On the Flora of the Auckland Isthmus.—T7rans. and Proc. New Zeal. Inst., Vol. 1v., pp. 235-6, (1871). 180. Stirton, J. Descriptions of some New Zealand Lichens, collected by J. Buchanan in the Province of Wellington.—Trans. and Proc. New Zeal. Inst., Vol. v1., pp. 235 — 241, (1873). 150 E. CHEEL. roi. Stirbon, Je Additions to the Lichen Flora of New Zealand.—Journ. Linn. Soc. (Bot.), Vol. x1v., pp. 458 — 474, (1874). 182. Stirton, J. | Description of a New Zealand Lichen (Stereocaulon Buchanani).—Trans. and Proc. New Zeal. Inst., Vol. vil., pp. 367 — 369, (1875). 183. Stirton, J. Additions to the Lichen Flora of New Zealand and Chatham Islands.—Philosophical Soc. of Glasgow, Jan. (1877); Grevillea, Vol. v., June (1877) p. 147. 184. Stirton, J. On Lichens from Newfoundland, from New Zealand, from the South of Scotland.—TZrans. and Proc. Bot. Soc., Edinburgh, Vol. xi1v., p. 3, (1882). 185. Stirton, J. (See 116.) 186. Stirton, J. (See 117.) 187. Buchanan, J. * Notes on the Flora in the Province of Wellington, New Zea- land.—T'rans. and Proc. New Zealand Inst., Vol. v1., Lichens, p. 231-2, (1873). 188. Colenso, W. On Baeomyces heteromorphos in New Zealand.—Trans. and Proc. New Zeal. Inst., Vol. xu., p. 368, (1880). 189. Miiller, Dr. Jean. F.M.L.S. [Argoviensis] (See 94.) 190. Muller, Dr. Jean. Lichenes Knightiani, in Nova Zelandia lecti additis nonnulis allis ejusdem regionis, quos exponit.—Compte rendu, Societe royale de botanique de Belgique, Tome xxx1., (1892) p. 22 — 42. 191. Muller, Dr. Jean. Conspectus Systematicus Lichenum Novae Zealandiae.— Bull. del’ Herbier Bowssier, Tome i1., pp. 2-16. Appendix No. 1, Jan. (1894). BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AUSTRALIAN AND NEW ZEALAND LICHENS. 15] 192. Muller, Dr. Jean. Conspectus Systematicus Specierum Lichenum Novae Ze- landiae.— Bull. de ? Herbier Boissier, Tome 11., pp. 17 — 114, (1894' 193. Miller, Dr. Jean. Lichenes Colensoani, a Reverndis’s Colensoin Nova Zelandia. Journ. Linn. Soc. ( Bot. ), Vol. Xxxi1., pp. 197 — 208(1895). 194. Stizenberger, Dr. Ernst. Neuseelandische Lichenen in allgemeinen zuginglichen Exsic- catenwerken.— Flora, Bd. txx11., (1899) pp. 366, 367. 195. Stizenberger, Dr. Ernst. (See 132.) 196. Hue, A. M. (See 133.) 197. Hellbom, P. J. Lichenaea Neo-Zeelandica seu Lichenes Novae Zeelandiae a Sv. Berggren annis 1874-1875 collecti additis ceteris specibus indidem hue usque cognitis, breviter commem- oratis.—Brhang k. svenska Vet. Acad. Handling, Bd. xx1., Afd. i., No. 18, Steckholm, (1896) p. 150. 198. Wainio, Hdv. A. (See 137.) 199. Wainio, Edv. A. (See 138.) 200. Wainio, Hdv. A. (See 139.) 201, Wainio, Edv. A. (See 140.) 202. Cheel, Edwin. (See 17 and 142.) 203. Cheel, Kdwin. A list of 22 species of New Zealand Lichens.—Proc. Linn. Soc. V.S.W., Vol. xvu., pp, 371-2, (1902). 204. Bitter, G. (See 144.) v SouTH SEA ISLANDS. 205. Forster, George. Florulae Insularum Australium Prodromus. Gottingen (1786) Lichens, p. 93. ayy} E. CHEEL. CHATHAM ISLAND. 206. Krempelhuber, Dr. A. (See 6, p. 336.) 207. Stirton, J. (See 183). CAMPBELL ISLAND. 208. Nylander, W. Lichenes raportes de l ile Campbell, par M. Filhol.—Comptes rendus hebdomadaires des seances de l académie des sciences, Tome Lxxx111., No. 1, (3 Juli, 1876). FIJI. 209. Crombie, Rev. J. M. Seeman’s Flora Vitiensis. Lichens, pp. 419 —421, (1865 — 1873). 210. Zahlbruckner, Dr. A. von. (See 12, pp. 189 et 190.) 211. Muller, Dr. Jean. (See 14, p. 79.) TONGA. 212. Zahlbruckner, Dr. A. von. (See 12, p. 190-1.) NEW HEBRIDES. 213. Miiller, Dr. Jean. (See 13, p. 92.) 214. Miiller, Dr. Jean. (See 14, p. 79.) SAMOA. 215. Muller, Dr. Jean. Lichenes apud F. Reinecke: Die Flora der Samoa-Inseln. Engler’s Jahrbucher, Vol. xxu1., pp. 291 — 299, (1896). 216. Zahlbruckner, Dr. A. von. Schedae ad Kryptogamae exsiccatae editae a Museo Palatino Vindobonae. Decas: 31 — 32, Nos. 1240 et 1241 (1906). NEW CALEDONIA. 217. Nylander, W. Expositionis Lichenum Novae Caledoniae, (1861). 218. Nylander, W. Prodromus expositionis Lichenum Novae Caledoniae. BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AUSTRALIAN AND NEW ZEALAND LICHENS. 153 219. Nylander, W. Synopsis Lichenum Novae Caledoniae, pp. 1 — 101, (1868). 220. Muller, Dr. Jean. Enumeration de quelques de lichens de Nouméa.— Revue Mycologique (1887) Vol. 1x, pp. 77 — 82. 221. Muller, Dr. Jean. Lichenes Neo-Caledonici (a cl. B. Balansa in Nova Caledoniae. Journal de Botanique (1893) Tome vi, pp. 51-55; 92 —94; 106-111. 222. Zahlbruckner, Dr. A. von. Schedae ad Kryptogamae exsiccatae, Decad. 10 - 12, No. 354. —dAnnal. des k. k. Naturhist. Hofmuseums, Bd. x111., Heft 4 (1899) p. 461. 223. Stizenberger, Dr. Ernst. (See 132.) 224. Hue, A. M. (See 133.) NEW GUINEA. 225. Muller, Dr. Jean. Lich. Beit., No. 653.—VPlora (1883) ; and No. 1319 in Flora, (1888). LORD HOo:vVE ISLAND. 226. Krempelhuber, Dr. A. von. (See 6, p. 333.) 227. Muller, Dr. Jean. Lich. Beit. No. 405.—Flora, (1882). 228. Miiller, Dr. Jean. (See 119.) 229. Zahlbruckner, Dr. A. von. (See 12, pp. 180 —190, 192, 193, 195.) NORFOLK ISLAND. 230. Endlicher, S. Prodromus Florae Norfolkicae, sive Catalogus Stirpium quae Insula Norfolk Annis 1804 et 1805 a Ferdinando Bauer collectae et depictae. Vienna (1833). 154 E. CHEEL. 231. Heward, R. Biographical sketch of the late Allan Cunningham, Esq. Hooker’s London Journal of Botany, Vol. 1., p. 121(1842). 232. Krempelhuber, Dr. A. von. (See 6, p. 338.) 233. Miiller, Dr. Jean. Lich. Beit , Nos. 397, 558, 562, 805, 1065, 1167, 1234, 1236. — Flora, (1882 — 1888). 234. Cheel, Edwin. J. H. Maiden’s Flora of Norfolk Island.—Proe. Zinn. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. xxviit, pp. 741 - 744, (1903). ANALYSES oF CHOCOLATE SHALE anp or TUFACH- OUS SANDSTONE FrRoM THE NARRABEEN SERIES. By 8. G. WALTON, Junior Demonstrator, University of Sydney. With a Petrological Description by R. S. BONNEY, B.A. (Communicated by Professor LIVERSIDGE, F.R.S.) [Read before the Royal Society of N. S. Wales, December 5, 1906.] THE following analyses were made in the Chemical Labor- atory of the University of Sydney, at the request of Prof. Liversidge, in connection with an investigation upon the distribution of gold in small quantities in rocks and natural waters. The weathered chocolate shale from Long Reef, near Manly was selected for examination because it showed stains of copper. The specimens were kindly supplied by Prof. David, F.R.s. The Tufaceous Sandstone from Rose Bay was obtained from a bore at a depth of 1900 feet, and the Chocolate Shale from Long Reef near Manly. ANALYSES OF CHOCOLATE SHALE AND TUFACEOUS SANDSTONE. 155 Sandstone. SiO, 61°65 Al,O, 13°29 Fe,0, 2°94 FeO 6°44 Cr,0, 0°13 MnO 0°60 NiO trace CaO .». absent CuO a aes 0°01 PbO A ao ... absent ZnO ... absent MgO 3°44 BaO 0°08 CaO 1°64 Na,O 2°44 K,O an aa 0°66 H,O — (at 110° C.) 1°30 H;O + (above 110°C.).... 4°02 CO; 0°90 TiO, 0°97 ZrO. 0°01 ee OE 0°05 SO, 0°03 Cl. 0°01 1 cere wats ee ... absent S (FeS,) 0°04 S = FeS, 0°07 SrO .. absent Ei,O .. absent Sum .- 100°68 Less O for Cl Specific gravity... 2°693 Shale. 38°98 28°00 14°39 0°98 0°06 0°04 0°01 ... absent O11 ... absent ... absent 0°36 trace 0°15 0°08 0°18 3°60 10°38 0°22 2°05 0°01 0°06 0°01 SONS .. absent 0°09 .. absent .. absent 99598 0°04 0°05 S = FeS, Sum... .. 99°87 2°685 156 S. G. WALTON. The methods followed and quantities of reagents used were those detailed by Hillebrandt and Washington. Hach estimation was made in duplicate, and only the purest of reagents were used, which were all tested, and where necessary, aS in the case of calcium carbonate, specially purified. I regret being unable, through want of time, to estimate the amount of vanadium present. Iam indebted to Mr. R. S. Bonney, B.A., of the Geological Laboratory, Sydney University, for the following descriptions of the specimens : Tufaceous Sandstone.—This rock belongs to the Narra- been beds, and is a green tufaceous sandstone containing small rounded pebbles of green and redchert. As seen in this section the fragments composing the rock are rounded and subangular in outline. The chief constituents are:—1. Subangular fragments of quartz and felspar. 2. Fragments of decomposed igneous rocks, some grains of which contain numerous small felspar laths. There is one small grain of micrographic granite in the slide that was prepared. 3. A green chlorite decomposition product occurring plentifully throughout the slide. It appears partly in the form of grains, mostly rounded; partly asa very narrow border due to secondary decomposition, (not marginal decomposition) round all the other fragments, quartz included; and occasionally as an interstitial infilling. This mineral is very common in the Narrabeen rocks, but never occurs in the Hawkesbury Sandstones. 4. Small round grains and pebbles of green and red chert. Bands of coloured chert pebbles are of very common occurrence in the lower half of the Narra- been rocks. The thin section reveals a great variety of constituents, but most of them are included in the above four classes. Siderite, which is usually plentiful in the Narrabeen rocks, is not present in this slide. Bite gens - ANALYSES OF CHOCOLATE SHALE AND TUFACEOUS SANDSTONE. 157 Chocolate Shale.—This is a fragment of chocolate shale and was obtained from Long Reef near Manly, where the chocolate shales outcrop on the sea shore. It is a dark reddish-brown ferruginous looking specimen of fine muddy shale. It displays a slight shaly cleavage but easily crumbles to pieces in all directions. Beyond this no definite structure is visible in the hand specimen. There are a few small greenish spots stained with copper. This specimen is very much weathered, and accordingly differs in appearance from the perfectly fresh chocolate shale, such as that obtained from the Balmain Coal Mine in the course of shaft sinking. It is probable that there is a corresponding difference in the composition, so that an analysis of the unweathered shale would, in all likelihood, differ materially from the present one. The unweathered shale is a clean rich chocolate coloured shale, composed of very fine impalpable material. It possesses a very indifferent shaly cleavage, and for the most part crumbles to pieces on exposure to the air. A transparent section of the fresh shale when seen under the microscope generally reveals a number of small concre- tionary blebs of siderite scattered through the fine, reddish- brown, homogeneous ground mass; these small concretions often exhibit a radial structure, and may be present in great numbers or be almost absent. Hence in rock that has not been weathered and oxidised, the proportion of carbon dioxide would probably be greater. 158 S. G. LUSBY AND T. EWING. THE RATE or DECAY oF THE EXCITED RADIO- ACTIVITY FROM THE ATMOSPHERE 1n SYDNEY. By 8S. G. LusBy, B.A. and T. EWING, B.Sc. (Communicated by Prof. POLLOCK.) [Read before the Royal Society of N. S. Wales, December 5, 1906. ] IN connection with an investigation, still in progress, it was considered necessary to find the rate of decay of the excited radioactivity from the atmosphere in Sydney. Although the work consisted merely of a repetition of an experiment of Allan,’ following work of Rutherford,’ Elster and Geitel,’ and Rutherford and Allan,* the result may be of some interest as no determination of the constant made in Australia has, so far as we know, been published. The facts are here separately recorded as the main research is no longer directly concerned with the matter. A copper wire, ten metres in length was suspended vertically in the tower of the Physical Laboratory of the University; it was kept negatively charged by a Wimshurst machine, the potential being about 25,000 volts. After about three hours exposure, the wire was removed and rubbed with cotton wool moistened with ammonia. The cotton wool was then incinerated in a platinum crucible and the ashes tested for radioactivity in the usual way. A Dolezalek electrometer was used and the whole of the apparatus screened from outside electrostatic influence. The observations were commenced about 15 minutes after the wire was discharged, the activities being measured in terms of scale divisions per second. 1 Phil. Mag., Feb. 1904. % Phil. Mag., Feb. 1900, * Phys. Zeit., iii. and x],,1901. * Phil. Mag., Dec. 1902. RATE OF DECAY OF THE EXCITED RADIOACTIVITY. 159 Be ay Ae ie A ae ee ey ae SaaS Ree eine RP Bee SSSA eae SHA ae ae eae. Po ee ee He ie Be ee et eh ee ae are ae ee 3 Fig. L—RATE OF DECAY OF THE RADIO-ACTIVITY FROM THE ATMOSPHERE IN SYDNEY. 10 “Kpanoy Sen he 160 S. G. LUSBY AND T. EWING. To exhibit the results the common logarithms of the activities have been plotted against time in figure 1. fie each case a straight line best fits the points, showing that the rate of decay, for the interval of time during which observations were made, follows an exponential law. The results of four experiments are shewn, the times for the activity to fall to half value being as follows :— 1. December 16th,1905... 40°7 minutes 2.. December (4th, 1905". “Alaa ee >. December 20th, 1905.2... 3915. 4, December 18th, 1905... 419 ,, For comparison, values given by Rutherford and Allan! for a lead wire exposed in an attic in Montreal, are plotted on the same diagram ; in this case the time for the activity to fall to half value seems to be 41°7 minutes rather than 45 minutes as stated in the paper quoted. All these estimates of the time for the activity to fall to half value agree very Closely with those given by Bumstead in a paper in the American Journal of Science for July 1904, where the question of atmospheric radioactivity is discussed at length. 1 Phil. Mag., Dec. 1902. GOLD NUGGETS FROM NEW GUINEA. 161 GOLD NUGGETS FRoM NEW GUINEA SHOWING A CONCENTRIC STRUCTURE. By A. LIVERSIDGE, LL.D., F.R.S., Professor of Chemistry in the University of Sydney. [With Plates XII., XIII. ] [Read before the Royal Society of N. 8S. Wales, December 5, 1906. | THE two small nuggets referred to in this note were received from New Guinea; they show the usual water- worn appearance externally. The assays made at the Royal Mint, Sydney, gave for No. 1 nugget weighing °90 oz. gold 8895, and silver 100 parts. No. 2 nugget weighing °86 oz. gave gold 8825 and silver 105 parts. When sliced, polished and etched with aqua regia, small enclosures of haematite and quartz, also cracks and cavities, become visible, but the usual macro-crystalline structure of gold is absent. Parts, however, near the edges possess a clearly marked concentric structure. As stated in the first paper upon this subject,’ this is the structure I then thought might be found; but out of the large number of nuggets examined for several years past, these two are the only ones in which | have been able to detect any indication of a concentric structure. Hence these nuggets are so far unique. It will be noticed that the section shows indentations which look like foldings or involutions. I do not think, however, that these are due to portions of the nuggets having been bent over, driven in, or welded on by impact; but it looks as if the gold, especially where it shows this 1 See this Journal, Vol. xxvir., 1893, and Chemical News, 1894. K—Dec. 5, 1906. 162 A. LIVERSIDGE, - concentric structure, might have been deposited either upon a nucleus of, or upon the interior walls of a cavity, in the same way that agates have been formed by the depo- sition of silica and chalcedony. Wrom the way in which the contour lines at a and Db run parallel with the sharp angle at ¢ (Plate 12) and then suddenly flatten out to the left, renders it [ think, unlikely that the nugget was built up about a nucleus, but it is easy to understand that the layers may have followed the irregularities of a cavity. The more central parts do not show any lines of deposition. It is also noticeable that these two nuggets do not in any part show any undoubted crystalline structure; when examined under the higher powers, (in Plate 13 the enlarge- ment is 50 diameters) they, on the contrary, present a somewhat spongy or cellular appearance, although the portions which look like cavities are really solid; the gold in these parts may have been deposited in a spongy or cellular form, and the interstitial spaces afterwards filled in. The photographs are taken from the smaller nugget, the larger one shows the concentric structure much less well marked and is hardly traceable. ANALYSES OF ROMAN GLASS FROM SILCHESTER. 163 ANALYSES oF ROMAN GLASS From SILCHESTER, WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO THE AMOUNT OF MANGANESE AND IRON PRESENT. By C. J. WHITE, Caird Scholar, University of Sydney. (Communicated by Professor LIVERSIDGE, F.R.S.) [Read before the Royal Society of N. S. Wales, December 5, 1906.] [Introduction.—The following analyses of Roman glass have been made under my direction by Mr. O. J. White, Caird Scholar, in the Ohemicai Laboratory of the University of Sydney, mainly with the object of ascertaining if possible whether manganese peroxide had been purposely used in its preparation, and partly because the amount of manganese © in Roman glass is not given in the analyses contained in the principal books of reference. The material consisted of about 8 ounces of fragments of Roman glass found in 1896, during the excavations on the site of the Roman city at Silchester) between Basingstoke and Reading, Hampshire, England), which I had obtained for the purpose of examination from Mr. W. H. St. John Hope, the Assistant Secretary of the Society of Antiquaries. The fragments consisted mainly, if not entirely, of portions of bottles. The glass for the most part is of a dull greenish colour, somewhat blebby, and most of it shows the usual iridescent scale due to superficial decomposition. The hardness of undecomposed surfaces was found to be slightly greater than that of ordinary Hnglish window glass, that is, some of this Roman glass will just scratch window glass, but the difference in hardness is not very great, nor is it a matter of much importance. The presence of manganese is of interest, because pyro- lusite may have been added to counteract the green colour 164 C. J. WHITE. due to the presence of ferrous silicate, i.e., to whiten the glass; the name pyrolusite is given to the black oxide of Manganese on account of this property, and the French call it ‘‘Savon des verriers’’ for the same reason; it has been employed for this purpose from the earliest times, and its use is mentioned by Pliny. The manganese peroxide acts partly by oxidising ferrous silicate to ferric silicate, which possesses much less tinctorial power than the former, and partly by the amethyst colour of the manganese silicate (which is complementary in tint) neutralizing the green. The presence of manganese in glass can often be seen by the amethyst tint which window glass acquires when exposed to the sun’s rays, and it is also seen in fragments of tumblers and other ware made of flint glass, which have been thrown out and left exposed to the sun. This change in colour is due to the green ferrous silicate having been converted into the reddish ferric silicate; the amethyst colour of the manganese silicate is then no longer neutra- lized, and accordingly the glass shows a more or less deep purple tint. Average Sample.—The first analysis was made upon some fragments of the mixed glass, without any selection accord- ing to colour; a fair amount of manganese was found to be present.—(See analysis A.) It was next thought desirable to analyse samples of the almost colourless, and of the deeper green coloured fragments, to ascertain whether the Manganese has been added in the former in sufficient quantity to whiten the glass, or whether it had been made from purer materials. Colourless glass.—Some of this was in fairly flat pieces, like window glass, and had a dull surface somewhat resembling that of ground glass; other portions were frag- ments of vases or bottles. Although here termed colourless for distinction, it shows a pale green tint when viewed ANALYSES OF ROMAN GLASS FROM SILCHESTER. 165 sideways. This glass contains less iron than the above, the amount of manganese is correspondingly small; the materials were probably specially selected.—(See analysis B.) Green glass.—Fragments were picked out showing a fairly deep bluish-green tint; they contained many blebs and consisted apparently of pieces of the necks, handles, and bottoms of bottles or vases.—(See analysis C.) From these three analyses it is impossible to say definitely whether manganese was purposely added or not, it probably was, but it may have been naturally present in the materials used. The question requires further investigation.—A. LIVERSIDGE. | Method of Procedure.—In the general analysis the methods of Washington’ and Hillebrand’ for a naturally occurring silicate were adopted in the main. The more important features may be briefly indicated. Specific Gravity.—The specific gravity of two fragments of Specimen A, was found by a Jolly balance, the results being 2°49 and 2°50 respectively. Check determinations by the ordinary balance gave 2°493 and 2°499. Total Water.—For this determination Penfield’s’ method was employed. It consists essentially in igniting the powdered substance in a narrow glass tube closed at one end—condensing the moisture on the cooler part of the tube—drawing off this portion and weighing it, with and without the moisture. The results obtained were very consistent (the greatest difference being °02% in a series of four) and the many possible sources of error of the old ‘loss on ignition ’ method seem to be avoided. * Washington—Manual of Chem. Anal. of Rocks, 1906. ? Hillebrand—‘Some Principles and Methods of Rock Analyses,” Bull. U.S. Geolog. Sur., 176, 1900. * S. L. Penfield—Amer. Journ. Sci., xivirr., p. 31, 1894. 166 C. J. WHITE. Silica.—In place of a single evaporation followed by heating to 120° the double evaporation recommended by Hillebrand was employed, the second was found to account for about ‘2% silica. The purity was tested by hydrofluoric acid and the smalJl quantity of Fe etc. carried down was treated in the usual way. Ferrous Iron— Here the method devised by Cooke’ was employed, i.e., the finely powdered substance was heated with HF and H.SO; on a water bath and in an atmosphere of carbon dioxide, then cooled and titrated with potassium permanganate. Manganese.—The presence of manganese was indicated by the colour of the mass after fusion, but owing to the delicacy of this test and also to the fact that sulphuretted hydrogen failed to bring down any precipitate in 20 minutes (volume of solution = 500 cc.) manganese was thought to be present only as a trace. Consequently in the first analysis (rejected) its estimation was neglected. However the discolouration of lime combined with a shortage of °5% in the total, caused special precautions to be taken in the two succeeding analyses. Of all the methods tried for the irou Manganese separation the most satisfactory was the ordinary one by ammonia (three precipitations). The manganese was precipitated by evaporating the solution to less than 200 cc., passing sulphuretted hydrogen and then allowing to stand ina corked flask over night; it was eventu- ally weighed as Mn,O,. The presence of alumina with such small quantities of iron and manganese seemed to vitiate the basic acetate method and the barium carbonate method of Treadwell* was found to be cumbersome. A colorimetric method recently proposed* was found to give ’ Hillebrand, p. 52. * Treadwell (Hall)—Quantitative Analysis, p. 121. * J. G. Cooke—Amer. Journ. Sci., (2) xLIv., p. 347, 1867. * Nazareno Tarugi—Gazzetta, 1906, p. 332. Abstract in Journ. Chem, Soc., 1906, p. 631. ANALYSES OF ROMAN GLASS FROM SILCHESTER. Tn very fair results and is specially applicable to samples in which the manganese percentage is very low. The Alkalies were determined by the Lawrence Smith method,’ i.e., by converting to chlorides by heating with calcium carbonate and ammonium chloride and then sepa- rating the two alkali chlorides with hydroplatinie acid. The remaining constituents, were determined by the ordinary methods and call for no special comment. SUMMARY OF ANALYSES. I. II. Mean Hygroscopic H.O ... °40 °42 °41 *Combined H.O ... °00 00 °00 SiO. ace O9SSS 69°67 69°76 AleOs. 3.6 2) 1:89 1°94 1°92 "FeO so a1 ia 74 Fe;,O3 ... 16 18 vals Min@ ec 20 61 °65 CaO cover eh OO 7°08 7°08 MgO case Ile 1°07 1°09 Na,O ... 17°34 WI 17°53 2K,O aa 39 38 D9 Totals wis w. 99°84 100°04 99°94 1 Penfield’s method. *% Cooke’s method. * Lawrence Smith’s method. Since the specimen (A) had a greenish tinge, due to iron, the obvious inference was that if manganese had been added purposely as a decolouriser then not quite enough had been used. In the nearly colourless variety (B), it was ex- pected that the manganese had neutralised the effect of the iron and therefore that the ratio of manganese to iron would be greater than in (A). In the bluish-green variety (C), similarly a large excess of iron was expected. The analyses ‘J. L. Smith—Am. Journ. Sci., 1., p. 269, 1871. 168 C. J. WHITE. did not bear out these surmises, in fact the nearly colour- less glass (B) was found to have relatively slightly less manganese than either A or C. Still it is quite possible for one and the same quantity of iron to require different quantities of manganese to decolourise it (according to the state of oxidation of the two in the raw materials and the conditions of fusing) since the action of pyrolusite depends on two factors—(1) its oxidising action, (2) its power of forming a silicate complementary in colour to that of iron silicate. Also specimen B was of much finer quality than Cand hence it is probable that pains would be taken to secure such conditions in fusing as would be most con- ducive in producing a colourless glass. In commoner varieties, where colour is no object, it is not likely that such trouble would be taken, and it is possible for a specimen of glass to contain quite a large percentage of manganese and yet retain a green colour due to ferrous silicate if a reducing atmosphere is maintained throughout the fusing process. Also it is rather hard to see how manganese could be present as a mere impurity to the extent of ‘5 to 1°5*. According to Pliny the Romans employed sand and Hgyptian soda (from sea weeds) in glass making; the latter would account for the presence of iron and calcium as wellas the preponderance of soda over potash, but not for the man- ganese, and one would scarcely expect to find 1% of man- ganese in sand. However, there is not sufficient informa- tion available to definitely prove or disprove that manganese was purposely added, the question therefore remains an open one. Complete analyses of B and C were not made, iron and manganese only were estimated, these were obtained in solution by treating with hydrofluoric acid and then evaporating down with sulphuric acid. ANALYSES OF ROMAN GLASS FROM SILCHESTER. 169 The results obtained were :— (A) Mixed sample. f 2, 3 4 Mean [Colorimetric FeO [°86| "93 "93 “92 "93° methods MnO ‘70 [61] ‘72 ‘69 ‘70% 67% (B) Colourless glass meo 72 738° 70° 192% Mm ae | 5 "53 Bi "51% "48% (C) Dark bluish-green HEO- dc3d 1-26 1°30 . ... ~1-29% MnO 1°39 1°34 =—6.11°40 ee 1°38% 1°28%| From the foregoing analyses it is evident that the Silchester glass (A) does not differ materially in composition from a modern English crown glass, and more nearly still approximates that ofa Roman bottle analysed by Benrath; it is however very different from a modern bottle glass. For the sake of comparison some analyses of glasses of similar composition to this Silchester,' are appended :— Old Roman English A B C Egyptian bottle window H.O °41 SiOz GEO Geo Soo esa) KOS eral Al,O 1°92 : Or Or saat 1119 ae ion Fe,Os; “I 74 Alea’) 39 1°24 MnO 65 CaO DAO SIPs sack) tee. O17 8°38 13°38 MgO 1°09 INarO SF lio3 oa hae: 208d TL 13225 KO "D9 Totals 99°94 100°08 99°70 99°26 1 Analyses by Benrath, quoted by Roscoe and Schorlemmer, Metals, p. 473. C. J. WHITE. gestions and bingy SRosiradoneme as well : as. for th of his interesting specimens. ae Journal Royal Society of N. S.W., Vol. XL., 1906. Plate I. TEST-PIECES TREATED ON THE SAND-BLAST APPARATUS. During 2 minutes under 45 Ibs. per square inch steam pressure. Artificial Stone. Blast-furnace Slag. Plate IT, N.S.W., Vol. XL., 1906. ty of vé Journal Royal Soc ‘OUT A OATIEN jo £6 J9qu 33 ‘soyoul ‘T Si & =, Plate ITT, Fig. 3. Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. XL., 1906. Sections of Native Vine ‘« Tubers.”’ Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. XL., 1906. Plate LV. Melaleuca thymifolia, Sm. Trans. sect, fol. X 50. Plate V. Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. XL., 1906. ts eS SS Melaleuca linariifolia, Sm. Trans. sect. fol. X 70. Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. XL., 1906. Plate Melaleuca linariifolia, Sm. Trans. sect. fol. X 70. VI. Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. XL., 1906. Plate VII, Fie xX] Melaleuca thymifolia, Sm. X LOO en , : RS << Pan x So r - Plate VITT. dil £ S pee BS ‘ * F; * te eee a 2 fF be cd ths fey 8 SU TOQWA » fe fr TE tp fe. Fe 5 ie pet ee 2 é ee ok eer td: EE Steg Pag ae ¢ :$ Lr Oa eas E Zz y & e ¥ . 3 we Journal Royal Society of NS.W., Vol. XL., 1906. Plate VIII. ge oe 8 3 “ [Pile Stabtn) BAY 22 SN -—= iN = ae FE cst ay. re ti we hy aad HF AL, Lien Ge Siz SN : | | Plate VIIT a. _AQuter North Head a | Journal Royal Society of N. S.W., Vol. XL., 1906. Plate VIII a. a SYDNEY HARBOUR. SCALE i} d j NORTH Hise yy MIDDLE Lights_F. Fied, Fl. Flashing, Oce Occulting, Rev. Revolvarg, Ele Electric ‘7 HARBOUR HARBOUR a Y, A 1893 y HUNTERS Outer North Head ; Emer South Head Manns PY BAY HARBOUR fo watson /SThe Gap, { z . ULL NEUTRAL ‘ SNAILS B ed BSuynal StafF "AOuter South Head (Semaphore Rev. Ele. Lmin BAY Journal Royal Society of N.S. W., Vol. XL., 1906. Plate IX. ine. A is Ironbark, B and C 'T'urpent iameter of Cobra holes compared with local ° 5] service and show large d iles taken from an old wharf after 25 years’ Nos. 11 are portions of timber from a Northern River, experience. A, Band C—Sections of p Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. XL , 1906. Plate X. WMD Bde Longitudinal Sections of two Piles showing ravages of Limnoria and Sphaeroma. The right hand side of No. 6 is the work of the Limnoria; the remainder Sphaeroma. There are very few Cobra holes. wt Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. XL., 1906. Plate XT. imnoria. End grain of an Oregon log showing characteristic work of the L — 4 mete - ro Journal Royal Society of N. S.W., Vol. XL., 1906. Plate XII. GOLD NUCGET, NEW GUINEA. Enlarged 83 diameters. Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. XL., 1906. Plate XTTT. GOLD NUGGET, NEW GUINEA Enlarged 19 diameters. om * Plate XTV. Journal Royal Soctety of N.S.W., Vol. XL., 1906. yoory) dey 6 ( uvIluoAeqd) speq einsur'y{ “7 oS “ Plate XV. Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. XL , 1906. ‘syaeuy dey pue Ssurds uonmounr ‘(aelun[IS) suojJseuIy un,Aydopuy RAS SSO A NN \ \N \ — Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. XL., 1906. Plate XVI. Specimen of interbedded Cherts and Tuffs (Intrusive Tuffs ?) from Gap Creek. The darker portions are the Chert bands. (Half Natural Size.) Plate XVII. Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. XL., 1906. QQ IW GGW@v (ezIg [emyeN) ‘yaoin AYeO Wo ‘Sunjney sinjyerurm Suimous syny sipoAuYy pepueg peutess-9uly ty 4 ee Plate XVIII. Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. XL., 1906. eR , (o¥%'snaquoug) Sa a )‘spod a a ae ee acer oe a, Gasoatsonedy | eles Te Sonugolla. (8 srswusated Sirens OOb *sj@uog osje Suruequos wou OSE ‘gfeucg osje Buiulequod ——————— SUNJSIWIT [EPloul4ay auojsawiy jepiouluy ——_— noe Ob : “sajeys PeYy { » « gol sejeus £ SjJjNL FSajleyS —— 2 ee aay oe S33 woe SJJNL paiiqeags ff a aa SSeS a 80) pauieds aug [oie — Cc — S ou OSE xo 2g 'Saqishjey yan SS TU m2) ' = n°) 0 Sp 3 02 QUO ASaWI] aul|je4o7 ———— 3 we nD spueg uly yqin —- Ses ee * W oe Se]eYS U9949 3 See ah A wn SS PO ’ : Cc = ee ell ee "™ QOGE —‘“Sayeys usaa9 J 8 OS — sasnn pauread ory --- e eg |e ) ®) JJNf poureuZs- —— 5 , on 3 -9uly jo spueq = - ” we i 2» “" « oEg uly) }ZUOISeI90 = uo oe S4jny 3° spueq ug 0 4am Sa|eus usad9 wo 3sSs JEUCISEDIO YIM woe Sl2 soajeus used) " ras et ae ars ea re ere a2 phyy ne sBEseu ale), gi "7999 “490 NA Sa 5 | ae i “ ges ~wsajeys AQuays uasdsd |. 2c) F) Giz 44 aqyjoAuy ae . oe 28 SjjOL ped Rae : c Jo spueq yim S4yN} pay : wen ee. pp vorgauny Jenqay ==) Ls. eg SS GL au Tenis BGO" uo R = DIDY AQ SOJUODUN [JEWS B/G lQOSd “SSauyIIYL “9€] 01 Gz oN SNOLLYOd ONG Ae sorereucieuen as g cee ee a oan. fe) sauoyspuess ajeys pay || — yaa¥9 AMO pelle (Poe that oc = 5 A SHPOTUERELI IC! aoe Buoje ‘wees ~~? eaieug poy Ale 5 sajevawojsu09 = VAVELS 4° NOISSAIINS =—sssauyoiys SSMS) ysnouy waaay) AXVO “" poe S9|EYS o puoje : © VIVYULS 40 NOISS3INNG aqeuawojauog jo pueg uly f |" (e) “© ggg wm sauogspues pay 5 @AISSEW 5 om Ssaqisores' ejaudauAyy 5 “" OBI uajiuids ejndw yam S Sau qSPUES *Sajeys souoqgspue 4994 28e rue S seaqizqueny “ssauyolyy) ae ‘SM33u9 ONINdS FdV9 Buoje for*snaquodg)*saqiqojiat VLVULS 4° NOISSIIING Plate XTX. Datum Line 2300 Ft. above sea evel (approx). 4 ee SHALES paula bed orizon Massive SANDSTONE Red J 1 Royal Societ N.S.W., Vol. XL., 1906. ournal Royal Society of 0 1906 Plate XLX. Section online AtoB. See map. t Wenkical 200 adofeet. PALO SY, Mopgnts! 9s ipchains. Vertical Gap yn = CREEK Apetce <=" ws Ne: pb gat B + Junction of Silurian by y | &@Devonian strata oo SPRING CREEK Datum Line 2300 ft. abave sea level (eppnax) AO NY SI SAE ' SHALES. Yellow. Red « Green Claystones) \\ Probably ~Claystones » Tuffs nh Mainly Claystones » Tuffs with occasional thin beds of ruts. \ \ NY ‘aN disjunceo No outerop~2 visible SS outcrops few -very decomposed Ss 5 WY SA ass here Reo ie eee, SO are : ArelelfaceaUctelmati ce Rontes suns SHALES GAnoSTONE fs eo Limestone Bed Limestone Bed contain numerous rounded Sandstone. A fragments oF Limestone Limestone Bed Limestone Bed D Cc B & Rhyolite These limestone beds along the line of section are hidden by soi and recent alluvium, they outcrop on the northern bank of Spring Creek The dips shown are only apprarimate. ‘ci. ae a 1% ut é fd Ny . ~ e ry nk SE ORES as ne) ee _ =. é ps 1 ' 3 iat Us. Sic ss dala ori PIRES SP cam tae Sy ENP? ie as Nader asin ‘hott oo osu ~~ v , >. ; 3 ‘ atk, ering nin BBs A * x » ape Nver ee: oe iz i 2 Fj ; a 2 - \ fo ae eae oa Peat ob : i ¥ i J = = f 4 Bae a ee ei gvnyyterse eenetetaren i me | t Fi ; 4 ? Ai 2 i c { ? i K .y ‘ ee eee ane i ; H Rory fatipt ileal oowremme fr emmenciinwa id Ty ew Ee Shih een seen aie ie ; " Ke Bee a ae | ° t - i i 4 } ; mo b C Petviesnneyrinrh prem cate wie! sretansereygpeninea sucer ves mas etal apeoresicipnetcassindaddhseddnclapahsvdiew disor dbiheniaic ug! — 3 — ¥ Writ a flr detcedauihien bie canccatanielates MRK Ae dedi ess eedoks sagt s Ci SE ARIA 5 Pj , Ss aaeteithen tat oie ie eee ont Ree ee ad LY j : . ! Fy ° ; 2 nd ie SAN 95 ditlhomnacotiond tes Pm Ae hag etm et prcmmey 4 ror) t a f PAREN Rae TENOR PEE AONE AVR YE eth ow bey Ae anid frames ath ae), \ ‘su SRNR RRB henner ate ee teat ~ cep Sp ti Oe a A eae ap rt A Be yp Nee dey . Bae a A ete ae AR cw ey ace pei hesic nail Ril ROR Mes Soma " PD ree er bee Nall egg te wren BE ee ey HP 1: a | al Royal Sociely of N.S.W. Vol.XL 1906. Plate XX. GEOLOGICAL MAP tp OF the PARISH oF BARTON, : COUNTY oF ASHBURNHAM, N.S.W. : Hoar by C.A.SUssmilch.F.G.S. | | SCALE. i 5 1015 20 40 6 9 ae oY i] « . —_*, ace |e TERTIARY (?)------- Volcanic -- -.[7] ~ | hk Quartzites,Sandstones __ DEVONIAN .-.. “Shales x Conglomerates Ca ma Limestones, Shales -- Suman a Teits: : Rhyolite - ------ eos ~~ lh, Acne tw are inl vette. Fa, eee tn | re OFA GREAT sawn Ig ISLAND ‘ Ego a aa TWEED pry ry ie}? Veomon a 73 TT oLARENCE pj “ee MACLEN HASTINGS Riych tp iT J CKSon ivy Bay Ta HAVEN Riyep 5 Bh iG ¢ APPENDIX A. Journal Royal Soc. VS. Wales Vol. XL. 1906. Plate X XI. 2 lot 111 144 447 a 129 © ia ae >> = or LO % oy S dines stig a p= om ? a Se Malena ate) Og S —_ 9 v SUMBA |é 5 perave) Island Hohe bag?) Y @ TN y) Endeavor Stray’ Cpe: Vory WGUINER AS, 9 ESE: “WESSEL ISLANDS 5 en in I , ~< | 7S Loursiape ARCHIPELAGh oO os ps fase™ pine aie =< fh) Blue Mu "fRer00 GULF OF| 1. R/EYLANDTC RPENTAR U-NIIRC PELLEW 5 Milchely A ea GROUP. = Wr 2% fr, fi ais & ZA £ & x: xo) qa sua} $ 5 Sia Ber ns Abrolhos cor __ Thapar [esis Bat coffins gf Sturt’s Tracks of Exploration shewn thus... Mitchell's, 7 ] CX Plate XXTITT. \ \ . 1—Red Ironbark, E. sideroxylon x 6. 1g Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. XL., 1906. Fig. 2—Bastard Box, E. polyanthema. x 6. Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. XL., 1906. Plate XXIV. Fig. 83—Box, E. hemiphloia. Fig. 4—Narrow-leaved Ironbark, E. crebra, x 180. CQO VAS NX \\\ Plate XXV. Nn \ \ K ae \\ W\\ QE Fig. 5—Red Slaty Gum, E bicolor. x 180. & \ N Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. XL , 1906. Fig. 6—Box, E. hemiphloia, x 180, ABSTRACT or PROCEEDINGS ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS OF THE Aopal Bociety of Alew South Hales. << +- ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS, MAY 2, 1906. The Annual General Mecene of the Society was held at the Society’s House, No. 5 Hlizabeth-street North, on Wednesday evening, May 2nd, 1906. H. A. LENEHAN, F.R.A.S., President, in the Chair. Forty-one members were present. The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and confirmed. The following Financial Statement for the year ended dist March, 1906, was presented by the Hon. Treasurer, GENERAL ACCOUNT. RECEIPTS. fy Ss. ds eM isly Cla One Guinea .... ea a 65 2 O BA 4, Arrears ... ae 12 12 O Subscriptions . Pe - Advances ae Le Le O Two Guineas ... ae wet | 800,10; 84,0 My ne Arrears ... nee $8118 0 a i Advances Bae 10 10 OQ — 538611 0 Composition for Life Membership a 21 ORO Parliamentary Grant on Subscriptions te rea Vote for 1905-1906 ... ie ae he GSO) 0) 10) 250s Om, Rent.. eae 76 10 0O Bihidries G@rcluding: £45 Ee coutributed by dutnbes tomnvds cost of printing papers) ... ee a ae es 52 12 0 Exchange added to Country cheques ... en ee a OG Clarke Memorial Fund—Loan ... oes ote ae Be LOO FON a0 Total Receipts ah ee aor ee LOSGHEA eG Balance on 1st April, 1905 axe ae ae Se) San itsy UG) 9) £10538 4 6 eons iv. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. PAYMENTS. o \Sseide So 8.x. Attendances at Meetings nae sae ae 9 15) 70 Assistant Secretary Ne a8 A - - 200% ORO Books and Periodicals... sey aa ain 80 16 2 Bookbinding are a ee ap ae 12 1G Collector... ; a 7 og Freight, Charges, Packie oe ae one 315 3 Furniture and Effects _... bie oa sen 1 O330 Gas . os ae she a che 13 18 8 ieeneanes - ae oe 9) Wie te Interest on Mortons (5 ere) a ns 710 Oo Petty Cash Expenses _... a he oe 8 11 9 Postage and Duty Stamps = ee a 25 10 O Printing ..:. is 3 23 60 Printing and Publishing ouraal Kes . 255 4 2 Printing Extra Copies of Papers oh a 6 OG Rates oe ae £2 re = ae 81 15°°6 Repairs oF ah Af = ne ae 5 3) Stationery ... ce = _ oe +H 815 3 Sundries .. ane an aie a ioe 17 4 5 Total Payments ae . —— 890 8 6 Building and Investment Fund, Composition for Life Membership ... 21 0: 0 Advance from General Account 31/ (3/97 “repaid 8 ets — 29) 30) \ 46 Clarke Memorial Fund—Loan repaid ... ss. 100) 40h0 Interest to date _ at a AA 013 4 ——— 10013 4 Bank Charges Ae sa Aa au ne 0 16.7 Balance on 3lst March, 1906, viz.:— Cash in Union Bank... are - 02 22°. Daa Cash in hand... aif se ie 5a 10° 0; — 32.5 7 £1053 4 6 BUILDING AND INVESTMENT FUND. Dr. £68; Bs Sakae Loan on Mortgage at 4% a nee 1400 0 O Composition for Life Membership, 1905 «se el Ol General Account advance 31/3/97 repaid 5A 8-,.0>.6 Deposit in Govt. Savings Bank 3lst March ’05 32 1 O Interest = ae saa 019 4 62 010 £1462 0 10 ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. V, Cr. 8 6G, Deposit in Government Savings Bank, March 31st, 1906... i a ce oop onl pl, Repairs to Building ... 00 300 Bi ra? 0 Or LO ———— 62 O 10 Balance 31st March, 1906 ... Be sas poo 1400 0 O £1462 0 10 CLARKE MEMORIAL FUND. Dr. Zo 5 Ol, Amount of Fund, 31st March, 1905 ar ve a A Sou 42 Interest to 31st March, 1906 as a or me an 16 10 10 LOZ ono CR. Bish 6 Deposit in Savings Bank of New South Wales, March 31,1906 250 13 11 Deposit in Government Savings Bank, March 31, 1906 wae, Zolli £502 5 O AUDITED AND FOUND CORRECT, AS CONTAINED IN THE Books oF ACCOUNTS. DAVID FELL, c.a.a. By BND Hines. .c ese Sypyey, 24th April, 1906. D. CARMENT, F.1.4., F.F.A. Honorary Treasurer. W. H. WEBB Assistant Secretary. i Honorary Auditors. A vote of thanks was passed to the Hon. Auditors, viz., Mr. DAvID FELL, c.A.A., and Mr. F. BENDER, for their services. Dr. GREIG SMITH and Mr. L. HARGRAVE were appointed Scrutineers, and Mr. W. M. HAMLET deputed to preside at the Ballot Box. There being no other nominations the following gentle- men were declared duly elected Officers and Members of Council for the current year : President: Prof. T. P. ANDERSON STUART, m.D., Lup. Vice-Presidents: Prof. WARREN,M. Inst. C.E., Wh.Sc.; F. H. QUAIFE, m.a., M.v. H. C. RUSSELL, B.a., c.u.c., F.R.S. | H. A. LENEHAN, F£.R.A.8. vi. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. Hon. Treasurer: D. CARMENT, ¥.1.A., F.F.A. Hon. Secretaries: og. At. NAT OR ING ars: | G. H. KNIBBS, F.R.a.s. Members of Council: S. H. BARRACLOUGH, B.z.,u.m.e.| Prof. LIVERSIDGE, tu1.p., F.R:s. KB. GUTHRIE, FEC; FCs. R. GREIG SMITH, p. sc, G. H. HALLIGAN, F.«.s. WALTER SPENCER, m.p. W. M. HAMLET, F.1.c., F.c.s. J. STUART THOM T. H. HOUGHTON, m. Inst. C.B. H. D. WALSH, B.E., M. Inst. C.E. The certificates of five candidates were read for the third time, of one for the second time, and of six for the first time. The following gentlemen were duly elected ordinary members of the Society. viz.:— BASNET, NATHANIEL JAMES, Accountant, ‘ Loorose,’ Punch-street, Mosman. HENNING, EDMUND TREGENNA, B.E. Syd., Hunter’s Hill. RICHARDSON, H. G. V., Draftsman, Newcastle-street, Rose Bay. SMALL, FREDERICK HENRY, ™. mnst.c.z., Public Works Department. WADE, JAMES SCARGILL, Assoc. M. Inst. c.B., Public Works Department. Twenty-five volumes, 157 parts, 23 reports, 7 pamphlets, and 2 maps, total 214, being portion of the donations received since the last meeting, were laid upon the table and acknowledged, (including an Etymological Dictionary of the Scottish Language by John Jamieson D.D., in 5 vols., presented by Mr. W. A. Dixon, F.1.C., F.C.S.) The Chairman made the following announcements : (1.) The Annual Dinner of the Society would be held on the 7th instant. (2.) The series of Popular Science Lectures for the present Session would be delivered as follows :— ~ ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. Vii. A series of Popular Science Lectures, illustrated by lantern slides, will be delivered at the Society’s House, at 8 p.m., as follows :— June 21—‘‘ Some Results of Archeological Work in Jerusalem,” by Professor ANDERSON STUART, M.D., LL.D. July 19—‘ Our Water Supply from source to distribution,” by J. M. Smary’ M. Inst.C.E., Engineer-in-Chief, Board of Water Supply and Sewerage’ and E.S. STokss, m.B., D.p.H., Medical Officer, Board of Water Supply and Sewerage. Aug. 16—“‘ Sir Joseph Banks, the ‘ Father of Australia’,”’” by J. H. Marpzn, ¥F.L.S., Director of the Botanic Gardens. Sept. 20—“‘Recent Developments in Long Distance Electrical Transmission,” by T. Rooks, Assoc. M. Inst. C.E., City Electrical Engineer. Nov. 15—“ Chapters in Early Australian History,” by F. M. Buapen, F.B.G.S., F.R.H.S. (Lond.). (3.) A series of three Clarke Memorial Lectures would be delivered by Prof. H. W. SKEATS, D.sc., F.G.s., Melbourne University, on the following dates :— Monday, October 22—“ The Volcanoes of Victoria,” Thursday, October 25—“ The Origin of Dolomite,’—(a. Early research and views as toits formation. 8. Experimental work up to the year 1897). Tuesday, October 30—*<‘ The Origin of Dolomite,’—(a. Recent experimental work including the chemical and mineralogical results of the examination of the Funafuti boring and of specimens from raised coral islands. #8. The bearing of these investigations on the origin of dolomite. y. Application of modern views to the dolomites of Tyrol and other areas.) (4.) The Society’s Journal and Proceedings, Vol. XxXxIXx., 1905, is in the binder’s hands and would be forwarded to members without delay. (5.) A lecture on “‘ The Scenery of Mount Kosciusko,”’ by His Honor Judge DockER, M.A., (illustrated by lantern slides) would be delivered May 14th, 1906. The following letters were received and read :— Berlin N., den 16 Januar 1906. Hochgeehrter Herr—Sie hatten die Giite mir mitzuteilen, dass die Royal Society of New South Wales mich am 6 Dezember v. Js. zum Ehrenmitgliede ernannt hat. Ich habe mich tiber diese Hhrung umsomehr gefreut, als sie die erste Anerkennung meiner wissenschaftlichen Bestre- bungen ist, die mir von Ihrem fernen Kontinent zuteil wird, und ich sehe darin den besten Beweis, wie sehr die Wissenschaft Gemeingut aller Kulturvolker ist. viii. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. Ich bitte Sie, hochgeehrter Herr, der Gesellschaft meinen verbindlichsten Dank fiir die Wahl tibermitteln zu wollen und bin, mit dem Ausdrucke meiner gréssten Wertschatzung. Thr ergebener, EMIL FISCHER. To the Hon. Secretary of the Royal Society of New South Wales, Mr. G. H. Knibbs. Istituto Chimico della R. Universita di Roma, Roma, li 5 Febbrojo, 1906. Via Panisperna 89 B. Hon. Secretary of the Royal Society, N.S.W. Dear Sir,—I have received with the greatest pleasure your communi- cation of the 8th December, and bez you to thank most heartily the President and all the members of your Society for the honour they gave me. With my best compliments I remain, Dear Sir, yours sincerely, Professore STANISLAO CANNIZZARO, Senatore del Regno d’ Italia. Kew, 14th January, 1906. To the Hon. Secretary, Royal Society N.S. Wales. Dear Sir,—I have to return my cordial thanks to the Royal Society for the distinguished honour conferred upon me in electing me to their Honorary Fellowship. I am only too conscious how sadly Iam undeserv- ing of the distinction. It is now a good many years since I retired from active botanical work. Believe me, very respectfully and faithfully yours, DANL. OLIVER. 269 Armach-street, Christchurch, N.Z., December 17th, 1905. Gentlemen,—Will you kindly convey to the members of the Royal Society of N.S. Wales the sincere thanks of myself and my family for their expression of deep sympathy with us in our sorrow. I am yours faithfully, ANNIE G. HUTTON. To the Hon. Secretaries, Royal Society of N. S. Wales. The motion of Professor LIVERSIDGE, that Rule XXVIII. be altered to read as follows, was carried unanimously :— ** Meetings of the Council of Management MIAY take place on the last Wednesday in every month OR on such other days as the Council may determine.”’ Mr. H. A. LENEHAN, F.R.A.S., then read his address. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. ix, A vote of thanks was passed to the retiring President, and Prof. T. P. ANDERSON STUART, M.D., LL.D., was installed as President for the ensuing year. Prof. STUART thanked the members for the honour con- ferred upon him. EXHIBIT. The Government Geologist, Mr. HK. F. PITTMAN exhibited a specimen of diamond in the matrix. The specimen was found by Messrs. Pike and O’Donnell, in their claim at Oakey Creek, near Inverell. The diamond is a small one, weighing about one-third carat, and the material in which it is embedded is an igneous rock known as dolerite. The dolerite occurs at Oakey Creek as a pipe or dyke, and the Specimen is of special interest as throwing some light upon the question of the origin of the diamond; for it is a fair assumption that the gem was actually formed in the dolerite when the latter was cooling or solidifying from the molten state. The origin of diamonds has for many years been a subject of controversy amongst scientific men. As is well known, the world’s supply of diamonds is obtained chiefly from South Africa. The stones were at first found there in alluvial deposits formed of river gravels, but were ulti- mately traced back to a bluish-green rock, which proved to be a volcanic agglomerate filling the pipes of old vol- canoes. The diamonds were found scattered irregularly through this agglomerate locally known as “‘ blue-ground,”’ and for some time it was thought that this was the actual matrix of the diamond. Hragments of a crystalline rock, known as eclogite, are however, found in the agglomerate, and ultimately Professor BONNEY, who has done a great deal of work in investigating the origin of diamonds, announced that in his opinion the eclogite was the actual Matrix of the diamond, but that the eclogite occurred in the volcanic pipes in the form of water-worn pebbles, which had probably been derived from a bed of conglomerate x. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. of still greater age, and which had been broken through by the volcano at the time of its eruption. Dolerite, however, as a matrix for the diamond, was quite unknown in any part of the world until the discovery of the specimen alluded to was made by Messrs. Pike and O’Donnell, near Inverell. There are several other known deposits of similar rock in the neighbourhood, and it seems more than probable that all the diamonds which have been won in Cope’s Creek and the surrounding district have been derived from that source. British Museum (Natural History), Cromwell Road, London, 8S. W. BLOOD-SUCKING INSECTS AND TROPICAL DISEASES. The importance of blood-sucking insects and other animals as possible disseminators of pathogenic organisms being now uni- versally recognised, it is absolutely essential, firstly that medical men and others engaged in improving the sanitation of tropical countries should have the means of determining correctly the names of blood-sucking species with which they may come into contact; and secondly that a well-preserved collection of modern specimens should be available in London for comparison. The British Museum has already dealt with the Mosquitoes and Tsetse-flies, and it is now proposed to publish on similar lines a further series of monographs on the other blood-sucking forms. The material at present at our disposal, however, is insufficient for this purpose, and it is therefore hoped that all medical men and naturalists residing in British Colonies, or in the tropics in any part of the world, will make special endeavours to obtain speci- mens and send them addressed to the Director, British Museum (Natural History), Cromwell Road, London, 8.W., together with notes on the names, habits, and distribution of the insects. The accompanying pamphlet (to be seen in the Library of the Royal Society of N. 8S. Wales), which has been prepared in order to assist those who may be willing to help the Museum in this way, is mainly devoted to the blood-sucking Flies (Diptera), and i. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. xl, contains a résumé of what is known of their appearance, habits and life history, with illustrations of typical forms, and full direc- tions as to the collection and transmission of specimens to England. When a collection is despatched, a separate letter of advice stating the fact should always be sent; the expense of sending collections to the Museum, by parcel post or otherwise, will be refunded. EK. RAY LANKESTER, Director. December 10, 1904. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS, JUNE 6, 1906. The General Monthly Meeting of the Society was held at the Society’s House, No. 5 Hlizabeth-street North, on Wednesday evening, June 6th, 1906. Prof. T. P. ANDERSON STUART, M.D., LL.D., President, in the Chair. Thirty members and three visitors were present. The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and confirmed. Two new members enrolled their names and were introduced. + His Honor Judge DocKER and Dr. R. GREIG SMITH were appointed Scrutineers, and Mr. D. CARMENT deputed to preside at the Ballot Box. The certificate of one candidate was read for the third time, of six for the second time, and of one for the first time. The following gentleman was duly elected an ordinary member of the Society :— LEE, ALFRED, ‘ Glen Roona,’ Bondi. The Chairman made the following announcements :— 1. That the Monthly Meeting of the Hngineering Section would be held on Wednesday, June 20, at 8 p.m. Xil ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. 2. That the first Popular Science Lecture of the Session would be delivered on Thursday, June 21, at 8 p.m., on ‘*Some results of Archeological work in Jerusalem,”’ by Professor T. P. ANDERSON STUART, M.D., LL.D. 3. That several members of the late Hconomic Section desired the resuscitation of the Section. He referred to the practical importance of the subject, and hoped the matter would meet with the hearty co-operation and support of the members individually. 4, That the Council thought it would be a fitting tribute to the memory of the late Mr. CHARLES Moors (who had for so many years been closely connected with the Royal Society and was indeed, at the time of his death, the ‘‘ Father of the Society,’’) to have his portrait hung in the Society’s house. The Council invited subscriptions for this purpose, the amount to be limited to 5/- each, and he trusted the members would kindly help in the matter, however small the contribution. The Engineering Section reported the election of its officers and Committee for the current Session, as per printed cards which had already been distributed. Kleven volumes, 162 parts, 4 reports, 9 pamphlets, and one map, total 187, received as donations since the last meeting, were laid upon the table and acknowledged. Mr. F. B. GUTHRIE, F.I.C., F.C.S., delivered a lecturette, (illustrated by lantern slides) on ‘‘The Plant’s supply of Nitrogen,”’ of which the following is an abstract :—Impor- tance of nitrogen to plant growth. Different ways by which the plant obtains its nitrogen. Nitrification; explanation of increased fertility brought about by top-dressing sterile soils with comparatively small quantities of fertile ones, Work of Pasteur, Schloessing and Miintz, Warington, Frank- land, and Winogradsky. Different classes of organisms are involved in the nitrification of animal or vegetable refuse, ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. xili. putrefactive moulds and bacteria converting it first into humus with evolution of carbonic acid and metabolism of the nitrogenous matter into simpler forms, such as amides and ammonium carbonate. The further nitrification of the ammonium salts is the work of other specialized organisms, some of which convert the ammonium compounds into nitrites and others complete the oxidation to nitrates. Conditions favourable to nitrification are (1) presence of suitable food for the development of the organisms, namely lime, potash, sulphates and phosphates and free carbonic acid. (2) Suitable temperature, the optimum being about 36° OC. (3.) Presence of a base, such as carbonate of lime, to combine with the iree nitrous and nitric acid produced. (4.) Presence of a suitable amount of moisture. (5) Absence of too strong light. (6.) Presence ofa sufficiency of oxygen, the process being essentially an oxidising one. All the nitrogen is ultimately derived from the atmo- sphere, which is converted into organic material in several ways. Free-living nitrogen-fixing organisms which are present in all soils have the power of fixing atmospheric nitrogen and thereby enriching the soil in nitrogenous organic material. These thrive best in soils rich in organic matter but poor in nitrogen, the fixation being due to the oxidation of carbohydrates which supplies the energy. In the decayed leaves of forest trees these organisms are very abundant, the fallen foliage of beech-trees having been found to accumulate 19 tbs. nitrogen per acre. In the case of leguminous plants, nitrogen-fixing bacteria are found in nodules formed on the roots, which bacteria are either parasitic or symbiotic with the host plant. This explains the enormous gain in nitrogen resulting from the growth of such crops as cow-peas, even when the crop is not ploughed under. Attempts have been made to prepare pure cultures of these root organisms by different means for XV. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS use in directly inoculating soil or seed. Preparations of Nobbe, Hiltner, Moore. None of these can claim anything like certainty in their action and they have not so far advanced beyond the experimental stage nor established themselves as part of ordinary farm practice. The problem of artificially fixing atmospheric nitrogen economically in a form suitable for the nutrition of plants was next discussed. Calcium cyanamide, prepared by pass- ing nitrogen over calcium carbide at a white heat, has been found to possess manurial value, due to the formation of ammonia in contact with moisture. Hxperiments so far indicate that there is nothing to show that it hasa higher manurial value than ammonium sulphate with which it cannot at present compete in price. There are also certain disadvantages in its use, depending on the difficulty of mixing with other manures, therisk of injuring germin- ation etc. More promising methods appear to be in the direct union of the oxygen and nitrogen in the air by means of the electric arc. Among processes which have been tried on the commercial scale with some success are Bradley and Lovejoy’s, which was in operation at Niagara till 1904. The most successful process up to the present is that of Birkeland and Hyde which is now being carried out on an enormous scale in Norway. In this process air is sparked in a specially constructed electric furnace by means of an arc spread out into a fan by means of electro- magnets. The air thus sparked is passed through towers charged with milk of lime, and the nitrite formed con- verted into calcium nitrate by treatment with nitric acid. The product is put on the market either in this form or is converted into a non-hygroscopic basic nitrate by calcining it with lime (Messel’s process). Calcium nitrate appears to be just as effective as a manure as sodium nitrate and the question of the future of the industry becomes one of cheapening the unit cost of the current. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XV. Remarks were made by Dr. QUAIFE and the President. EXHIBITS : Mr. J. H. MArtpEN exhibited some plants (herbarium specimens) which, in drying, stain paper, and made some explanatory notes in drawing attention tothe phenomena. Remarks were made and questions asked by Mr. R. HELMs, Mr. W. J. CLUNIES Ross, and the President. Mr. MAIDEN replied. + Mr.C. A. SUSSM{LCH exhibited a fossil insect-wing from the Upper Coal Measures at Newcastle, collected by Mr. C. NEWLING. The specimen will be described at a later meeting. ABSTRACT OF PROCKEDINGS, JULY 4, 1906. The General Monthly Meeting of the Society was held at the Society’s House, No. 5 Hlizabeth-street North, on Wednesday evening, July 4th, 1906. Prof. T. P. ANDERSON STUART, M.D., LL.D., President, in the Chair. Thirty-three members and one visitor were present. The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and confirmed. An apology for non-attendance through illness was received from Dr. WALTER SPENCER. Mr. R. H. MATHEWS and Mr. LAWRENCE HARGRAVE were appointed Scrutineers, and Dr. R. GREIG SMITH deputed to preside at the Ballot Box. The certificates of six candidates were read for the third time, of one for the second time, and of five for the first time. The following gentlemen were duly ceed ordinary members of the Society :-— XVi. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS, HopGson, RALPH VIVIAN, Barrister-at-Law, Wentworth Court, Elizabeth-street ; p.r. ‘Tower Cottage,’ Old South Head Road. KEENAN, Rev. BERNARD, D.D., etc., “ Royston,’ Rose Bay. McInrosH, ARTHUR MARSHALL, Dentist, ‘Calahla,’ Manly. OscHATZ, ALFRED LEOPOLD, Teacher of Languages, 167 Victoria-street, Potts Point. PAWLEY, CHARLES LEWIS, Dentist, 137 Regent-st., City. WoOOLNOUGH, WALTER GEORGE, D. Sc., ete, Demonstrator in Geology, University of Sydney. The Chairman made the following announcements :— 1. That the Monthly Meeting of the Engineering Section would be held on Wednesday, July 18th, at 8 p.m. 2. That the Second Popular Science Lecture of the Session would be delivered on Thursday, July 19th, at 8 p.m., on ‘Our Water Supply from source to distribution,’ by J. M. SMAIL, . Inst. c.E., Engineer-in-Chief, Board of Water Supply and Sewerage, and E. STOKES, M.B., D.P.H., Medical Officer, Board of Water Supply and Sewerage. A circular was read from the Farrer Memorial Committee inviting contributions towards establishing a_ suitable memorial to perpetuate the memory of the late Mr. W. J. FARRER, Who has done so much important work in the improvement of wheats. Subscriptions are received by Mr. F. W. A. DOWNES, M.L.A., and Mr. G. W. WALKER. Twenty-seven volumes, 60 parts, and 15 reports, total 102, received from the United States of America as dona- tions, were laid upon the table and acknowledged. THE FOLLOWING PAPER WAS READ: ‘** The testing of building materials on abrasion by the sand blast apparatus,’’ by H. BuRcHARTz, of the Royal Testing Laboratory, Berlin, (Communicated by Pro- fessor W. H. WARREN, ©™. Inst. C.E. Remarks were made by Mr. W. A. Dixon, Dr. SCHEIDEL and the President. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XVil. Mr. W. M. HAMLET, F.I.C., F.C.S., delivered a lecturette illustrated by lantern slides, when the new electric projec- tion lantern kindly provided by Dr. QUAIFE was used with excellent results. Mr. Hamuet took for his subject ‘‘The measurement of human energy,’’ which he defined as the sum of the activities of a comparatively few chemical elements, such as nitrogen, carbon, hydrogen, phosphorus, calcium, sodium, and iron; these with a few others entered into a host of permutations that ran the whole gamut of the melody of life. Attempts had from time to time been made to estimate the energy of which the human body was capable, and to present its equivalent value in foot-pounds and kilogram-meters the method being essentially a thermo- dynamic one. Success had followed the attempt, and advances had been made in the study of mental and physical energy. To come to any true conception as to its value, we must,as Lord Kelvin had pointed out, make careful weighings and measurements; indeed, we know little or nothing about a phenomenon until we were able to measure it. Between the estimation of any coefficient representing mental energy, and the more accessible measurement of physical energy, a barrier exists, which prevents us from even approximating the dynamic values of the intra-cellular energy of the nervous system. ‘The work done in walking a given distance on a level road afforded an easy means of estimating work done, and the lecturer gave examples in his own case of energy amounting to between four and five hundred foot-tons per day. Compared with a sedentary life demanding but 1,200 calories per diem, the former required two anda half times the food intake, namely, a fuel value 0f 3,000 K. The nitrogen metabolism was taken into account and it was found that the old standard of 100 grams of proteid was excessive, and that better work and less fatigue, was felt when the intake of food was regulated in the way suggested by Chittenden. A description was b—July 4, 1906. XVill. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. given of Professor Atwater’s respiration chamber and the ergometer, by which definite values based on thermo- dynamic principles were obtained in cases of students, athletes and others who had volunteered to offer themselves as living experiments. The lecturer stated that he had found from his own observations and experiments, that a much smaller intake of food sufficed for mental work, much smaller than that given by Pettenkofer and Voit, and more nearly that found by Chittenden. Remarks were made by Messrs. J. H. Marpsn, J. U. C. COLYER, S. H. BARRACLOUGH, W. A. DIxON, and the Presi- dent. Mr. HAMLET replied. On the suggestion of Mr. MAIDEN, it was agreed that at some future meeting, to be arranged by the Council, a dis- cussion be held on the subject of ‘The nutrition of man.” Members desiring to take part in the ‘symposium’ were invited to send in their names to the Honorary Secretaries. At the request of the President, Mr. MAIpEN will begin the discussion. It is proposed to issue the Society’s Volume in Parts, unbound, to such members as desire the publication to be issued to them in that form. The precise number of parts to be issued each year has not yet been decided upon; they may be issued irregularly. A printed form of application is obtainable for the convenience of members. To those members who do not sign the form, the bound volume will be delivered at the end of each session as heretofore. EXHIBITS : Mr. HAMLET exhibited a Colorimeter by Dubosq of Paris, which he had found useful in estimating the intensity of colours in artificially coloured food stuffs. Another form of Colorimeter by Stammer, was exhibited, having a more extended scale, and adapted for measuring the colour in ~ fictitious raspberry syrups, fruit essences, etc. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. x1X. Mr. MAIDEN exhibited some dates grown at the Lake Harry Date Palm Plantation, near Hergott, about 500 miles north of Adelaide, by Mr. Walter Gill, Conservator of Forests, of South Australia, which, it will be observed, are of pleasant flavour. They are the product of the ‘*Deglet Nour’’ variety sent by the French Government from Algeria to South Australia on September 11th, 1894. There are 45 palms in full bearing, and the fruit is sold retail in Adelaide at 8d. per pound. The question suggests itself, why is New South Wales backward in this matter ? We already have this variety at the Pera Bore. Dr. F. H. QUAIFE exhibited a few slides to show the sharp definition obtainable by his lantern with the electric light recently installed. The best thanks of the meeting were conveyed to Dr. QUAIFE for his kindness in lending the lantern to the Society until it acquires one of its own. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS, AUGUST 1, 1906. The General Monthly Meeting of the Society was held at the Society’s House, No. 5 Elizabeth-street North, on Wednesday evening, August Ist, 1906. Prof. T. P. ANDERSON STUART, M.D., LL.D., President, in the Chair. Thirty members were present. The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and confirmed. Five new members enrolled their names and were intro- duced. XX. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. Mr. C. A. SussmitcH and Mr. A. J. WALKOM were appointed Scrutineers, and Mr. D. CARMENT deputed to preside at the Ballot Box. The certificate of one candidate was read for the third time, of five for the second time, and of six for the first time. The following gentleman was duly elected an ordinary member of the Society :— LONEY, CHARLES AUGUSTUS LUxTON, Engineer, Equitable Buildings, George-street. The Chairman made the following announcements :— (1). That it was intended to form a Dental Section in connection with the Society. (2.) That about £2 more was required for the portrait of the late Mr. CHARLES MOORE. (3.) That subscriptions towards the Farrer Memorial would be thankfully received by the Hon. Secretaries. (4.) That the third Popular Science Lecture of the Session would be delivered on Thursday, August 16th, at 8 p.m., on “‘ Sir Joseph Banks, the ‘ Father of Australia,’ ”’ by J. H. MAIDEN, F.L.S., Government Botanist and Director of the Botanic Gardens. ee (5.) That the Engineering Section would hold a Conver- sazione on Thursday, August 30, at 8 p.m., in lieu of the usual monthly meeting. Twenty-four volumes, 517 parts, 19 reports, and 3 pamphlets, total 563, received as donations, were laid upon the table and acknowledged. THE FOLLOWING PAPERS WERE READ: 1. “The Australian Melaleucas and their Essential Oils,”’ Part I., by RICHARD T. BAKER, F.L.S., Curator, and HreNnrRY G. SMITH, F.C.S., Assistant Curator, Techno- logical Museum, Sydney. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXi, 2. “ On Vitis opaca, F.v.M., and its Enlarged Rootstock,”’ by RICHARD T. BAKER, F.L.S., Curator, and HENRY G. SMITH, F.C.S., Assistant Ourator, Technological Museum, Sydney. Remarks were made by Mr. J. H. MAIDEN, Dr. R. GREIG SmiTH, Mr. J. A. SCHOFIELD, Mr. F. B. GuTuHrin, Dr. F. H. QUAIFE, and the Chairman. Mr. BAKER replied. 3. “Investigation of the Disease in Cattle known as ‘Rickets,’ or ‘ Wobbles,’ and examination of the Poisonous Principle of the Zamia Palm (Macrozamia Fraseri),’’ by H. A. MANN, Government Analyst and Chemist to the Department of Agriculture, W.A., and T. I. WALLAS, Acting Physiologist and Pathologist to the Department. Preliminary notice. (Communicated by R. GREIG SMITH, D.SC., etc.) ‘* For some time we have been carrying on investigations on the above subject, as the result of which we have come to the conclusion that the effects upon cattle induced by eating the Macrozamia Fraseri, are caused by the presence in the plant of acid potassium oxalate (‘‘ Salts of Sorrel.’’) This is a confirmation of the results of an analysis made by a Mr. Norrie prior to 1876, and reported to the Royal Society of New South Wales by F. Milford, M.p. (Journal of the Soc., Vol. x., p. 295.) This analysis, which was made on another species (Macrozamia spiralis) appears to have been overlooked by chemists making subsequent examinations of the plant, and we have been unable to find any indication that the presence of oxalates was associated by other investigators with the observed effects. We hope to beable to submit a full report of our experi- ments, which are now approaching completion, at an early date.”’ Remarks were made by Mr. J. H. MAIDEN, Prof. LIVER- SIDGE, Mr. F. B. GUTHRIE, and the President. Dr. GREIG SMITH replied. XXil. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. EXHIBITS : 1. Lenticular basalt, by Professor LIvERsIpGE. At Emu Bay, Tasmania, there is a very fine outcrop of columnar basalt. The faces of many of the columns, where weathered and acted upon by the sea water, show an irregular lamellar structure, as if the column were made up of thin imperfect plates or layers, and the tops of some of them have an imbricated appearance, from being covered with small, more or less lenticular shaped, pieces of weathered basalt. This structure is probably a modification of the cup and cone joints common in basalts. 2. Specimens of pure Tin Metal from Mount Bischoff Mine in Tasmania. The molten metal had been dropped into water, resulting in beautiful fantastic incrustation like masses. By Professor ANDERSON STUART. 3. Mr. OC. A. SUSSMILCH, exhibited two large geodes in basalt coated with large and beautiful crystals of quartz and calcite. In one example the quartz was brownish- black in colour (cairngorm), and in the other was of a pale amethyst-pink colour. In both examples the calcite crystals were of the type known as ‘‘Nail Head Spar,”’ some of which are over an inchin diameter. The specimens were obtained from the old Dundas Quarry near Parramatta. 4, Mr. R. T. BAKER, F.L.S., exhibited (a) Section of a HKucalyptus tree 41 years old. This specimen was cut from Eucalyptus dealbata, about 12 feet from the ground, and measures 135 inches in diameter, and was planted for timber by Mr. W. Shipton, at Verona. The annual rings are not well defined, and run into each other, so that it would be impossible to determine its age by them. (b) Rabbit bones found inside a ewe, which was in a perfectly healthy condition at the time of slaughtering. These bones were coated with an encrustation of calcium carbonate, phosphate, and oxalate. (c) A specimen of a radio-active ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXilli, material (carnolite) from Olney, South Australia. (d) Specimens of a radio-active material, from Silverton, New South Wales, found by Mr. H. J. Blanch. Mr. BAKER also exhibited specimens in illustration of the papers by himself and Mr. SMITH. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS, SEPTEMBER 5, 1906. The General Monthly Meeting of the Society was held at the Society’s House, No. 5 Elizabeth-street North, on Wednesday evening, September 5th, 1906. H. A. LENEHAN, F.R.A.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. Twenty-five members were present. The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and confirmed. Five new members enrolled their names and were introduced. Mr. R. H. CAMBAGE and Mr. G. HOOPER were appointed Scrutineers, and Dr. WALTER SPENCER deputed to preside at the Ballot Box. The certificates of five candidates were read for the third time, of six for the second time, and of three for the first time. The following gentlemen were duly elected ordinary members of the Society :— ADAMS, WALTER H., Assistant Engineer, Sydney Harbour Trust, Circular Quay. GOSCHE, VESEY RICHARD, Consul for Nicaragua, 15 Grosvenor-street. Xxiv. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS GoscHt, W. A. HAMILTON, Electrical Engineer, 40 and 42 Clarence-street. RITcHIE, ALEX. MACDONALD, Civil Engineer, ‘ Hrcil- doune,’ Hlizabeth Bay Road. WHITEHEAD, LINDSAY, Acting Manager, Bank of New South Wales, Head Office, George-street. The Chairman made the following announcements :— 1. That the fourth Popular Science Lecture of the Session would he delivered on Thursday, September 20th at 8 p.m. on *‘ Recent developments in Jong distance electrical trans- mission,’’ by T. ROOKE, Assoc. M. Inst. 0.5, City Electrical Hngineer. 2. That the Monthly Meeting of the Engineering Section would be held on Wednesday, September 19th, at 8 p.m. THE FOLLOWING PAPERS WERE READ: 1. ‘* Port Sydney,’’ by LAWRENCE HARGRAVE. Remarks were made by Mr. G. H. HALLIGAN, Mr. R. V. Hopeson, Dr. F. H. QUAIFE, and Mr. T. H. HOUGHTON. 2. “The International Rules of Botanical Nomenclature (adopted by the International Botanical Congress of Vienna, 1905),’’ by J. H. MAIDEN, Government Botanist and Director of the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. Remarks were made by the Chairman and Mr. R. T. BAKER. EXHIBIT. A series of photographs showing progress of construc- tion of the Cataract Dam, kindly lent by the Acting Under Secretary, Department of Public Works. Explanatory remarks were made by Mr. ALGERNON PEAKE. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXV. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS, OCTOBER 3, 1906. The General Monthly Meeting of the Society was held at the Society’s House, No. 5 Hlizabeth-street North, on Wednesday evening, October 3rd, 1906. Prof. T. P. ANDERSON STUART, M.D., LL.D., President, in the Chair. Thirty members and six visitors were present. The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and confirmed. Messrs. OC. G. HODGSON and JAMES TAYLOR were appointed Scrutineers, and Dr. F. H. QUAIFE deputed to preside at the Ballot Box. The certificates of six candidates were read for the third time, of three for the second time, and of three for the first time. The following gentlemen were duly elected ordinary members of the Society :— BINNIE, HERBERT, Merchant, 524 Kent-street. MAITLAND, Louis DuNcAN, Dental Surgeon, 6 Lyons Terrace, Liverpool-street. NessittT, T. H., Town Clerk of Sydney, Town Hall. NICHOLAS, HAROLD SPENCE, B.A. Oxon., LL.B. Barrister-at- Law, Chambers, Phillip-street. TAYLOR, ALLEN, The Right Hon., Lord Mayor of Sydney, *Hllerslie,’ 85 Darlinghurst Road. TAYLOR, HORACE, Registrar, Dental Board,7 Richmond Terrace, Domain. The President made the following announcements:— 1. That the portrait of the late Mr. CHARLES MOooRE, which had been subscribed for by a number of members, was finished and had been placed in the large hall. XXVI1. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. 2. That a course of three Clarke Memorial Lectures would be delivered at the Royal Society’s House, at 8 p.m., by Prof. EH. W. SKEATS, DSc. F.c.s., Melbourne University, on the following dates :— Monday, October 22—“ The Volcanoes of Victoria.” Thursday, October 25—“ The Origin of Dolomite.”—(a. Early research and views as to its formation. 8, Experimental work up to the year 1897). Tuesday, October 30—“ Brunswick—Vereins fiir Naturwissenschaft zu Braunschweig. Jahresbericht xiv,, 1903-5. -e Buenos AtrEs—Museo Nacional de Buenos Aires. Anales, Serie 3, Tome v., 1905. The Museum CautcuTTa—Asiatic Society of Bengal. Journal, Vol. txxiut., Part i, Extra No.; Partii., Supplement; Partiii., Extra No., 1904, Proceedings, No. 11 Extra No., 1904. Journal and Proceedings, Vol. 1.. Nos. 1 -10,and Extra No. 1905; Vol. 11., Nos. 1 —3, 1906. Memoirs, Vol. 1., Nos. 1-9, 1905-6. The Society Board of Scientific Advice for India. Annual Report for the year 1904-5. The Board Department of Agriculture in India. Annual Report of the Imperial Department of Agriculture for the year 1904-5. Botanical Series, Vol. 1., Nos, 1-4. Chemical Series, Vol.1., No.1. Entomological Series, Vol. 1., No. 1, 1905. The Department Geological Survey of India. Records, Vol. xxxm1., Parts lii., iv., 1905; Vol. xxx1., Parts i.—iv.; Vol. xxxiv., Part 1., 1906. The Survey CamBripGE—Cambridge Philosophical Society. Proceedings, Vol. x111., Part il1.—v., 1905-6. Transactions, Vol. xx., Nos. 1 - 10, 1905-6. The Society CAMBRIDGE (Mass.)—Museum of Comparative Zodlogy at Harvard College, Bulletin, Vol. xu111., No. 4, 1906; Vol. xtv1., Nos. 10-14; Vol. xuvirt., Nos. 1 —3, 1905-6; Vol. xurx., [ Geological Series, Vol. v111.] Nos. 1 - 3, 1905-6; Vol. 1., Nos. 1 -3, 1906. Annual Report of the Curator, 1904-5, Memoirs, Vol. xxx., No. 2, 1905; Vol. xxx111., 1906. The Museum Care Town—Geological Commission. Geological Map of the Colony of the Cape of Good Hope, Sheet I., 1906. The Commission Geodetic Survey of South Africa. Report of the Geodetic Survey of part of Southern Rhodesia, Vol. 111., 1905. The British South African Company South African Philosophical Society. Transactions, Vol. xvt., Parts ii., 111., 1905-6. The Society CARLSRUHE—Grossherzoglich Technische Hochschule. Inaugural Dissertations (10). Programme, 1905-6. The Director Naturwissenschaftliche Verein. Verhandlungen, Band XviiI., 1904-5. The Society CassEL—Vereins fiir Naturkunde. Abhandlungen und Bericht, XLIX., 1903 - 5. >» Cuicaco—Chicago Academy of Sciences. Bulletin, Vol. 11., No. 4,1902. Natural History Survey, Bulletin Ne. 3, Part i.; No. 5, 1902. Special Publication, No. 1, 1902, The Academy XXXVI. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. CxHiIcago—continued. Field Columbian Museum. Anthropological Series, Vol. vi,, Nos. 2,3; Voli vin, No: 2; ~ Vol-vitm:s Wolter Nos. 1, 2, 1905. Botanical Series, Vol. 11., No. 8, 1906. Geological Series, Vol. 11., No.7; Vol. 111., No. 2, 1906. Report Series, Vol. 11., No. 5, 1905. Zoological Series, Vol, v1.37 Vol-vii., No, 1, 1805. The Museum University of Chicago. Astrophysical Journal, Vol. xxtt., Nos. 3-5. 1905; Vol. xx11., Nos. 1-5; Vol. xxiv., Nos. 1, 2, 1906. Journal of Geology, Vol. x111., Nos. 7. 8, 1905; Vol. xiv., Nos. 1- 6, 1906. The University Western Society of Engineers. Journal, Vol. x., Nos. 4-6, 1905; Vol. xr., Nos. 1 - 4, 1906. The Society CuRIsTIANIA—Norwegische Meteorologische Instituts. Jahr- buch fiir 1903. The Institute Videnskabs-Selskabet i Christiania. Forhandlinger, Aar 1904-5. Skrifter, 1904-5. The Society CINCINNATI—Cincinnati Society of Natural History. Journal, Vol, xx., Nos. 5, 6, 7, 1906. 2 Lloyd Library of Botany, Pharmacy and Materia Medica. Index of the Mycological Writings of C. G. Lloyd, Vol. 1., 1898-1905. Mycological Notes, Nos. 19 ~ 21, 1905-6. Mycological Series, Bulletin, No. 8. The Library University of Cincinnati. Illustrated Booklet. Record, Series I, Vol. 11., Nos. 3-15, 1905-6; Ser. II., Vol. 11., Nos. 1, 2, 1906. Teachers Bulletin, Ser. 3, Vol.1., No. 6; Vol. 11., No. 5, 1905. The University CoLtumBia— University of Missouri. Laws Observatory, Bulletin, Nos. 2-7. Studies, Vol. 1., No. 1, 1905. x CoPENHAGEN—Société Royale des Antiquaires du Nord. Mémoires, Nouvelle Série, 1904. The Society Corpopa—Académia Nacional de Ciencias. Boletin, Tomo xvitt., Entrega 1, 2, 1905. The Academy Cracow—Académie des Sciences de Cracovie. Bulletin Inter- national, Classe de Philologie, Classe d’Histoire et de Philosophie, Nos. 3—10, 1905; Nos. 1—3, 1906. Cata- logue of Polish Scientific Literature, Tom v., Zeszyt 1 - 4, 1905. Classe des Sciences Mathematiques et Naturelles Nos. 5- 10, 1905; Nos. 1-3, 1906. a DENVER—Colorado Scientific Society. Proceedings, Vol. vu1r., pp. 55 - 122. The Society Drs Mornes—lIowa Geological Survey. Annual Report for 1904, Vol. xv. The Survey DrespEN—Konig]. Mineral-Geolog. Museum. Die Gastropoden der Siichsischen Kreideformation von Dr. Karl Deninger 1905. The Museum Konigl. Sichs. Statistische Bureau. Zeitschrift, Jahrgang ni. Heft 1, 2, 1905. The Bureau Konig]. Sammlung fiir Kunst und Wissenschaft. Bericht uber die Verwaltung und Vermehrung, 1902-3. The Director ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXXVI. DresDEN—continued. Vereins fiir Erdkunde zu Dresdon. Biicherei-Verz ichnis, Abgeschlossen am 15 April, 1905. Jahresberichte, Band vi., 1898-1901. Mitglieder-Verzeichnis, April 1905, April 1906. Mitteilungen, Heft 1,2,1905; Heft 1, 1906. Muschelgeld-Studien von Prof. Dr. Oskar Schneider. Nach dem hinterlassenen Manuskript bearbeitet von Carl Ribbe, 1905. The Society Dusiin—Royal Dublin Society. Abstract of Minutes. Session 1905-6. Economic Proceedings, Vol. 1., Parts vi., vii., 1905-6. Scientific Proceedings, Vol. x., N.S., Part iii., Vol. x1., N.S., Nos. 1- 9, 1905-6. Scientific Transactions, Series 2, Vol. 1x., Nos. 2, 3, 1906. . Royal Irish Academy. List of Members, 1906. Proceedings Vol. xxv., Section B, No. 6, Section C, No. 12,1905; Vol. xxvi., Section A, No. 1, Section B, Nos. 1 - 5, Section C, Nos. 1-9, 1906. Transactions, Vol. xxx111., Section A, Part i; Section B, Parts 1., 11., 1906. The Academy EpinpurGH—Botanical Society of Edinburgh. Transactions and Proceedings, Vol, xx111., Part i., 1905. The Society Edinburgh Geological Society. Transactions, Vol. vii1., Part iii., 1905. i Royal Physical Society. Proceedings, Vol. xv1., Nos. 4—- 6, Session 1905-6. -, Royal Scottish Geographical Society. The Scottish Geo- graphical Magazine, Vol. xx1., Nos. 11, 12, 1905; Vol. xxi1., Nos. 1—10, 1906. Reprints (3). — s Royal Society. Proceedings, Vol. xx1v., Sessions 1901-3; Vol. xxv., Partsi., 11., 1908-5; Vol. xxv1.; Nos. 1-4, 1906. Travsactions, Vol. xu., Parts iil.,iv., 1902-4; Vol. xu1., Parts i., 11.., 1908-5; Vol. xxi11., 1905. 7 University. The Edinburgh University Calendar, 1906 - 1907. The University ELBERFELD— Naturwissenschaftliche Vereins. Jahres-Berichte, Heft x1., 1906 und Beilage. Tke Society FLoRENcE—Societa di Studi Geografici e Coloniali in Firenze. Revista Geografica Italiana, Annata x11., Fasc. 8-10, 1905; Annata x111., Fase 1 — 7, 1906. The Society Societa Italiana d’ Antropologia, Etnologia ete. Archivio, Vol. xxxv., Fasc, 2, 8, 1905; Vol. xxxv1., Fasc 1, 19v6. 35 Fort Monrot Va.—United States Artillery. Journal, Vol. xxiv.. Nos. 1—38, Whole Nos. 74-76, 1995; Vol. xxv., Nos. 1-3, Whole Nos. 77 - 79, 1906; Vol. xxvi., No. 1, Whole No. 80, 1906. The Artillery Board FRANKFURT a/M.—Senckenbergische Naturforschende Gesell- schaft. Bericht, 1905. The Society FREIBERG (Saxony)—Koniglich-Sachsische Berg-Akademie. Jahrbuch fiir das Berg-und Huttenwesen im Kénigreiche Sachsen, Jahrgang 1905. The Academy Frisoure—Société Fribourgeoise des Sciences Naturelles. Bul- letin, Vol. x11., 1903-4. The Society XXXVIii. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. GrELonc—Geelong Field Naturalists’ Club. The Geelong Naturalist, Second Series, Vol. 11., Nos. 2-4, 1905-6. The Club GENEvA—Institut National Genevois. Bulletin, Tome xxxv1., 1905. Le Cinquantiéme Anniversaire de la Fondation de l’ Institut Genevois, 1902. The Institute GiEssEN —Oberhessische Gesellschaft fiir Natur-und Heilkunde. Bericht xxxiv., 1901-5. Medizinische Abteilung, Band 1., 1906. The Society Giascow— Royal Philosophical Society of Glasgow. Proceedings, Vol. xxxvi., 1904-5. a University. The Glasgow University Calendar for the year 1906-7. The University GorTiInceN—Konigliche Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften zu Gottingen. Nachrichten, Geschaftliche Mittheilungen, Heft 2,1905; Heft 1,1906. Mathematisch-physikalische Klasse, Heft 4, 5, 1905; Heft 1, 2, 1906. The Society Gratz—Naturwissenschaftliche Vereins fiir Steiermark. Mit- teilungen, Jahrgang 1995. ag HaarLeEM—Koloniaal Museum te Haarlem. Bulletin, No. 34, 1996. The Museum Musée Teyler. Archives, Série 2, Vol. 1x., Parts iii,, iv., 1905; Vol. x., Parts 1., 11., 1905-6. a Société Hollandaise des Sciences 4 Harlem. Archives Néer- landaises des Sciences Exactes et Naturelles, Série 2, ‘lome x., Liv. 5, 1905, Tome x1., Liv. 1 — 3, 1906. The Society Haxirax— Nova Scotian Institute of Science. Proceedings and Transactions, Vol. x1., Partsi.,ii., Sessions 1902-8, 1903-4. The Institute HamsurG—Deutsche Seewarte. Archiv, Jahrgang xxvitt., Nos. 1,2, 1905; Jahrgang xx1x., No. 1,1906. Ergebnisse der Meteorologischen Beobachtungen, Jahrgane xxvit., 1905 Jahresbericht, (28th) tiber die Tatigkeit der Deutschen Seewarte fiir das Jahr 19085. The Observatory Geographische Gesellschaft in Hamburg. Mitteilungen, Band xxr., 1906. The Society Naturhistorische Museum. Mitteilungen, Jahrgane xx1r., 1905. The Museum Hami.tton, (Ont.)—Hamilton Scientific Association. Journal and Proceedings, No. 21, Session 1904-5. The Association Hanover—Naturhistorische Gesellschaft zu Hannover. Jahres- bericht L. — Lrv., 1899 — 1904. The Society HEIpDELBERG—Naturhistorisch-Medicinische Vereins zu Heidel- berg. Verhandlungen, N.F., Band viir., Heft 2, 1905. as HE LsiInGFrors— Société des Sciences de Finlande. Observations publiées par l'Institut Météorologique Central, Vol. xrx., Observations Météorologiques en 1900. - Hosart—Mines Department. Report ofthe Secretary for Mines for the year ending 31 December, 1904. Report on North- west Coast Mineral Deposits, 1905. Report on the Mathinna Goldfield, Part i., 1906. The Progress of the Mineral Industry of Tasmania for the quarters ending September 30, December 31, 1905, March 31, June 30, 1906. The Department ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXXI1x. Honotutv H.I.— Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum of Polynesian Ethnology and Natural History. Memoirs, Vol. 11., Nos. 1, 2, 1906. Occasional Papers, Voi.11., No.4; Vol. rv., No. 1, 1906. The Museum InpIANAPOLIS Ind.—Indiana Academy of Science. Proceedings, 1904. The Academy JEFFERSON City, Mo.—Missouri Bureau of Geology and Mines. Biennial Report of the State Geologist to the 42nd and 43rd, General Assembly 1903-4. Preliminary Report on the Structural and Economic Geology of Missouri, 1900, Second Series, Vol. 1., 1908; Vol. 11., 1904; Vols. III., 1v., 1905. The Bureau JenA—Medicinisch Naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft. Jen- aische Zeitschrift, Band xu., N.F.,xxxu111., Heft 3, 4, 1905; Band xu1., N.F., xxxiv., Heft 1 - 4, 19uU6. The Society Kierr—Société des Naturalistes. Mémoires, Tome xx., Liv. 1, 1905. ” KoniasBerG—Konigliche Physikalisch-dkonomische Gesellschaft. Schriften, Jahrgang xuiv., 1904; Jahrgang xLv1., 1905, __,, LAUSANNE—Société Vaudoise des Sciences Naturelles. Bulletin, Serie 5, Vol. xu1,, No. 154, 1905. a Lrrps—Leeds Philosophical and Literary Society. Annual Reports, 84th and 85th, 1903-4, 1904-5. PP Lerezic—Fiirstlich Jablonowski’schen ELEN Jahres- bericht, Marz 1906. 5 Konigliche Sachsische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. Berichte uber die Verhandlungen, Band tv1., Part v., 1904; Band tvit., Parts i. -- vi., 1905; Band tviit., Parts i., ii., 1908. os Vereins fiir Erdkunde. Mitteilungen, 1904, 1905. An Lifer —Société Géologique de Belgique. Annales, Tome xxx!II., Liv. 3, 4, 1905-6; Tome xxx11l., Liv. 1, 2, 1906. a Lima—Ministerio de Fomento. Boletin del Cuerpo de Ingenieros de Minas del Peru, Nos. 25-39, 1905-6. Segunda Memoria que presenta el Director al Ministro de Fomento 1904-5. The Minister Lincoun (Nebr.)—American Microscopical Society. Transac- tions, Vol. xxv1., 1905. The Society University of Nebraska. Bulletin of the Agricultural Ex- periment Station, Nos. 76 - 80, 1908. The University Lonpon—Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland. Journal, Vol. xxxv., Jan. — June, July — December, 1905. The Institute Chemical News, Vol. xcit1., Nos. 2895 — 2405, 1905; Vol. xcritr., Nos. 2406 - 2431; Vol. xctrv., Nos. 2432 —2445,1906. The Editor Chemical Society. Journal, Vols. LXxxVII., Lxxxvill., Nos. 516 —518, and Suppl. No. 1905; Vols. Lxxx1x., xc., Nos. 519-527, 1906. Proceedings, Vol. xx1., Nos. 299, 300, 302, 1895; Vol. xx11., Nos. 303-313, 1906. The Society xl. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS, Lonpon—continued. Electrical Engineer, New Series Vol. xxxvi., Nos. 16 - 26, 1905; Vol. xxxvi1., Nos. 1-18, 20-26; Vol. xxxvut., Nos. 1 — 14, 1906. . The Editor Geological Society. Geological Literature added to the Library during the year ended December 31, 1905. List of Fellows, November 15th, 19V5. Quarterly Journal, Vol. uxt., Part iv., No. 244, 1905:; ‘Vol. Uxu., Parise iii., Nos. 245 — 247, 1906. The Society Institute of Chemistry of Great Britainand Ireland. A List of Official Chemical appointments held in Great Britain and Ireland, in India and the Colonies, 1906. Proceed- ings, Part 1i., 1895; Part 11.,1896; Partsi., i, 1898; Parts i., ii., 1899; Part ii.,1900; Part ii., 1902; Parts 1., 11., 111., 1908; Parts i.,i1., 313., 1904... Parts 1.2 1905; Parts i. li, 1906. Register and Proceedings (bound) for 1878, 1579, 1881-1893. Register I894-5, 1895-6, 1896-7, 1897-8, 1898-9, 1899-1900, 1900-1,1901-2, 1903, 1904, 1905, 1906. Regulations for the years 1903-4, 1904-5, 1905-6. The Institute Institution of Civil Engineers. Address of Sir Alexander Richardson Binnie, President 1905. Charter, Supple- mental Charters, By-Laws and List of Members, March, July, 1906. Minutes of Proceedings, Vol. cxix1., Part ii., Vol. cuxrr.. Part iv., 1903-5; Vol. cuxii1., Part) 1, Vol. cixiv., Part ii., 1905-6. Subject Index, Vols. cirx. —CLXIt., Session 1904-5. The Institution Institution of Mechanical Engineers. Proceedings, Parts il. —iv., 1905. Institution of Naval Architects) Transactions. Vol. xLvIt., Parts i., ii., 1905. Index, Vols. 1.—xuvr., 1860-1904. Iron and Steel Institute. Journal, Vol. uxviir., No. 2, 1905; Vol. uxrx., No. J], 1906. Rules and List of Members, 1906. The Institute Linnean Society. Journal, Botany, Vol. xxxv1., Neos. 255 - 256, 1905; Vol. xxxvit., Nos. 259, 260, 1905-6; Zoology, Vol. xxrx., Nos. 198, 194, 1906. Proceedings, Session 117, November 1904-— June 1905. List of Fellows 1905-6. The Society Meteorological Office. Meteorological Observations at Sta- tions of the Second Order 1901 [M.O.No. 178]. On the treatment of Climatological Observations by W. N. Shaw, se.D., F.RS. Report of the Meteorological Com- mittee for the year ending 31 March, 1906 [Official No. 183}. Report of the Meteorological Council for the year ending 3l March 1905. Seasons in the British Isles from 1878. The Beaufort Scale of Wind Force { Official No. Pharmaceutical Society of Great Britain. Calendar 1906. Pharmaceutical Journal, Vol. uxxv., Nos. 3495 - 3499, 1905. 39 a9 180]. The Office Mineralogical Society. Mineralogical Magazine, Vol. xiv., No. 65, 1906. The Society ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. xli, Lonpon—continued. ‘Physical Society of London. Proceedings, Vol. x1x , Parts Vll., Vill., 1965; Vol. xx., Parts 1., ii., 1906. The Society Quekett Microscopical Club. Journal, Ser. 2, Vol. 1x., Nos. 57, 58, 1995-6. The Club Royal Agricultural Society of England. Journal, Vol. uxvt., 1905. The Society Royal Astronomical Society. Monthly Notices, Vol, Lxv., No. 9 Supplementary No.; Vol. uxvi., Nos. 1 - 8, 1905-6. Memoirs, Vol. tvi., 1906. List of Fellows and Associates June 1906. “3 Royal College of Physicians. List of Fellows, Members, Extra-Licentiates and Licentiates 1906. The College Royal Economic Society. Economic Journal, Vol. xv., No. 60, 1905; Vol. xv1r., Nos. 61 - 63, 1906. Lhe Society Royal Geographical Society. The Geographical Journal, Vol. xxvi., Nos. 5, 6, 1905, Vol. xxvi., Nos. 1-6, Vol. xxvi1l., Nos. 1-4, 1906. < Royal Institution of Great Britain. Proceedings, Vol. xvir., Part ii., No. 98, 1904; Vol. xvii1., Part 1., No. 99, 1906. The Institution Royal Meteorological Society. Quarterly Journal, Vol. xxx1., No. 186, 1905; Vol. xxxi1,, Nos. 1387-139, 1906. List of Fellows, Feb. lst 1906. Meteorological Record, Vol. xxv., Nos. 97 — 99, 1905. The Society Royal Microscopical Society. Journal, Parts v., vi., Nos. 168, 169, 1905; Partsi., 1i., Nos. 170-178, 1906. ES Royal Sanitarv Institute of Great Britain. Journal, Vol. xxvi., Nos. 1O—12, 1905; Vol. xxvir., Nos. 1-9, 1906. The Institute Royal Society. Philosophical Transactions, Series A, Vol. ccov., 1906. Proceedings, Series B, Vol. uxxvi., Nos. B 512—514, 1995; Series B, Vol. uxxvu., Nos. B 515-B 521; Series B, Vol. uxxviir., Nos. B 522 - B 524, 19060; Series A, Vol. uxxvi., Nos. A 518, 514, 1905; Series A, Vol. pxxvir., No. A 515—A 520; Series A, Vol. LXxXvVIII., Nos. A 521-A 523, 1906. Reports of the Commission for the investigation of Mediterranean Fever, Part iv., 1906. Reports to the Evolution Committee, Report iii., 1906. Year Book, No. 10, 1906. The Society Royal Society of Literature. List of Fellows 1906. Trans- actions, Vol. xxvi., Part iv.; Vol. xxvir., Part 1., 1906. Royal United Service Institution. Journal, Vol. xurx., Nos. 332 —334, 1905; Vol. u., Nos. 385-343, 1906. Supple- 3) mentary Journal. The Institution Society of Arts. Journal, Vol. ti1., Nos. 2760-2764, 1905; Vol. tiv., Nos. 2765 — 2794, 2798 — 2811,1905-6. The Society War Office. Maps (1) Afghanistan, (2) Constantinople. Notes on the Geology of the Continent of Africa 1905. The Anglo-Egyptian Sudan, Vols. 1.,11.,1905. Intelligence Division Zoological Society of London. Proceedings, 1905, Vol. 11., Parts i., 11.; 1906, pp.1—462. List of Fellows to31 May 1906, The Society iy xii. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. Luseck—Geographische Gesellschaft und des Naturhistorische Museum. Mitteilungen, Series 2, Heft 20,1905. The Society Mapras—Kodaikanal and Madras Observatories. Annual Report of the Director for 1905. Bulletin, Nos. 2-6, 1905-6. The Director Madras Government Museum. Ethnographic Notes in Southern India by Edgar Thurston, 1906. The Museum Macpesurc—Museum fiir Natur-und Heimatkunde. Abhand- lungen und Berichte, Band 1., Heft 1, 1905. as MancHESTER—Conchological Society of Great Britain and Ireland. Journal of Conchology, Vol. x1., Nos. 10-12, 1906. The Society Manchester Geological and Mining Society. Transactions, Vol. xxviit., Part xxi,, Session 1903 - 1904. Fe Manchester Literary and Philosophical Society. Memoirs and Proceedings, Vol. o., Parts i.—ili., 1905 - 1906. s ManitaA—Department of the Interior. Bureau of Government Laboratories, Nos. 1, 2, 4-5, 7-9, 13-24, 29, 31 —36, (23440) (80167). Bureau of Science. Philippine Journal of Science, Vol. 1., Nos. 1—68, Supplements 1.1v. Eth- nological Survey Publications, Vol.1.; Vol. 11., Parts 1i,, 111.3; Vol. 1v., Part 1. The Department Marsure—Gesellschaft zur Beférderung der gesammten Natur- wissenschaften. Sitzungsberichte, Jahrgang 1905. The Society MeELBOURNE—Australasian Institute of Mining Engineers. Trans- actions, Vol. x1., 1906. The Institute Broken Hill Proprietary Co. Ltd. Reports and Statements of Account for half years ending 30 Nov. 1905 and 31 May, 1906, Reports of Forty First and Forty Second Half Yearly Ordinary General Meetings held 23 Feb. and 31 August, 1906. The Secretary Commonwealth of Australia, Patent Office. The Australian Official Journal of Patents, Vol. 111., Nos. 46—50, and Supplement, Parts B, C, D, 1905. The Australian Official Journal of ‘rade Marks, Vol. 1., No. 1, 1906. The Office Director of Education. Nature-Study—A Field Lesson at Werribee Gorge, Bacchus Marsh, 1906. The Director Field Naturalists’ Club of Victoria. The Victorian Naturalist, Vol. xxur., Nos. 8—12, 1905-6; Vol. xx111., Nos. 1-7, 1906. The Club Government Statist. Victorian Year-Book, 1904 (25th issue) Government Statist Mining Department. Annual Report of the Secretary for Mines and Water Supply for the year 1905. Bulletin of the Geological Survey of Victoria, No. 18. 1906. Reprint—The Economic Minera's and Rocks of Victoria by A. E. Kitson, F.a.s. The Department Observatory. Report (39th) of the Board of Visitors to the Observatory, 1 April 1904 to 31 March 1905. [he Observatory Public Library, Museums, and National Gallery of Victoria. . Address by the President, Henry Gyles ‘Turner, 21 April 1906. Catalogue of the exhibition of old, rare, and ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. xiii. MELBOURNE—continued. curious books, ete., held in commemoration of the 50th Anniversary of the opening of the Public Library of Victoria, 1906. Report of the Trustees for 1905. The Book of the Public Library, Museums, and National Gallery of Victoria, 1856-1906 by E. La Touche Arm- strong, M.A., LL.B., 1906. The Trustees Royal Society of Victoria. Proceedings, New Series, Vol. xvu., Part ii.; Vol. x1x., Part i., 1906. The Society University. Calendar 1906. Matriculation and Junior Com- mercial Examinations, December, 1905. The University Victorian Institute of Engineers. Proceedings, December 6th, 1905. The Institute Merxico—Instituto Geolédgico de México. Boletin, Nos. 20, 21, 1905. Parergones, Tomo 1., No. 9, 1905. * Observatorio Astronémico Nacional de Tacubaya. Anuario, Ano xxv1., 1906. The Observatary Sociedad Cientifica “‘Antonio Alzate.”” Memorias y Revista, Tomo xxt., Nos, 5 — 12,1904; Tomo xx11., Nos. | - 6, 1905. The Society. Mitan—Reale Istituto Lombardo di Scienze e Lettere. Rendi- conti, Serie 2, Vol. xxxvill,, Fasc. 5-16, 1905. The Institute Societa Italiana di Scienze Naturali e del Museo Civico di Storia Naturale in Milano. Atti, Vol. xuiv., Fasc. 3, 4; Vol. xuv., Fasc. 1, 2, 1906. The society MirFristp—Yorkshire Geological Society. Proceedings, New Series, Vol. xv., Part 111., 1905. 3 MissouLta—University of Montana. Bulletin, Nos. 39, 35, 1906. Che University Moprena—Regia Accademia di Scienze, Lettere ed Artiin Modena. Memorie, Serie 3, Vol. v., 1908. The Academy Mons—Société des Sciences, des Arts et des Lettres du Hainaut. Mémoires et Publications, Serie 6, Tome vir., 1905. The Society MontTEviprEo—Museo Nacional de Montevideo. Anales, Serie 2, Entrega ii., Seccion Historico-Filosofica; Tomo 11., Entrega i. The Museum Montreat— Natural History Society of Montreal. The Canadian Record of Science, Vol. 1x., No. 5, 1905. The Society Royal Society of Canada. Proceedings and Transactions, Second Series, Vol. x1., 1905. 35 Moscow—Société Impériale des Naturalistes de Moscou. Bulletin, N,S. Tome xrx., Nos. 1 - 3, 1905. aS MutuHouse—Société Industrielle de Mulhouse. Bulletin, Tome Lxxv., Aug. — Dec., 1905; Tome Lxxv1., Jan. — July, 1906. Programme des Prix a décerner en 1907. Résumé des Séances, Feb. April, May, 1906. 5 Municu—K. Bayerische Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Miinchen. Abhandlungen der math-phys. klasse, Pand xxu., Abth. 3, 1906. Sitzungsberichte, Heft 3, 1904; Heft 1-3, 1905; Heft 1, 1906. Pamphlets (2). The Academy xliv. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS Municu—continued, K. Bayerische Botanische Gesellschaft. Mitteilungen, Nos. 38 - 40, 1906. é The Society NapLrEs—Societa Africana d’ Italia. Bollettino, Anno xxIv., Fase. 10-12, 1905; Anno xxv., Fasc. 1-8, 1906. x Societa Reale di Napoli. Atti della Accademia delle Scienze Fis'che e Matematiche, Serie 2, Vol. x11.,1905. Rendi- conto, Serie 3, Vol. x1., Fase. 4-12, 1905; Vol. x11.,’ Fasc. 1 — 4, 1906. a Stazione Zoologica di Napoli. Mittheilungen, Band xvit., Heft 3, 4, 1905-6. : The Station NewcasTLe-upon-Tyne—Natural History Society of Northum- berland, Durham and Newcastle-upon-Tyne. ‘l'ransac- tions (New Series), Vol. 11., 1906. The Society North of England Institute of Mining and Mechanical Engineers. ‘l'ransactions, Vol. Liir., Part v., 1902-3; Vol. tv., Part v., and Annual Report, etc., 1904-5 ; Vol. Lv1., Parts i. — 111., 1905-6 and Annual Report etc. 1905-6. Report of the Committee upon Mechanical Coal-Cutting. Part ii , Heading Machines, 1905. The Institute. New Prymours—Polynesian Society. Journal, Voi. xiv., No. 4, 1905; Vol. xv., Nos. 1, 2, 1906. The Society New Yorx—» 95 + Standard sand and + bluestone dust or toppings. The results up to date are :— Bluestone Sand and Time. Sand. Dust. Bluestone Dust. 7 days ne 460 a2 o01 ae 464 28 4s es 631 on 647 Hef 639 3 months... 825 ce 801 he 787 Bie a J. $60 (.. 920 -2 2 eee ae F 911 ain 920 aA 869 toe. a ~=« 8850C~C«‘ ‘NN! OA ee Hach test is the average breaking strain of 4 briquettes. They were all made on the same day, and were treated exactly alike. In this and all other briquette tests the briquettes, after being moulded, stay in the moulds 24 hours in the air; the moulds are then removed, and the briquettes are placed in water, and remain immersed until tested. In this case the contractor was allowed to use $ sand and + bluestone dust in place of each part of sand, because by careful sieving it was found that the stone, as delivered, contained dust to the extent of one quarter of the sand specified. From the above figures, or from the diagram, it will be seen that bluestone dust is strongest throughout, except at three months. It should follow that the mixture of sand and dust is stronger than sand, but such is not the case; though at 7 and 28 days, and also at 6 and 12 months, there is practically no difference between the two. It is intended to continue this experiment up to 5 years. cae WASHING AND GRADING SAND FOR CONCRETE. XV. M.8.WS 4 S TENSILE STRENGTH IN LBS PER S@ IN “er2e | 3 6 9 T2 MAYS MONTHS The Melbourne and Sydney experiments should be accepted as conclusive proof of the superiority of bluestone dust to sand for use in concrete. It may be of interest to give the results of washing and otherwise preparing two samples of crushed sandstone at the Water and Sewerage Board’s testing room. XVI. W. E. COOK. Yellow Coloured Sample. Crushed sandstone, 729 cubic inches, weighed 37 ‘2ibs. Same sand washed, 668°25 __,, 3. oe Slime washed from 729 cubic inches 112 i Ps, 218. ae Lost in washing ae xan sie a: OZ The 34°2lbs. of washed sand consisted of— 3°8Ibs. of coarse sand caught on ... 400 mesh sieve. 706") -,, “standard”, . 900 23°3 ~,, fine 5, passed through 900 99 99 Lighter Coloured Sample. Crushed sandstone, 729 cubic inches, weighed 37°2 Ibs. Same sand washed, 658 = * oo Owen Slime washed from 729 cubic inches, 138 3 5 oo” Ge Lost in washing oe La hp i 0°08 5; The 33°8tbs. of washed sand consisted of— 3°18lbs. of coarse sand caught on ... 400 mesh sieve. 6°06 ,, standard ,, eer es!) 0)() x 24°56 4, fine 55 passed through 900 +8 That is, only about 20% of the washed material was stan- dard sand, or 18 of the original sample. And yet there does not appear to be much gain in strength by washing crushed sandstone, as the following experiments show :— Briquettes made with standard sand, unwashed and washed samples of same crushed stone broke as follows: Standard. Unwashed. Washed. 7 days-: 0 ~-213° —6 e Dh. az 336 ae 316 a 333 Thus washed sand proved superior to unwashed by 53+ at both 7 and 28 days, and inferior to steadard by 3% at 7 days, and less than 1% at 28 days. These results are the average of seven tests. Again, taking theaverage results of 21 tests of unwashed crushed | WASHING AND GRADING SAND FOR CONCRETE. XVII. sandstone, as compared with standard sand, the following figures were obtained :— Standard. Unwashed. 7 days ie 220) ea 212 2a re we 329 e 316 or the unwashed samples proved only about 4% inferior in strength to the standard sand, bothat 7 and at 28 days. It may be mentioned that drift sand, from Bourke Street, Surry Hills, and from Double Bay is far inferior to crushed sandstone, either washed or unwashed, and therefore to standard sand, as the following table shows : Neutral Double Surry Nepean. Nepean. George’s Bay. Bay. Hills. Standard. Fine. Coarse. River. Sandstone. Drift. Drift. @@ayse foo: 162) 200.) 1672) 180), 16205) 158 eoistiy 55 may Joo mal Ole a2468 1 96a ZI 2h are 6 months... 353 . 263 320 232 341 208 214 12 oe eee ood 200) = S00) 230) 7 a228 19S 22T The mixtures for the above were all made with the same cement on the same day. It will be seen that Neutral Bay crushed sandstone proved only slightly inferior to the standard, while two samples of drift sand were much weaker. To test the strength of briquettes made with coarse and fine samples of sand, and obtained from same place, six tests were made in all from three different places. In every case, both at 7 and 28 days, the coarse samples gave the better results, the averages being— Coarse. Fine. 7 days ose 213lbs. sic 174 lbs. Zo. 5, ae 271 lbs. as 248Ibs. so that, other things being equal, the word ‘“‘ coarse’’ should be included in the specification for sand for con- crete, unless “ carefully graded ”’ are the words used. These results were strictly in accordance with what might have been anticipated, from the fact that if all the 2—June 20, 1906. XVIII. W. E. COOK. particles in the one case were of a certain diameter, and in the other case half that diameter, the interstices in the sand contained in a fixed volume would be the same in both cases, but the surface in the latter case would be six times as great as in the former. Turning back to the figures showing volume of slime washed out of samples of crushed sandstone, it will be seen that the resulting slime washed out was 17% of the original volume, though the washed sand was 91% of that volume, taking the mean of the two sets of figures. The material washed away from crushed sandstone we commonly call pipeclay, a material that is detrimental to sand, but at the same time it evidently serves to fill up the interstices, as, adding 125 cubic inches to 663 cubic inches results in a mixture only 729 cubic inches in volume in place of 788 cubic inches. The slight gain in strength obtained by washing crushed sandstone would probably be increased considerably if, in place of 125 cubic inches of slime washed out, we added an equal bulk of fine sharp sand, so as to have a graded mixture of good material, equal in bulk to the original sample. It is quite clear that the clay and loam mentioned inthe American experiments are better materials than the slime washed out of crushed sandstone, as washing the latter material clearly improves it, though only to the extent of 4 to 7 per cent. For most purposes the trouble and expense would more thancounter balance this gain, but for works where the strength of the concrete is important, washing should be specified in the case of crushed sand- stone. In August, 1901, the Engineer-in-Chief for the Water and Sewerage Board had experiments made to determine the voids in bluestone and sandstone of certain gauges, and in certain mixtures of them. In the hope that the WASHING AND GRADING SAND FOR CONCRETE. XIX, results may be of some use to members, the author has included them in the paper. The instructions given, and the results obtained, are tabulated below. TESTS OF VOIDS IN BROKEN METAL. Crown-street Depot, 27/8/01. Material for Tests.—Bluestone metal to be of a size to pass freely, with its largest dimension, through a ring 14 inches diameter, and screened through a_ sieve of meshes 4 inch apart. Sandstone metal to be of a size to pass freely, with its largest dimension, through a ring 2 inches diameter, and screened through a sieve of meshes _ + inch apart. Method of Testing.—Hach test shail be made three times in succession, and the mean of the three tests shall be considered correct. 1. Fill gauge with 15 inch metal, then fill with water accurately measured. . . Fill gauge with 2 inch metal, then fill with water accurately measured. bo 3. Mix 80% of 2 inch metal with 20; of 14 inch metal. Bee OO) 45, Lk 4 “155 5 OA og ” da 95 00% 59 2 ae a 40 4a 38S “o fae OO. ,0 le | 5, oo ” ene U. s5 a A aa MO so Ie “3 In each case place the metal in gauge and fill with water, accurately measuring the same. 8. Mix as much sand as possible with the gauged quantity of 2 inch metal, without increasing its bulk. 9. Mix as much sand as possible with the gauged quantity of 15 inch metal, without increasing its bulk. 10. Mix as much sand as possible with 50% of 2 in. and 50% of 15 inch, without increasing its bulk. 11. Interstitial space in sand used. Gauge box for metal measured 4 ft.,x 4ft. x 1ft. 6in. Gauge box for sand measured 1ft. x 1ft. x 1ft. XX. W. E. COOK. TESTS OF VOIDS IN BLUESTONE AND SANDSTONE. 1. Water in 14 inch bluestone = 44°07. 2.) 5, 3, 2anch sandstones. 3501s hy 5» 95 mixture, 80% 2 inch sandstone and 20% 14 inch bluestone = 35°83*). AP ie atc 8 », 20% 2 inch sandstone and 80% 1% inch bluestone = 41°3%, ae, ah ae os < 60% 2 inch sandstone and 40% 14 inch bluestone = 37°24%, BH fk ge a 407> 2 inch sandstone and 60% 14 inch bluestone = 38°48%. (ee <* 50)» 2 inch sandstone and 50” 14 inch bluestone = 36°49). 8. Sand in 2 inch sandstone, 33°67%. 9. ,, 14 inch bluestone, 36°31%. 10. ,, 50% 2in. sandstone & 50% 14 in. bluestone, 32°14%. 11. Water in sand used, 33°1%). Perhaps it will not be out of place to quote an article by Lieutenant Sankey, published in ‘‘ Mngineering,’’ 1st Sept., — 1905, on the subject of voids in mixtures and the true proportions necessary to produce the best results, apart from the quality of the materials. LIEUTENANT ©. HK. P. SANKEY, R.E. ** Hngineering,’’ Ist Sept., 1905. Lieutenant Sankey proposes that the specification for concrete might be worded somewhat as follows :— ‘“The percentage of voids in the selected aggregate is to be measured, and sand and cement are to be added to make a sufficient cement mortar of the quality x sand to 1 of cement, to fillthe voids, + 20 percent. Thus the procedure before starting to make concrete would be as follows :— | 1. Settle upon the aggregate to be employed, both as to its nature and its gauge, WASHING AND GRADING SAND FOR CONCRETE, XXI. 2. Measure the amount of contained sand in the aggre- gate, and this having been removed, determine the proportion of voids; observe also the quantity of water absorbed. 3. Choose the quality of cement to be employed in the work. 4, Calculate how much cement, sand, and water will be required for some definite amount of the aggregate—say a cubic yard—making allowance for the sand in the aggre- gate and the water absorbed. do. Have boxes or measures made to contain the calcu- lated amounts of cement and sand and water. Inthe case of water a margin, of say 10 to 20 per cent. overplus, should be allowed. The following is a short description of a method for determining the voids, etc., in an aggregate :— Obtain some water-tight receptacle with an arrangement at the bottom for letting water drain off. The size is immaterial, but the larger it is the more accurate will be the experiment, but also more difficult will be the apparatus to handle. Somewhere in the neighbourhood of half a cubic yard will be convenient. Call this the “ tank.”’ Now find how many times (say 7) some smaller receptacle, which may be called the bucket, is contained in the tank, which is most conveniently done by filling the tank with water, one bucketfulatatime. The capacity of the bucket need not be determined, but it can be called q. Hence the capacity of the tank isuq. After letting off the water fill the tank with dry aggregate, without removing the contained sand. Now fill up the tank with water, and suppose it holds just w bucketsful before overflowing, sufficient time being allowed for the aggregate to absorb the water. Let off the water and fill up again, and say that the number of bucketsful is x. XXII. W. E. COOK. Now completely empty the tank, and fill again with dry aggregate from which the sand has been screened, care being taken to pack the aggregate exactly as before. Again fill up with water, this time with y bucketsful (giving time for absorption), then let off the water, and fill again with 2 bucketsful. From the data thus obtained the following deductions can be made:—Voids in nq cubic feet of wet aggregate, free from sand = zq cubic feet. Therefore the aggregate has 100 “ per cent. of voids. Water absorbed by dry aggregate, free from sand, = (y—2) q cubic feet, and therefore 100 ae is the percentage of water absorbed. Contained sand in nq cubic feet of aggregate is (e—x) q cubie feet, and therefore 100 See is the percentage of contained sand. The actual quantity of cement, sand and water ean be obtained by inspection from diagram, com- bined with simple calculations. Thus, suppose an aggregate has 15 of sand, and when freed from sand has 40% of voids, and that it absorbs 15% of water, and that the concrete is to contain 1 of cement to 3 of sand, from diagram it will be seen that to produce 1 cubic foot of mortar of this quality, °3 cubic feet of cement, ‘9 cubic feet of sand, 1°35 gallons of water are needed. Further, 1 cubic yard, or 27 cubic feet of aggregate, requires 1°2 x 27 xX ‘4 = 12°96 cubic feet of mortar to fill voids and give 20% over. Required cement = 12°96 xX *3 = 3°89 cubic feet per cubic yard of aggregate. Required water for mortar 3 pee 12°96 x 1°35 = 17°50] — ee bsorbed OF 80) ores ” ae 15 lons to allow yA ae aa x 64+ = 25°3| for waste. GALLONS OF WATER REQUIRED FOR f CUB. FT OF MORTAR WASHING AND GRADING SAND FOR CONCRETE, XXIII. LIE OT. SANKEY &% > So S 4 LUBIL FEET OF CEMENT §¢ SAND REQ“UIRED FOR | CUB. F7 OF MORTAR Or PROPORTIONS OF SANZ TO / GF CEMENT ‘ Ae oi Pe XXIV. W. E. COOK. Required sand 12°96° x °S == 11-6 ) 15 , r = 7°61 cubic ft. x = — 4 100 27 4°05 4 The quantities for any other proportions can readily be found. In conclusion the author wishes to thank Mr. Thwaites, M. Inst. c.H., Hngineer-in-Chief Metropolitan Board of Works, Melbourne, and Mr. Smail, o. mst.c.z., HEngineer-in-Chief, Water and Sewerage Board, Sydney, for their kindness in placing at his disposal the information given in the paper concerning the experiments made in Melbourne and Sydney respectively. | Exhibits of standard sand, crushed sandstone washed, slime washed from same, Surry Hiils sand, also broken briquettes made with bluestone dust, and with mixtures in lieu of sand, were placed upon the table. NOTES ON WHARF CONSTRUCTION, SYDNHY HARBOUR. By H. D. WALSH, B.A.I., T.C. Dub.,. « netiee! [With Plates IX.- XI.] [ Delivered to the Engineering Section of the Royal Society of N. S. Wales, 1Sth July, 1996. } As the wharf construction and the accompanying shipping appliances in any port is of course governed by the class of ships likely to visit that port, I propose in the first instance to give a brief sketch of the growth of the trade in the port and the steps taken from time to time to provide for the berthing and discharge of vessels trading to Sydney. The earlier records of the Colony do not furnish any figures WHARF CONSTRUCTION, SYDNEY HARBOUR. XXV. of the shipping which visited the various ports in the year 1800, but in 1822 the ports of New South Wales, which then represented the whole of Australia, were visited by 71 vessels of 22,824 tons in the aggregate. In 1830 the number increased to 157 vessels of 31,225 tons; by the year 1840 the shipping had increased to 709 vessels, with an aggregate tonnage of 178,958 tons. The records show that the shipping entered at the port of Sydney in 1860 numbered 852 of an aggregate tonnage of 292,213. In 1870 numbered 1,006 of an aggregate tonnage of 385,161 1880 ee On . i 837,738 1890 oe 1 ae i » 1,644,539 [04 (00 San a Bey KS a > «2,716,651 1901 op ELGRYE x Oe 2.On oust fegoen 3799 i Geer. (908°. -6,093 i , 4,226,954 1904-2 7-554 iy 847548550 1905 4, ~=—- 9,626 Z a OS TOME From this it will be seen that in 45 years the shipping entering the port of Sydney had increased from 852 vessels, of an aggregate tonnage of a little more than a quarter of a million, to the very large number of 9,626 with an aggre- gate tonnage of over five and two-thirds million, thus making the port of Sydney one of the ten largest shipping centres of the world. The increase in the size of vessels visiting the port is also remarkable, and is of course the result of an evolution which has taken place the world over in the construction of both cargo and passenger carriers. In the year 1870 a vessel of 3,000 tons was regarded as exceptional, and very few steamers of that size were engaged anywhere except between Liverpool and New York. Almost up to the middle of the seventies practically the whole of the over-sea trade of Sydney was carried in wooden sailing ships, ranging from a length of 180 feet, to XXVI. H. D. WALSH. the then considered monster the ‘‘Sobraon,’’ 272 feet long. These vessels to the number of ten to fifteen at a time, used to lie principally round the Circular Quay parallel with the shore. Though Sydney Harbour used to be described as an ideal port, with deep water right up to the shore, that belonged to a shipping era prior to 1860, for the fine clipper ships of the sixties could not come within 50 or 60 feet of the wall at the Circular Quay. They were therefore moored some distance off with a network of chains, and a heavy staging, often 70 feet long, was rigged from the Quay wall to the side of the ship. These stages were built of a pair of piles with 6 inch by 6 inch bearers lashed crosswise underneath and 6 inch by 2 inch planks laid on the bearers. A donkey engine and winch stood on the shore, and the cargo was hoisted out of the hold, swung over to the rail and slid ashore on the staging. There were very few cargo sheds at that time, and it was con- sequently necessary to cart the goods away from the quay as quickly as they were landed. In the year 1870 the wharfage accommodation of the port consisted principally of a stone sea-wall on the eastern and southern sides of Circular Quay, small timber wharves on the western side as far as Campbell’s Wharf, and an irregular stone wali from Dawes to Miller’s Point. Beyond the Gas Works in Darling Harbour were the A.S.N. Com- pany’s Jetties, about 150 feet long; the North Coastal wharves; the I.LS.N. Company’s Wharf; the Hunter River Company’s and several other small jetties, all devoted to the coastal and intercolonial trade. An era was marked in the shipping annals of the port with the advent of the iron ship. The limitations of timber construction had been a serious bar to the growth of the size of ships, but this having been removed by the adoption of iron construction, great strides were rapidly made. Of WHARF CONSTRUCTION, SYDNEY HARBOUR. XXVII. course the changes did not at once effect so remote a port as Sydney. But inthe early seventies the first four-masted vessel, the “* Macgregor,”’ arrived. She was an iron steamer 300 feet long, and for a time remained an object of wonder. She was followed shortly afterwards by the ‘‘Mikado,”’ 386 ft. long. These two vessels were engaged to run the English Mail service via San Francisco, with Sydneyas the terminus, Melbourne being then the terminus of the P. & O. Mail line. When the ‘‘Macgregor’’ and *‘ Mikado”’ arrived, there was not a wharf in Sydney at which they could be properly berthed. They used to lie on the west side of Miller’s Point and discharge the small quantity of cargo they carried over the usual long stages, or by means of lighters. The ‘‘Macgregor’’ and ‘‘Mikado’’ were soon followed by the “‘Tartar,’? ‘““Whampoa,’’ and ‘“‘Mongol,’”’ and it became clear in 1874 that some steps would have to be taken at once to remodel the shipping accommodation of the port. On one occasion the ‘‘ Whampoa”’ took the ground at Dibbs’ Wharf, and it was generally considered that she was much too large for the facilities afforded by this port. On the 25th of June, 1874, a Select Committee of the House was appointed to inquire into the wharfage accom- modation andreport thereon. At that period the wharfage was practically all private property, and the foreshores not having been laid out upon any comprehensive system, the difficulty in the way of keeping the berthing accom- modation abreast of the times began at an early date to manifest itself. The chief disadvantage lay in the numerous small separate holdings which prevented proper access from the shore, and caused the projects of one owner to seriously interfere with those of another as far as the use of the waterway for jetties was concerned. It is interesting to note the opinions regarding the future shipping requirements of the port as brought out in the XXVIII. H. D. WALSH. evidence given before the Select Committee. Schemes were advocated by the following gentlemen, Messrs. H. O. Moriarty, the thea Hngineer-in-Chief to the Public Works Department; Norman Selfe; J. Musson and Company and Thomas Woore. It is apparent from some of the state- ments made, that while the several schemes advocated by these gentlemen appeared at the time unduly extensive and costly, the enormous shipping developments that were shortly to follow, were more nearly anticipated by Mr. Selfe than by any of his contemporaries. Mr. Moriarty for instance, when giving evidence before the Committee said:—‘‘On the western side of the Circular Quay there will be also two berths for vessels of that length (viz., 380 feet) opposite the Commissiarat Stores; so that by this arrangement we can have four berths capable of taking in the largest ships that have ever visited this port or are likely to visit it.”’ Mr. Selfe, who appeared to stand alone in his opinions, advocated larger berths sufficient if neces- sary, to berth the “Great Eastern’”’ should she come here.’’ It will thus be seen that very few engineers or persons interested in shipping, even at so late a date as 1874, appeared to realize the vast increase which within a very few years was to take place in shipping, or the necessity for making adequate provision for its accommo- dation. In the year 1877 the arrival of the ‘‘ Lusitania,’’ the first Orient steamer, commenced a second era in the shipping history of the Port of Sydney. From this year the growth in the size of the vessels coming here became more and more rapid. The “‘Lusitania’’ was followed by the other larger Orient, P. and O, and German liners, the largest of which did not far exceed 6,000 tons. The arrival in 1897 of the Norddeutscher Lloyd’s steamer ‘‘ Barbarossa’’ of 10,800 tons, was a great advance, and marked another step in the WHARF CONSTRUCTION, SYDNEY HARBOUR. XXIX. progress of the port, and being closely followed by others of similar tonnage, and of the Liverpool White Star liners of 12,000 tons, showed the necessity of at once providing Suitable berthing accommodation for this class of vessel. The result was the construction of the extensive wharves at the east side of Woolloomooloo, completed in 1901. The fine wharf 1,280 feet long at Miller’s Point, for the berthing of the two White Star liners, and the rearrangement of the west side of Circular Quay so as to provide a wharf 1,000 feet long for the Norddeutscher Lloyd Steamers; these latter wharves were completed by the Harbour Trust Commissioners in 19038, and in 1905 a jetty 500 feet long and 150 feet wide was constructed at Pyrmont for the wheat trade. This jetty will be extended to 1,000 feet long © when required. Contemporarily with the advent of these large vessels there has been a great increase in the. size of all vessels engaged in both over-sea and coastal trade. Ocean tramps of 8,000 and 9,000 tons are how common enough, and even in the coastal and New Zealand trades, some of the vessels now range from 4,000 to 6,000 tons, whereas four or five years ago the largest was not much over 3,000 tons. This large increase in the size of steamers engaged in the New Zealand and Inter-State trade has necessitated the re- arrangement and enlargement of the majority of the jetties in Darling Harbour, and during the last few years many of the old structures have been removed and replaced by more up-to-date berths. It will thus be seen that the requirements of the port as a shipping centre have been revolutionised within a single decade. Where formerly jetties 300 feet long with 80 to 90 feet of waterway between them sufficed, these are now quite inadequate for the accommodation of the present Class of over-sea ship. On all sides we find the tendency XXX. H. D. WALSH. is to increase the length and tonnage of both cargo and passenger over-sea carriers; only last week it was an- nounced that the Commonwealth Government had accepted a tender which provided for a line of steamers with a minimum tonnage of 11,000, to carry our mails between England and Australia in 636 hours, and it is also rumoured that another line of large cargo steamers will shortly enter the Australian trade. The limit of size in ocean going vessels has not, however, been reached yet by a consider- able margin. The largest vessels at present visiting this port do not exceed 13,000 tons. Vessels are now being built for the Atlantic Service which reach upwards of 30,000 tons displacement and measure over 700 feet in length. Besides these monsters, the 13,000 ton White Star Liners which now come here are comparatively small. Everything points towards another enormous advance in the size of vessels for which it will be necessary in the near future to provide berthing accommodation in Sydney Harbour. The longer the voyage, the greater the economy of the large vessel over the small one. The 30,000 tonner can be worked more cheaply per ton than two 15,000 ton ships. It is evident, then, in view of these probabilities, that we must look forward in our wharf construction to being able to meet such emergencies. With these facts before us, it is difficult to realise what class of berthing accommodation will be required 10 or 15 years hence; certainly the records of the past should warn engineers engaged in harbour construction, that, while the necessity for economy may make it impossible to do more than pro- vide for present requirements, wharfage systems should be so designed as to allow of very large extensions and expan- sion in the future. Wharf Construction.—The demolition of a number of old wharves and jetties, many of which were erected 30 to 40 WHARF CONSTRUCTION, SYDNEY HARBOUR. XXXI. years ago, has given me an exeeptionally good opportunity of closely observing the behaviour of the various classes of timber and other material used in their construction. It may have been noticed that timber for the construction of wharves and jetties still holds its own in Sydney, and it might be thought, seeing the extent to which iron and steel had displaced timber in ship building, that the same thing wouid have happened before this, in wharf construction. It might also be asked, if the wooden ship is obsolete, why not the wooden wharf also? In Hurope there is some point in this question, because suitable timber is scarce andit is being rapidly superseded by steel, by re-inforced concrete struc- tures, and by stone quay walls. In Sydney Harbour there are very few solid quay walls, the largest being the sea- wall at Darling Island and the privately owned wall at the Sydney Collieries, Balmain; there is also one of Monier sheet piling at the foot of Market Street. All the remain- ing public wharves having been constructed of timber. The reason for this preference for timber construction becomes evident as soon as the excellence of the material and the prime cost of construction are considered. In no other part of the world is to be found so plentiful a supply of good and suitable hardwood as in the forests of Australia. Owing to this fact, as long as the timber supply is available, wharf construction is more rapid, cheaper and more adapt- able than under any other system. During the iron age, that is before the present steel age, iron wharf construction was tried in Port Jackson. The iron wharf at the head of Darling Harbour erected by the Public Works Department in 1874, is a good example of this class. The high cost of construction and the very heavy cost of maintenance to protect it from corrosion, was however sufficient to prevent other wharves of similar design being constructed. XXXII. H. D WALSH. The leading objects to be considered in planning a wharf or a jetty, are sufficient deck area in relation to berthing space, combined with requisite strength and economy of cost. The earning power of a wharfis governed chiefly by two things: (a) the length of berthing space, (b) the capital cost; and itis in a proper adjustment of these two elements to one another, that the skill and forethought of the engineer become manifest. The commercial value of wharves and jetties in any part of the world can be fairly well compared on this basis. Regarding the cost of timber wharves and jetties per lineal foot and per square foot, no reliable rule can be laid down, as so much depends on the conditions of the foreshore, the amount of dredging, rock excavation, depth of the water, and the materials used. Piles.—In timber wharf constructions the first consider- ation is a selection of the piles. This of course brings up the question of protection against marine borers. Sheathing with yellow metal, which practically doubles the cost of the piles, has not been so successful in point of durability, in recent years as it used to be, as I shall presently show. Nearly all the old private wharves from the head of Darling Harbour to Circular Quay were built of unsheathed turpen- . tine piles of from 8 inches to 12 inches diameter. Though the exact dates of erection in some instances are not obtainable, the majority of them had been standing about 30, and one or two even 40 years. They were generally of light construction, having been built to suit the require- ments of the time. It is interesting to note, that had it not been for the great increase in tonnage of ships in recent years, several of these old wharves might have been repaired and made serviceable for a few years more. Naturally some of the many piles drawn were found to be entirely crippled, but an examination showed that such were usually not turpentine timber. WHARF CONSTRUCTION, SYDNEY IIARBOUR. XXXIII. I exhibit some sections cut from piles drawn from what used to be called *‘Smith’s Wharf,’’ Miller’s Point, which has been replaced by a fine new wharf 1,200 feet long. These piles from outside indications when standing appeared to be amongst the most damaged of those inthe wharf. The sections were taken from the worst looking portions of the piles, usually the two or three feet about low water mark. In three instances it will be seen that while the sapwood had entirely disappeared, having evidently been destroyed by Sphaeroma and Limnoria terebans, the timber itself is as sound as the day it went into place, only one of the three sections shows Teredo holes, and that not more than ten small ones, which would not materially weaken the pile. The fourth section, which as you see, is completely riddled with holes, is not turpentine, and has been classed as iron- bark. It may be added that about 80% of the old turpentine piles which were recently drawn from Smith’s Wharf after a service varying up to 30 years, have been used over again for various purposes, such as sleepers for cargo shed floors, repairs to old wharves, etc. I may remark that the water in the vicinity of Miller’s Point is in the line of the tidal current, and has always. been comparatively free from sewage matter, so that pollution of the water can have exercised very little influence in preserving the piles from marine borers. Touching upon more modern experience, I recently demolished a jetty in Woolloomooloo Bay, which had been standing 20 years. The piles were of unsheathed turpentine and proved to be so sound, that I used them again in additions to other wharves, such as Jones Brothers’ coal wharf, Gillespie’s wharf, etc. These piles showed only a few Teredo holes in the sapwood, and a little erosion at and below low water mark due toSphaeroma. The water of Woolloomooloo Bay is of course out of the tidal current, 3—July 18, 1906. XXXIV. H. D. WALSH. and has until recently, contained a considerable amount of sewage matter. It has been my experience that where the salt water is fouled to any great extent with sewage such as used to be the case at Woolloomooloo and at the head of Darling Harbour, before the low level sewerage scheme was brought into use, there is little or no danger to be apprehended from marine borers, as they do not seem to be able to live in water contaminated by sewage, although it is well known that the Teredo is more destructive in clean brackish water than in pure salt water. I recently drew some turpentine spring piles at the Circular Quay, driven twelve years ago; apart from a few Teredo holes in the sapwood, the timber was otherwise quite sound, and I used the piles again in the same position. The water in the vicinity used to be impregnated to a considerable extent with sewage matter. Apart from destruction by marine borers, turpentine piles are very durable and might be awarded a life of from 30 to 40 years. From these and similar experiences which as you see are based on the test of a good many years, it appears certain that turpentine piles, unsheathed, are able to resist to a reasonable extent the attacks of marine borers in the latitude of Sydney. A little further north and in the Tropics I have no such faith in their immunity. I have often remarked that of the total number of tur- pentine piles in a wharf, several, (say about 10%) will suffer badly from attack by marine borers, sometimes to the extent of complete destruction, while at the same time the others remain practically untouched. There are several possible explanations of this, amongst which I suggest the following :— (1) A pile driven when green may conceivably, by retain- ing its sap, resist marine borers more effectually than one driven when dry. WHARF CONSTRUCTION, SYDNEY HARBOUR. XXXV,. (2) The season of the year at which the tree is felled may exercise an important influence through the amount of sap in the tree at the time of felling. (3) The soil and latitude in which the trees are grown undoubtedly exercise a difference, but I have not sufficient data to specialise beyond the fact that there appear to be two kinds of turpentine tree, one having a thick and the other a thin bark. (4) Turpentine piles are usually driven with the bark on, as the condition of the bark plays an important part in the preservation of the pile, those cut in summer retain the bark better than those cut in winter. Piles cut and hauled off without being allowed to lie for a couple of weeks on the ground suffer damage very easily to the bark. All turpentine piles should be allowed to remain on the ground long enough for the bark to become attached before being handled. In Sydney Harbour, if not in other waters equally, the most serious ravages of marine borers are usually confined to the two or three feet about low water mark, and there are reasons to believe that in turpentine piles the damage is caused to a greater extent than is geuerally supposed by the Limnoria and Sphaeroma. There are instances in which years after a turpentine pile has been eaten through at low water mark by the Sphaeroma, the stump on being drawn has been found to be comparatively sound excepting perhaps for a few Teredo holes. My opinion of the value of turpentine as a Teredo, Sphae- roma and Limnoria resisting timber in Sydney Harbour has received such confirmation that I have recently built several wharves of unsheathed turpentine piles, amongst which may be mentioned Dalgety’s White Star Wharf at Miller’s Point, 1,200 feet long by 40 feet wide, Howard Smith’s Jetty 300 by 90 feet, the new Railway Jetty 500 by 150 feet, Tyser’s XXXVI. H. D WALSH. Wharf and others, and I confidently look forward to a life of 30 years for these wharves. Without taking into con- sideration the piles in the numerous small jetties and private structures, or those used in sheet piling along the fore- shores (numbering probably 3,000), there are standing in Sydney Harbour some 7,000 unsheathed turpentine wharf piles ; of these I have driven over 2,600 during the past 5 years. The majority of the remaining 4,400 have been standing from 20 to 30 years. In turpentine timber it is evident we possess a highly valuable element of wharf construction, which should be made the most of as long as it is procurable at a reasonable price. I may here mention that with one exception, all the wharves in Circular Quay and Woolloomooloo are con- structed of ironbark piles sheathed with yellow metal. These were constructed some years ago at a time when yellow metal could be relied upon as a safe protection for the piles, but as will be shown later on in this paper, suflicient reliance cannot now be placed in the metal pro- curable in this State, to warrant its use in this way. I regard ironbark when sheathed as the most durable of all our timbers for piles. Some time ago we took up the old Pyrmont Bridge, the piles of which were of ironbark sheathed with Muntz metal, and had been standing in salt water for 48 years, practically the whole of the piles which measure about 50 feet in length were sound, and I have driven them again in the construction of the new Pyrmont Bridge Wharf. The metal sheathing was upon the whole in bad condition, having disappeared in patches. But, owing probably to the amount of sewage in the water marine borers had not injured the timber to any appreciable extent. What remained of the sheathing was fairly good and testified to the good quality of the metal, as may be seen by the sample submitted. The heads of the piles for WHARF CONSTRUCTION, SYDNEY HARBOUR. XXXVII. about 18 inches down from the tenon were more or less decayed through the lodgement of organic matter in the crevices. If this had been prevented by weathering the tops of the piles or covering them with metal caps, it is probable that even this small deterioration would not have taken place. Apart from destruction by marine borers, ironbark piles, if protected at the head might be awarded a probable ‘life of from 60 to 70 years. I exhibit a section cut from one of these piles. The sample shows no deterioration whatever after its immersion for 48 years in salt water. Borers.—Having now described at some length the behaviour and durability of various piles examined in Sydney Harbour, a brief notice of the piles greatest enemies, the borers, may be of interest. In Sydney Harbour there are at least three kinds of borers which destroy unprotected timber piles. First in importance on account of the rapidity of its work, is the Teredo or ship worm. It attains to a considerable size, and when it fastens upon a class of timber to its taste, completely riddles it in a very short time. After the ship worm come the Limnoria and the Sphaeroma, the former is about the size of a grain of rice and bores the wood out into a minute honeycomb. It appears to have a decided predilection for soft wood, and is not a very serious menace to the timbers usually used for piles. The Sphaeroma is a larger creature, and in no way resembles either of the other borers. It does not appear to eat into the wood very deeply, but rather erodes the surface into small depressions which eventually run into one another. In time, with the assistance of the Limnoria, it would undoubtedly fret a pile right through, I think it is owing to the action of this creature on the surface that the Teredo holes become eventually visible, because the opening to a Teredo hole upon the surface is very small and not readily noticed. For further informa- XXXVIII. H. D. WALSH. tion on marine borers I might refer to a valuable paper by Mr. C. Hedley, F.L.s.*. I exhibit several specimens of the various borers; I have been unable to procure any large specimen of the Teredo, but may mention that in the brackish waters of the Mvyall Lakes and on some of the northern rivers I have seen Teredo quite 6 feet long and nearly three-quarters of an inch in diameter. The hard shell head which is said to act as a clutch to keep him up — to his work is an interesting tool. It will be seen that the Sphaeroma greatly resembles the common or garden wood- louse, and [am informed that it belongs to the same family. Yellow Metal.—The general experience of engineers during the last six or eight years has been that yellow metal sheathing is not as durable as it used to be. The sample taken from a pile of the old Pyrmont Bridge which has been immersed in sea-water for 48 years, though worn through in places is otherwise sound metal, fairly flexible, and polishes brightly. I have seen other samples propor- tionately good taken from piles in some of our coastal harbours which have been standing in the salt water for upwards of 25 years. On the other hand the sheathing of both vessels and piles with yellow metal has during the last few years been attended in many instances with conspicuous failure. Information of similar experiences has also come to me from Queensland and other States, and I am informed that complaints have latterly been so wide-spread that they have reached the manufacturers in England from all parts of the world. The manufacturers have stated that they are unable to afford any explanation of this sudden and rapid deterioration. Chemical analysis shows that the zinc in the alloy almost entirely disappears, leaving a brittle cellular copper skeleton. It has been suggested that the modern electrolytic process in the production of copper 1 Journ. Austr. Assoc. Adv. Science, Vol. viit. WHARF CONSTRUCTION, SYDNEY HARBOUR. XXXIX. whereby chemically pure copper is produced may have something to do with the rapid corrosion. Advices from Hngland recommended the trial of Navy brass, a sheathing made by the Muntz firm, and which consists of Muntz metal with 1% of tin added to harden it. This alloy being hard does not exfoliate on the surface like Muntz metal, and therefore fouls much more rapidly in sea-water. This however, is not an objection for pile sheathing. Navy brass is a little more costly than ordinary yellow metal. Jam unable to afford any reliable informa- tion as to its durability, as it has only been recently placed on the market. I have heard however that it has shown but little superiority over the older brands. Coating the inside surface of the metal (that which goes next the pile) with coal tar has been found to protect the metal from corrosion set up by the juices from the wood. Scantling.— Without doubt ironbark is the strongest and most durahle of Australian timber suitable for caps and _ girders. Grey Gum and Brush Box are also excellent. Turpentine is a good timber and only a little less durable than ironbark, and also possesses the advantage of being less open to attack by white ant, but it has not the strength. The wharf at the eastern side of Cockatoo Island was built with turpentine piles, girders, and headstocks over 24 years ago. The headstocks and most of the girders are in good condition where the water has not found its way into the interior of the beams. The cause of rottenness in wharf girders—which always decay before the caps—arises from the opening of the grain by the deck spikes. R 2 As Rs 1h — ah, ir See | A W | A Ww - A Ww The above formula resolves itself into ascertaining the proportion that each partial area bears to the whole area, and using that proportion as a co-efficient to apply to the mean of ail the rainfall records of the observing stations, Within each partial area. Thirty-five observing stations were used to determine the mean rainfall, the highest station being at Kiandra with an altitude of 4,640 feet, next in altitude being Nimitybelle, 3,465 feet; Adaminaby, 3,000 feet; Cooma, 2,660 feet; the other stations gradually decreasing in elevation as we go northerly to Gilgal, about 1,200 feet in height. The area of maximum rainfall sur- rounds Kiandra, which conforms to the accepted theory that rainfall increases with altitude, but the rule is not borne out when we compare Cooma with its elevation of 2,660 feet and Tumut 900 feet, as the following table will show. A peculiar belt of low precipitation surrounds Cooma on the Monaro Plains. It is situated in what might be termed a horse-shoe bend, with mountain ranges to the west, south, and east, which intercept the clouds and rob RAINFALL AND DISCHARGE OF THE MURRAY RIVER. LXI. them of their moisture before the plains are reached. Large tracts of these tablelands are without timber, and it is more than probable, in view of the experiences of other countries, that this may also have an influence on the low precipitation. OBSERVING STATIONS TYPICAL OF MAXIMUM, MINIMUM, AND MEAN RAINFALL. | Maximum Minimum Mean Rainfall Rainfall Rainfall Number of Rainy Days. Year. Station. Station. Station. Kiandra. Cooma, Tumut. Kiandra. | Cooma. Tumut. 1889 90:06 20°55 38°99 140 81 128 1890 59 09 | 2441 SD 95 126 Neal 1891 6489 33 35 37 19 138 163 106 1892 56 99 23 84 32°21 159 114 LOW, 1893 59 4.2 25°75 33 78 165 20 134 1894 73 06 22°21 40°93 148 120 120 1895 labo 11-19 26°26 107 85 100 1896 | 59 04 he ee No 20.06 128 87 107 1897 E 68:32 2413 27:44 128 Le 99 1898 71:14 BA 24:23 106 88 | 98 1899 56:98 19 50 28 37 3b 92 109 1900 VAST S 26°26 37°82 143 97 118 1901 | 63°88 ET 26°44, 124 72 92 1902 | 47:41 12 97 16 83 114 63 69 Mean rainfall) 63:49 10S) a3 31:80 all 91 108 ai OE CRUE 37 16 28 37 16 or mean | It may not be out of place to instance some of the vagaries of the season at various observing stations on the catchment during the drought year, 1902 :—* ADAMINABY—February 7th (Midsummer)—Remarkably heavy frost, destroyed all potato crops, and even cut up cabbages badly, being the first heavy frost experienced in February June (Midwinter)— October—Exceedingly dry the few showers that fell being almost useless for vegetation; during a residence of twenty-five years. Weather very warm, like spring. this is the first time during an experience of twenty-five years here that good and abundant rains have not fallen during October ; 1902 has been the driest year known by residents of over sixty years standing. * Rain and River Observations by H. C. Russeil, 1901-2. LXII. R. T. McKAY. CAVAN September—Bad spring, all creeks and gullies dry. December —Good rains during this month; 1902 has proved one of the driest years on record here. February (Summer)—Never saw river so low before. HometeigH— March 13th—Terrific hail-storm lasting 45 minutes, hailstones measured 5} inches in circumference, and remained in places on ground for over two weeks. November 12th and 13th.—Continuous red dust storm, lasted upwards of 40 hours. (QUEANBEYAN Stream Gauging.—The most accurate and precise method of determining the run-off of a catchment is by actual gauging of the stream. Observations in connection with the discharge of the Murrumbidgee at Gundagai, extend- ing over a number of years, have been tabulated by the author, and the results shewn in diagrammatic form. Velocity measurements have been made at frequent stages, with the latest type of current meter, and in combination With daily gauge readings, a rating table has been compiled showing the discharge for each inch on the gauge. Occas- ionally the river rose to higher stages than those at which current meter observations were made; the discharges corresponding with these unusually high levels have been deduced, partly by producing the curve of volumes, and partly by applying suitable velocities to the areas of water- way over the banks of the river. To determine the run-off in inches of the Murrumbidgee catchment at Gundagai from the measured discharges, the following formula has been used: — I = Depth in inches over catchment. D = Discharge in cubic feet per annum ee AT 28% & = D then 500 x 640 ~ 79009 X 144 = 9595 sannnmee Let Dy = Discharge in millions of cubic feet per annum Then I = —2“_= p, x -00005186 19283 RAINFALL AND DISCHARGE OF THE RIVER MURRAY, LXIII. S = Second feet per square mile. Ml Du ee ihen=s>— 31°536 x 8300 ~ 5617483 = Dx X *00000382 Example for Year 1890. D = 181,462,000,000 Dy — [81462 Then I 181462 x °00005186 = 9°41 Then S = Dy °00000382 = 181462 x °00000382 = 0°69 ANNUAL DISCHARGE, RAINFALL AND RUN-OFF OF MUR- RUMBIDGEE CATCHMENT AT GUNDAGAT. aoe ? Annual : jou ‘ Run-oft. ar | inches over | Gundacni i Rae Ree Second Depth in | Percentage Year. |hole ontch-| Gundneai in| Gundagat in| Second | Deptt in | discharged. | Gundagai. cubic feet. | perannum. (square mile] catchment, 1890 | 33:93 181,462 | 4,165,794 0 69 9-41 28 1891 | 37°95 256,486 5,888,134 0-98 13°30 30 1892 | 30°44, 165,826 3,806,839 0°63 8°60 29 1893 | 33°42 156,231 3,586,543 9°60 8°10 25 1894 | 39°86 270.887 6,218,703 1°03 14°05 30 1895 20°73 101,347 | 2,326,598 0°39 5°26 25 1896 25°06 74.956 1,720,702 0:29 3°89 15 S87 | 25°90 87,783 2,015,236 0 34 4°56 17 1898 | 22°49 83,515 2,032,033 O34 4°59 Zilt 1899 25°37 100.979 2,318,148 0°39 a 24 21 1900 | 34°71 ef bss VOLT 4,078,897 0°68 SoS) 26 1901 | 25°69 86,475 1,985,156 0°33 4°48 Ie 1902 17°76 17°421 399.929 0:07 0°90 5 1903 | 29 76 71,667 1,645,304 0:27 3°72 12 1904 | 25/51 66,708 1,531,392 0:25 3°46 13 Mean: 286 126,928 | 2,914,627 0:49 6°58 21:6 The diagram, Appendix *‘H,’’ has been plotted from the tabulated figures given in the foregoing statement and covers a period of 15 years, viz., from 1890 to 1904. The greatest annual precipitation during this period occurred in 1894, when 39°86 inches of rain was recorded and the run-off reached its highest point, viz., 35% of the rainfall. This run-off, if spread over the catchment area, would represent a depth of 14°05 inches, and the mean rate of flow would be 1°03 second feet per square mile of catchment. The total gauged discharge at Gundagai for the year 1894 LXIV. amounted to 6,218,703 throughout the year of 8,590 cusecs. R. T McKAY. acre feet, or a mean discharge The year of least precipitation was 1902 when 17°76 inches of rain fell, and only 5% ran off, APPENDIX E DIAGRAM Shoring annua precplitstion and urr-olF of the MURRUMBIDCFE FIVER ar CUMOALAT laichmens fre2 8300 sg ries Gauged dscharge im miltans of cite Peet shawn m bhtk bun. al 1 witches over cai chiment “ thus -~- Mean sniual precipldiion Cryer « af ome Millions of Cub fF per an 27900 } | 24 000 be 900 ! | 18 000 ae : = — me whl w= ele ee ws oo = —_—< i ‘ ' 1S 000 ——! ‘ ‘ ' = es |} 12 000 1 t ‘ Bead ‘, 9000 a ‘ t = a D i i i t ! | 6000 a acre feet per acre irrigated. The average dutyof selected examples having little loss in transit compiled from measurements made in the years 1899, 1900 and 1901, is given as 1°63 acre feet, 19°56 inches. The average of low duties is given as 5°7 acre feet, the average of all is 3°98. The variation in all examples is from 1°2 to 15°44. The average depth of water applied to some of the different crops is given as follows :— Alfalfa ... noo 4) SSL Potatoes we O94 feet Barley «.. erga li 3 nee Sug Beers...) 2p lous. Gorm. .:. beset ol Anges Wheat ... eel 2c OS amen Oats x feta tlio ae —— Orchard seats Oe Oye Average ... 2°31 feet eas —%s: SOrre sd Lae caer es The character of the soil, the temperature, and the wind movement, the cost of labour, introduce so many conditions that no fixed rule can be laid down. As regards charges for water, at Corona, or South Riverside, in Riverside County, the charge in 1900 was £3 per acre foot of water. XCIV. T. ROOKE. Owing to the drought, there was but one-half the usual amount of water delivered during the year; the supply was principally obtained from a pumping system. From numerous pumping plants near Azusa, in Los Angeles County, water has been sold during the years 1898 and 1900 at the rate of £3 12s. to £6 per acre foot. At Ontario, £2 per acre irrigated is charged each year. At Hollywood, a suburb of Los Angeles, 6d. a 1,000 gallons is charged, or £6 10s. per acre foot. The land is used for growing lemons. The annual charge for the irrigation of citrus lands in Southern California, varies from £1 to £6 per acre, and probably averages £2 per acre irrigated, the supply being from 12 to 36 inches in depth of irrigation water. In addition to this there is about 15 inches of winter rain. The citrus fruits need about twice as much water as the deciduous fruits, and alfalfa requires more than either. Value of Land.—The open range of the arid regions is generally stated to be capable of supporting a cow for every 20 or 30 acres. The same land, when watered and put in alfalfa, will frequently feed 10 times as many cattle, or in orchards with favourable climate will support a family of 3 or 5 persons. The open range may have a value of 2/1 per acre, and under irrigation the value may rise to £10 per acre, or even £100 per acre wihenjan orchards. In Arizona, with continuous warmth and sun- shine, and with the necessary water, intensive farming is practised, and it is estimated that a family of 5 persons can be well supported upon 20 acres or even less if covered with orchards. Between Kuna, Mexico, the Colorado River, and the desert Mesa to its east, there are 50,000 acres of fertile land, of which 10% is now under cultivation producing alfalfa, corn, wheat, and some Hgyptian cotton. Crops can be grown every month of the year. Alfalfa is cut from seven to eight times, producing 10 to 15 tons IRRIGATION WORK IN CALIFORNIA. XCV. annually per acre. Corn and maize bear with like abundance, two crops frequently being harvested in a year. Orange land with water, but without trees, is estimated to be worth from £50 to £60 per acre, and with bearing trees, the price ranges from £200 to £400 per acre, if the location is good, with first class water rights and navel trees. In the San Joaquin Valley, the average annual rainfall is less than 9 inches, and non-irrigated lands are not worth more than £2 an acre. The same lands irrigated and developed by orchards and vineyards are worth approxi- mately £100 per acre, and are said to yield net returns of from £10 to £20 per acre per annum. In Nevada the principal crops are alfalfa, which is cut 5 or 6 times a year, yielding about 1 ton per acre per crop. Barley, oats and wheat average 25 to 30 bushels per acre, and some instances of 75 bushels per acre have been known. Grapes thrive and yield good crops of excellent flavour, 3 acres having produced 5,000 Ibs. Pomegranates, peaches, apricots, vegetables and small fruits also do well. In 1902-3 improved lands sold for £5 per acre, and unimproved lands at 6s. to £1 per acre. In Oregon, land on which sugar beet is cultivated is said to be worth £40 per acre. Size of Farms.—Small farms are characteristic of suc- cessful irrigation. Throughout Utah the average size of an irrigated area is less than 30 acres. By means of this a family is supported in comfort, and there is a gradual increase in wealth, and there is an absence of the lone- liness and depression existing where the population is very sparse. Increase of Work.—It is not believed that the whole of this area is irrigable, but that about 10 times the area at present irrigated is so. It is stated that within quite a few years, tracts of country which were sandy wastes and xXCVI. T. ROOKE. suitable only for grazing after unusual rains have now been changed into prosperous agricultural centres, and that families are making a living, and getting on in the world by cultivating 15, 10 or even fewer acres of land which until the introduction of water had scarcely any value. In the season 1899 to 1900 a severe drought was experienced. For ten years there had been less than the normal rainfall, and for two years the rainfall had not reached one-half the average for the region. The supply from underground sources did not diminish as had been expected. The extra care, arising from the need for economy, had the result in some cases of increasing the yield. Mr. Newell remarks in his book on this subject, that there is probably a large amount of underground water to be obtained by the use of cheap power such as that obtained by electrical transmission. Artesian Wells.—Artesian wells are found in some parts of California. As the number is increased the pressure diminishes, and later still those wells near to the edge of the basin cease to be artesian. This condition of affairs has also been experienced elsewhere. All the artesian wells near Denver, Colorado, have ceased flowing, and water is now obtained from them by pumping. Out in the country lower down, the basin wells still flow. Some wells have ceased to flow because of mechanical defects, they have either choked, or the water escapes into pervious rocks below the surface. In some localities where wells were abandoned because the water did not rise to the surface, or the flow was unsatisfactory, the casings have been drawn for use elsewhere. The water has continued to rise from the bottom of the well and to escape into the higher porous strata, permitting a continual outflow from the artesian water-bearing rocks, but it is unnecessary to dwell at length on this aspect of the subject. Water IRRIGATION WORK IN CALIFORNIA. XCVII. obtained from these sources is frequently impregnated with gypsum, much land irrigated with this water has been greatly injured by the unskilful use of water. It is believed, however, that by careful consideration, it will be possible to reclaim large areas of arid land, without ultimately injuring it by the alkaline waters. It is stated that in some places water containing as much as 400 parts per million of alkali is being used successfully for irrigating. The extent of the arid regions in the U.S of America is roughly one-half of the whole area. It is understood that regions having 20 inches rainfall per annum or less are arid. The extent of the arid regions of Australia does not exceed two-thirds of the whole area. The work of reclamation in America appears to have been started by private enterprise. As its success and possibilities became apparent and as the work increased, water rights called for legislation. Progress continued and justified the creation of a Government Reclamation Department. The officers of this department have been selected from amongst the employees of the most successful commercial enter- prises, the most skilful scientists. These men investigate conditions prevailing in arid regions, the best methods of reclaiming land, of conserving and using water, the primary object being to make homes for the workers, for those people without large capital, but with health, strength, ability and willingness for hard work. No settler is allowed to take up more than 160 acres of land. To those interested in the subject, complete information can be obtained on reference to the publications of the U.S. Gov. Reclamation Department, andto Mr. Newell’s excellent book on Irrigation to both of which the author is indebted for much of his data. As remarked above, Mr. Newell is the Chief Hnugineer of the Reclamation Service, and is probably the highest authority on the subject of irrigation in America. 7—Oct. 17, 1906. "ee a) XCVIII. T. ROOKE, Before any scheme for pumping water by electricity in Australia could be suggested, it was necessary to produce electricity at a price to compare with that for which it is produced in California. Until recently, at all events, cheap electricity in California was derived from water power, although coal and oil fuel are now being used to some extent also. Following the great improvements recently made in steam turbines, and the latent possibilities of large gas engines, it is probable that much greater developments will take place in the near future. There are practically no water powers in Australia as in California and resort must be made to coal. Until quite recently, electricity could not be purchased in Sydney at a lower price than 3d.a unit. This price was not unreasonahle taking all things into account. The author does not think it is unfair however, to say that recently there has been a gvenuine attempt to provide cheap electricity, not merely for lighting purposes, but for industrial purposes generally. The average daily load curve on the Council’s plant shows that during a large part of the day much of the machinery is idle, and must by the very nature of things remain idle. Suppose, however, that it was not idle, the additional cost to the Council would not exceed ‘342d. per unit sold. All charges except variable charges remain unaltered. It is better then, that the Council should sell at any price exceeding say $d. a unit during those portions of the 24 hours, than that the plant should remain idle. The cost of transmission lines and the losses in transmission, within a radius of 50 miles at any rate, need not exceed the present costs, provided that overhead construction, instead of underground construction is adopted as in America, and provided that the voltage is raised suitably. A scheme for transmitting electricity inland some 50 miles or so, through Ashfield, Burwood, IRRIGATION WORK IN CALIFORNIA. XCIX. Strathfield, Parramatta and Penrith with a branch to Liverpool is quite practicable as an engineering enterprise, and has the following advantages in respect of the irrigation problem. The total equipment of transmission lines, pumps, motors, transforming devices, and so on, could probably be installed, and put to work at a cost not exceeding £100,000. There would certainly be a return on the Capital Expenditure, because there would be a sale of electricity for lighting, power, and industrial purposes, in townships traversed by transmission lines. The difficulties and delays in obtaining the best results from irrigated land, which must always be expected under new conditions of soil and climate, would be of small consequence, because the enterprise would not be absolutely dependent on these results for earning revenue. It would not be necessary to sink large sums of money in works which would be of no value if the scheme proved unsuccessful, a large portion of the cost would be incurred in electrical apparatus which could be used in connection with other works, should the irrigation prove unsuccessful. If successful, it would be the means of educating farmers to irrigate, and to practice what is known as intense cultivation. A skilled class of men would thus arise in readiness to turn to account waters conserved in dams and distributed by ditches. Such works cost great sums of money; they depend entirely on the irrigator for their success or failure. It is not necessary to build a large power house for the production of electricity for trans- mission, two of these already exist in Sydney, from either of which, power could be transmitted during certain periods of every 24 hours. To anyone who travels in Kurope or America, the immense progress which is being made in the application of electricity to all kinds of old industries and to the GC. T. ROOKE. development of new industries, cannot fail to make an impression. Electric transmission is an accomplished fact, and a successful commercial proposition. If electricity is supplied at 1d. per unit, to motors operating pumps witha 50% overall efficiency, the cost of raising from a depth of 100 feet sufficient water to cover an acre of land one inch would be approximately 1/5, or if irrigation is practised on the same scale as in California, the cost of electricity would be from 23/- to 67/- per acre per annum. As stated before, the average cost of irrigating citrus fruits in Southern California varies from £1 to £6 per acre, and probably averages £2an acre. It would appear that there are possibilities in the proposition. The author does not Suppose that the City Council could possibly take up such a scheme, and is not prepared to suggest who should do so. The possibilities, the far reaching effects of the success of such a scheme justify further investigation, if they do not justify the experiment, particularly in a new country. TRANSVERSE TESTS OF JARRAH. Cl. TRANSVERSE TESTS or JARRAH MabE aT SYDNEY THCHNICAL COLLEGE. By JAMES NANGLE, F.I.A. [With Plates XXIII.—XXV.] [Read before the Engineering Section of the Royal Society of N. 8. Wales, September 19, 1906. | TABLES No. I. and Il. contain results of transverse tests made on twenty pieces of West Australian Jarrah. The test pieces were approximately 2 inches by 2 inches in cross section, and all but two were 24 inches long. They were tested for moduli of rupture and elasticity on a span—in all cases but two—of 22 inches, in the 50,000 pounds Olsen testing machine at the Sydney Technical College. A piece of wood about 23 inches long was placed under the centre bearing piece of the machine, on top of each specimen. Deflections were taken at every 200 pounds of load by means of a deflectometer. ‘This deflectometer consists of a straight edge which bears on pins, in the neutral plane of specimen, over each bearing. Attached to the straight edge isa magnifying arm or pointer. The short arm of the pointer is attached to a pin in the specimen; the end of the other arm indicates, to an enlarged degree, the deflec- tion on a scale which is attached to one end of the straight edge. The advantage of the apparatus is that the error due to crushing at bearings is eliminated from the deflec- tion readings, since the latter are taken, not from the bed of the testing machine, but from the neutral plane of the specimen. The load taken for the calculation of the modulus of elasticity was about one-fifth of the breaking load. TISTSLI | SSFZT =) SOSBIOAY : wWOIsue: i OV9GLZT | 2086 | GZ-129 | F ae vs ag zz | ste | 202 |eog |e¢| al ge « G9O0G9T | GPCIT 099 Vv WOIST} |OG8Z ‘ uoisuay ut AWG SI[s |OF9z t €Z | SI-> | 80% | $0-% | ba | © | 62 ‘ PESTOLT | OLZZT OPP L MOISE} |O80E 2 F « L8TPPST | ShLE ror | ¢ moIsuey nae ‘ Z900S9T | OS90T OFS g WoIssatdut0d |002z cc | GI-F | €0-2 | 60-2 | PZ | N | 82 ke L2Gv8Sl | YPSOT OST 9 UoIssa1d M109 puB UOISUEY |00LZ Go | PID | 00-6 | €OS | VO | WW} CE . PIOOILT | LVESCT 9-16¢ 9 TOIsdod} NETS co | GIP | £06 | £0-6 | F2 | I | PE $8 ESOS2PVL | 8662T 6S9 +S) - ~ aa C6ZE ’ 2a | SL-b | 80%¢ | £02 | F2 | M| SS | 906T ‘4IuL 9 : TIVIPPL | 2c90t 60:-VES IT WOIsuey, |GLGZ ; ee ‘ a woissead 0d |9gpz J 6G | 10-F | 0-6 | 66-T | 2 £ | 02 [906T “9UNL ZZ S GLELPOT | 6EOTIT G-LES él WoIsseid MOD PUB MOIS} |G8z ’ GG | FO-F | 20-6 G | ¥G en s <{ OZLIIGAZT | TLZéeT T8-86G TI WOISU94 |G163 «“ a uorsseadunoo 448s |gegz 5 | &4 ¥| 06 i Ce es n me S9LZP91T | S880T | 29-848 | 2 worssaid mod |919Z : ae a mo1su94 |909z t Go | S6E O02 | 66-T | 2; O| QAI Kb TPC6EVT | OS86 O0€ 8 UOISU9} OOPS 6G | GO-F | 10-6 6) | | Ol ae 9T6F9ET | SLZ90T GGG Or uortsse1dm0d puv UOISU} |0GGZ zz | 468 | 102 | 86-1 | F2 | W| ST | 9061 ‘oung g GTZ982e | LL89T G.zée | Zr UoIsds} 0668 | 26 | 66-8 | 46-1 | 66-1 | #2 | A] 8 a SSEIPOI | SSE6 8Z-PIE L TOISUS4 |N0GG a4 6€ | 96-T | 66-1 VG O14 < GSCPals | LOSPI GSE EE WOoIsdo4 |0OGE oo | SOF | £0-6 | 661 | 16) 2A | 9 a GEScrIsS | GP66T T-694 LI pes aa dae? co | 248-6 | 246-1 | 96-1 | 72 | VIG 9061 Av gt LI€EFOGS | €Z89I 9 82S PSR a: MOISso1aulod OYOOP ; UOIsU24 (D68E § ~Z \90T-F | GO-G | €0-3 | 96 | & G SO6I “AON $23 PEELIIS | OPSOT . ca \OO8E 2 | 0O-F | 10-6 | 10-2 | 92 | T T | SO6T “AON ZI ‘urot 10d : 2 bb oe) a n Ayo seq | oanjgdny | spanod “Uru saints EREn OD 2 88 5 o - e B iS jo jo ut poydde) ur4say, read beecertires’ | smh sneer es rs S 2 |B & "480, JO o}"q = snnpoy, | snjnpoy peor |jo eur, ase peo) F < BP 1g 8 3) ae 78a Ai | ‘soyour ur sueuttoeds yo oz1g 7 ‘“AVUAVE AO SLSHUL ASHHASNVUL AO SLTIOSHY ONIMBHS—'I AIEVL CIIl. TRANSVERSE TESTS OF JARRAH. 61d: T&é. ITé: GG: SG: i SS | OO ew eee, OO 0052 0022 0002 009T 00FT 00cT 000T 008 VcO- 910. ¥60- 9T0- G10- STO- STO- 810: 9T0- 8I0- GO: cO- 60: 800: 660: V10- €10- L00- 002 “SGNi10d NI GVOT “AVaAAIVE AO SNAWIOGdS AO (our we Jo sy4ooT UI) SNOLLOM TAA ONIMOHS—II AIAVAL adtMoRREomHAacnoshys *1OqUIn NT uewmtvedg Iam much indebted to Mr. R. T. Baker of the Techno- logical Museum who has kindly undertaken to supply timber specimens properly classified for the testing work which I I have also to acknowledge the help given by Messrs. Farrell and Martin, two of the advanced propose to carry on. students, who have given much assistance with the making and reduction of the tests. CIV. JAMES NANGLE. Mr. NANGLE’S EXHIBIT OF MICROSCOPIC SECTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN TIMBER. The exhibit consisted of transverse sections of Ironbark, Red Slaty Gum, Tallow-wood, Blackbutt and other species of Kucalyptus, also photomicrographs of the sections. Mr. Nangle stated that he had for some time been engaged in an examination by the microscope of the species of Eucalyptus which closely resembled each other to the naked eye, with a view to detecting differences of an exact character. He hoped to be able to determine something in the way of a type specimen for each species when subjected to micro- scopic examination. The subject was a large one, and as yet but little progress has been made. With great diffi- dence he brought the specimens and the results he had so far obtained before the Section. By the kindness of Dr. Quaife the specimens were projected, greatly magnified, on to the large screen, and members were able to judge for themselves as to what differences were noticeable. Mr. Nangle stated that so far he had noticed, with cer- tainty, the following points:—1. That in sound dense timbers like ironbark, the vascular cells were small, (compare Plate 23, figs. 1, 2, and Plate 24, fig. 3). It will be seen that in Ironbark the cells are much smaller. 2. The medullary rays were strong and well defined, (compare Plate 24, fig. 4, and Plate 25, fig. 5). The medullary rays are much stronger in the Ironbark than in the Red Slaty Gum. In the latter they are deformed. 3. That scattered cells in the woody tissue were sparse, (compare Plate 24, fig. 4s and Plate 235, fig. 5). Some timbers, like Tallow-wood and Blackbutt, were very much alike in transverse section, but a difference was noticeable in longitudinal sections, in which, in the case of Tallow-wood, the vascular cells were shorter than in Black- butt on account of the greater twisting and interlocking of TRANSVERSE TESTS OF JARRAH. CV. grain in the former timber. From what he had learned, Mr. Nangle thought that an architect or engineer might be able by means of the microscope to say as to whether a timber belonged to a good class or not. In so far as this, the method of microscopic examination together with evidence afforded by the naked eye would prove useful. It had to be remembered that the engineer and architect had to judge the timber in the form of scantling, and had not the means of judging by bark, leaves, or fruit. Mr. J. H. Maiden addressed the Section at the invitation of the Chairman. He expressed his pleasure that Mr. Nangle had taken up this work of utilizing the microscopic structure of our hardwoods for purposes of diagnosis. He had done some work in this direction himself, but pressure of other duties had caused it to be laid aside; still, he had never ceased to take an interest in the subject that Mr. Nangle had begun so auspiciously. He ventured to refer to his remarks as President of this Society (these Proceed- ings, Vol. XXxI., 58, 1897). He also exhibited one ‘‘ book”’ of 100 of Nordlinger’s beautiful wood-sections for the microscope, which would be models for sections of Austra- lian woods. Indeed Nordlinger’s sections, of which the speaker has 1,100, include a number of Australian ones. The work on which Mr. Nangle has embarked is so vast that it might well be taken up by a number of men working to a common end, otherwise the present generation would not see the work far advanced. He wished Mr. Nangle every good wish in his research. (exy,) INDEX. A PAGE PAGE Abnormal drought of 1902. uxxv.| Bauschinger machine tests ... 51 Abstract of proceedings ca fT Actinic Sunlight, distribution of 24 Address. Presidential ... A 1 Alessio, Dr. A., visit of 31 Alice Springs, languages of tribes about 114 Alkanna tinctoria 40 Alphitonia excelsa 43 Analyses of Chocolate shale 154, 155 Roman glass me mols Tufaceous sandstone 154, 155 Angophora subvelutina... by 8-0.40.¢ Anoptotheca ? australis 133 Artesian area in N.S. W. . LLL in Queensland 7 LET wells in California 5 CN AlE Astronomical work to be done vastness of the oi Astylospongia fossils ... 132 Atrypa fossils ... : ono dues) Auditors, Honorary, 1906 aye —— 1907. : KONO Australasian Association for the the Advancement of Science Session in Adelaide Xexe Vali Australia, some native tribes of a he Sb exxvalle Australian Astronomers, con- ference of . 29 — hardwoods — cIv., ]xi. history, chapters in early xxviii. lichens 141 —— summer thunder- storms XLIXx. —— timber, microscopic sec- tions of Clive.) exas Azara microphylla 40 B Baker, Richard T., F.u.s., Vitis opaca, F'.v.M., and a chemi- cal investigation of its enlarged rootstock (Tuber) 52, XXl. — The Australian Melaleucas and their essential oils ... Banks, Sir Joseph, Memorial.. Barren Jack, ED ee reservoir at... , S00 LXXVI. 60 36 Bender, F., Hon. Auditor,1906-7 xxx. Bibliography of Australian, New Zealand, and South Sea Island lichens Bladen, F. M., F.R.G.S., F.R.H.S., Lecture on Chapters in Early Australian History xxviil. Blood-sucking insects and tropi- cal diseases.. Yr. ye 141 Books purchased i in 1906... Mii. Bonney, R. S.,8.4., petrological description of chocolate shale and tufaceous sand- stone from the Narrabeen series 154 Botanical Congress at Brussels 1910.. bre is 76 —— at Vienna ... 34, 74 —— nomenclature 74, XXIV. Bronteus fossils 132 Building and investment fund iv. materials, testing of 45, xvi. Burchartz, H., the testing of building materials on abras- ion by the sand blast appa- ratus : ‘ 45, XV1. Cc Cairngorm PSX Calymene fossils Reon ey Cannizzaro, Stanislao, Profes- sore, acknowledging elec- tion as Hon. Member Vike Carnolite é .. XX1il. Chau-an tribe, sociology of 52) 105 Cheel, Edwin, bibliography of Australian, New Zealand and South Sea Island lichens 14 xxx Chonetes Culleni.. 136, = Clarke Memorial Pande -—— —— lectures by Prof. E. W. Skeats, D. sc., F.G.S., Xi., XXVI1. Claudopora fossils 1382 Clematis pubescens 42 Cobra wood borer .. XLVI. Comesperma calymega ... 42 flavum 42 PAGE Comesperma ericinum ... 42 retusum 4.2 sylvestre 42 Concentric structure of gold nuggets : Sp koi Concrete, sand for 1. lviii. reinforced 33 Congress (botanical) Brussels 76 Paris 74, 76 Vienna 74, 76, 79 Conocardium Davidis, sp. nov. 1382 Construction of wharves xXXIV., XXX. Cook, W. E,, M.c.E., BM. Inst. C.z., washing and grading sand for concrete a5 hpi Crinoid stems .. ese aly Cyathophyllum fossils 132, 138 Cystiphyllum australicum D Date palm plantation at Lake Harry, S.A. eb ¢ Decimal system as AP ye! Dental section, da apn form- ation xx. Devonian rocks near Orange 130, XXViii. Diphyphyllum gemmiforme 138 Docker, His Honor Judge, m.a., lecture on ‘‘ The scenery of Mount Kosciusko”’ Sates WLS Dolomite, origin of, lecture by Prof. E. W. Skeats Xl., Xxvi. Donations Res Aa, Double Star, lost = 23 Drainage area of the Darling river -LXxI. Murrumbidgee river LIx. Drought of 1902, effect of LXXV. Drosera erythrorrhiza ... 41 gigantea 41 stolonifera... ee | Whittakeri 39, 41 Dustorms in New South Wales Ta: E Early Australian eae chap- ters in ; ; XXVIlil. Earthquakes... 7 Eclipse (total) of the ‘Sun, 30 August, 1905 ae Economic section : Effects of forests on rainfall Electricity, transmission of Lxxkar,, Ix: rele VIL. 138 (Xxvi.) PAGE Endophyllum ? fossils 131 Encrinurus ? fossils 132 Engineering Section ... 6, xii., lvii. Conversazione xXx., LIX. Epps, W., Hon. Auditor XXX. Eucalyptus dealbata Xxli globulus 63, 66 — Luehmanniana 4.2 obtusiflora... 42 propingua ... SKCRSION virgata es sg ae Ewing, T., B.Sc, the rate of decay of the excited radio- activity from the atmo- sphere in Sydney... 158, xxxi. Exchanges oa ae Be 5 Exhibits 1ix., xv., Xvill. xx, XXIV}, XXVi.5 EK | Farrer Memorial aS ag ee | Favosites fossils 131, 133, 138 Fell, David, M.L.A.,C.A.A., Hon. Auditor 1906 ExXx. Financial statement for the year ended 31 March, 1906 iii. Fischer, Emil, Prof., acknow- ledginge election as Hon. Member . | WEE, Forests, effect of, on aia LVII. Fusanus acuminatus 43 —— persicarius... 43 G Gauging streams ‘ «» LTE General account ill. Gentiana saxosa 41 Gold nuggets from New Guinea 1615 xxi, Goulburn river drainage area LXVII. Grading sand for concrete 1., lviii. Great Dividing Range influence on rainfall LI. Guré or avenging party 124 Guthrie, F. B., ¥.L¢., Bes, Lecturette on “ The Plant’s supply of Nitrogen ”’ xii. Halysites australis... op hed — cratus ; 131 — lithostrotonoides 131 —— peristephesicus ... 131 — pycnoblastoides ... 131 — Sussmilchii oy, owing See (xxvii. ) PAGE Hamlet, W. M., F.1.c., F.c.s., Lecturette on ‘‘ The meas- urement of human energy” xvii. Hargrave, Lawrence, Port Sydney 5 (GS, Sai Helichrysum baccharoides 0) Heliolites fossils ste 132, 133 Homalium rufescens . 43 Honorary Auditors ... rane NING Members . 2 Hutton, Capt. F. Wiss the late 2 Hymenophyllum bivalve 44, 45 pollyanthos 44, 45 villosum Arch I Intake beds of N.S.W. LIV Intensity of dustorms in N.S. W. L. International rules of botanical nomenclature 74, XXIV. Ipomea heterophylla 4.0 Irrigation work in California LXXxit., lx. Iron present in Roman glass 163 Issue of the Society’s volume in parts eX Ville Jarrah, tests of {ee CIs Jasminum simplicifolium 42 Jupiter’s Satellites (6th and 7th)... 20, 21 Klaatsch, Dr. Hermann, “ Tra- vels in northern and north- western Australia, amongst the aboriginal population” xxxi. Kurnu tribe, sociology of 95 L Languages native, naming of 123 Languages of tribes about Alice Springs 114 Lectures, popular Science a 6 Lenehan, H. A., F.R.A.S., Presi- dential Address ae 1 Lepidodrendron australe 187, 138, 139 Library .. of 5 Lichens, Australian ete. 141 Limnoria, wood borer xxxXVII., XLV., XLVI. terebans sos OKs Lingulia gregaria 136, 137 Inppia nodiflora... sos» 40 PAGE Liversidge, A., LL.D., F.R.S., gold nuggets from New Guinea showing a concen- tric structure 161, xzx1. Logania linifolia 41, 42 ovata ; 42 Loritya vocabulary 119 Lusby, S. G., B.a., the rate of decay of the excited radio- activity from the atmo- sphere in Sydney... 158, xxxi. . IM Macrozamia Fraseri Oc spiralis Seco) OXOGIE Magnetic Storms and Sunspots 24 Maiden, J. H., Notes on some plants which in drying stain paper.. 39, Xv. —— The International rules of botanical nomenclature 74, XXiv. Manganese present in Roman glass : 163 Mann, HE. A. and Wallas, Abs ie Investigation of the disease in cattle known as ‘rickets’ or ‘wobbies,’ and examin- ation of the poisonous principle of the Zamia palm Seas ea OX Mars ; 18 Mathews, R. EL “notes: on some native tribes of Australia 95, xxviii. Mean rainfall computations... Lrx. Measurement of human energy xvii. Melaleuca leucadendron 60 linarvifolia 62, 65, 66, 69 — thymifolia 62, 65, 66, 67, 68 Memorial to Sir Joseph Banks 36 Members, roll of a 1 — Honorary... S00 ae 2 Meristina ? australis ... 133 Meteorites a 25 Meteorology, lectures on 27 Microscopic sections of Aus- tralian timber CIV Moon’s surface, changes or ... 16 Moore, Charles, the late, por- trait of i, . XX., XXV. Mucophyllum crateroides 131 Muntz metal XXXIX. Murray river at Morgan LxXxXVIII. basin XLVII, (xxviii. ) PAGE Murray river discharge soo REVS. Murrumbidgee river catch- ment at Gundagai LTT. — drainage area LIX. Mc McKay, 5: A ibs Assoc. M. Inst. C.E., the available water deriv- able from gathering grounds, the loss, the reason for such loss, and the relation between rain- fall and discharge of the Murray river and_ its tributaries... TWiT eK N ‘Nail head spar’ 2G bls Nangle, James, F.1.4., Trans- verse tests of jarrah made at the Sydney Technical College “oh Ot oe Native languages, naming of some ; 123 shoes oF soar, ben tribes of Australia 95, xxviii. New apparatus for testing building materials on abrasion 48 New South W alos’ dnctoeme a: iv < om; intake beds of LIV. — unequal distribution of rain in mk LV. New Zealand lichens ... 141 Nitrogen, plant’s supply of ... xii. North Pole, expedition to 32 Nutrition of man xviii., xxvi, xxx. O Obituary of members.. 2 Observatory, Mount Wilson . 28 Yerkes 27 Officers and Members of Council v. Oliver, Daniel, Lu.p., F.R.s., acknowledging election as Hon. Member viii. Oncoba spinosa ... 40 Orthisina ? fossils 132 Orthis ? fossils... 133 Pachypora fossils 132, 133 Papers read in 1905 ... ie 5 Paris International Exhibition of 1900 75, 76 PAGE Pentamerus Knightii... 133 Siissmilchii ae .. «133 Periodicals purchased in 1906 lii. Photomicrographs of sections of Australian timber... CIv. ‘Pirrimbir Expedition’ we) LS Planet, solidification of the interior of a aaa Plant’s supply of nitrogen xii. — which in drying stain paper 5 20. X¥. Poisonous principle of the Zamia Palm xi Popular Science Lectures, 1906 : Vii. June2l ‘Some results of Archzo- logical Work in Jerusalem,’ by Professor Anderson Stuart, i) Dy 108 PD) July 19 ‘Our water supply from source to distribution’ by J. M. Smail, M. Inst. C.E., Engineer- in-Chief, Board of Water Supply and Sewerage, and E.S. Stokes, M.B., D.P.H., Medical Officer, Board of Water Supply and Sewerage. August ]5 ‘Sir Joseph Banks, the ‘ Father of Australia,’’ by J. H. Maiden, F.u.s., Director, Bo- tanic Gardens. Sept. 23 ‘Recent Developments in Long Distance Electrical Trans- mission,’ by T. Rooke, Assoc. M. Inst. C. E., City Electrical Engineer. Nov. 15 ‘Chapters in Early Aus- tralian History,. “by 2 ave Bladen, F.R.G.S., F.R.H.S.,(Lond.) Port Sydney ei aioe 69 xxiv. Presidential Address ... ane 1 Proceedings, Engineering Sec- tion ... a ae lvii. — Society... ah ome Ne R Rainfall, affected by forests... LvII. and Murray river dis- . charge . XLVI, -—— Great Dividing Range .. LI. — of the Darling river _ LXXV. —— relation to run off | LILI. —— unequal distribution of .. Lv. Receptaculites australis... 138 Reflecting powers of glass 26 silvered glass mirrors 26 Reinforced concrete 33 Reservoir at Barren Jack LXXVI. Rhynconella pleurodon 133, 136, 137, 128 ‘ Rickets’ disease in cattle ... xxi. Boll of Members bee ae 1 a (xxix. ) PAGE PAGE Roman glass, analyses of ... 163! Summer thunder-storms in Rooke, T., assoc. M. Inst. C.E., Irri- Australia ... a a RIES, gation work in California, and its relation to the transmission of electricity 1p. O.Siyy Ibe Rules, proposed alterations of Vili., XXX. Russell, H. C., B.A., C.M.G., F.R.S., the late... ae waa il Ss Sand blast apparatus... 45, Xvi. —— for concrete Tee, Lyall Saturn ... 22 secondary shadow of rings 22 Science and Education He ies Scolopia Gerrardi si ieee A) Sections, Dental an ct i OX: Economic... = Ree ae —— Engineering 1G, X11, lvls Sea-walling ... wea. Shale, chocolate, analyses Of, 155 Skeats, Prof. E. W., p.sc., F.G.s., Clarke Memorial lectures X1., XXV1. Smith, Henry G., Fr.c.s., Vitis opaca, F.v.M.,and achemi- cal investigation of its enlarged rootstock (tuber) 52. xxi. — The Australian Melaleucas and their essential oils... - 60 Society’s annual Mak issue im parts: . ... . Xvili. Sociology of the Chau-an tribe 105 Kurnu tribe a Hy OO South Sea Island lichens... 141 Sphaeroma, wood borer XxXVII., XLY., XLVI. Spirifer disjuncta .. 136, 137, 188 Yassense ... Soe a. 13S Stains, plant 39, Xv. Stream gauging 5 Lapiity measurement of the Dar- ling river at Wilcannia LxXIII. Stromatopora fossils ... aAoee Dols) Structure of gold nuggets... 161 Strychnos psilosperma ... we «= 42 Siissmilch, C. A., F.a.s., Note on the Silurian and Devon- ian rocks occurring to the west of the Canoblas moun- tains near Orange, New South Wales . 180, xxviii. Sun spots and magnetic storms 24 Sydney harbour, wharf con- struction fe RRL 5 ROR Syringopora fossils... . 1388 T ‘Tea Trees’ i 60, 65 Telescope ‘Bruce’... re” // Teredo or ship worm XXXVII. Testing of building materials 45, XV. Tests of voids in bluestone ... xx. broken metal... Soh, Sle —— sandstone... : DOG, Thunder-storms i in Australia XLIX. ‘Thyme-leaved Tea Tree’ ... 62 Timber wharf construction DO Noy .0.0.G MAb: Transmission of electricity Tx xoxdIe, xe Transverse tests of jarrah ... CI. Tropical diseases and blood- sucking insects ven UM EXE Tryplasma liliformis ... eee 53 Tufaceous sandstone,analyses of 155 U Unequal distribution of rain Tha NOS ahve aac : LV. Upper Silurian recks near Orange 131 — Murray catchment at Jingellic ... ae aap PLAXaVE V Veronica alpina... ae we 48 arenaria ... a00 ow, 45 —— formosa ... SOC sca Pa -—— fructiculosa wee ww. «43 — loganioides be whe «AS — Lyall 206 tists w. «= 3 —— nivea ae ae so — saxatilis ... eee cists pecaie —— serpyllifolia ae wea ae — Traversi ... “8 = («AD vernicosa ... sels fos aS Vitis augustissima deer ba Ge clematidea... 506 Soo as) —— opaca veg ce, De Oo Ke —trifolia ... wea OS Vocabulary, Loritya ... Sporty) Volcanoes of Victoria, lecture by Prof. E. W. Skeats xi., xxvi. (xxx.) "| PAGE Voids in bluestone .. xXx. | White,C.J.,analysesof Roman — in broken metal... 5 ah TR glass from Silchester, with “f — sandstone... 5? ‘up. POS special reference to the WwW Walsh, H. D., BA.1., T.c. Dub., M. Inst. c.E., Notes on wharf construction, Sydney har- Y bour fe .. xXxiv., lix. | Yellow metal’ :2 . XXXVIII. : Walton, S. G., analyses of Yerkes Observatory ... el ae chocolate shale and of tufaceous sandstone from Z the Narrabeen Series 154, xxxi.| Zaphrentis fossils _... is 2 138 Washing sand for concrete 1., lvili. | Zodiacal Light... oe 7 ee Wharf construction ... XXIV., XXX. Spdnep: . amount of Manganese and Iron present 163, 3kxn ‘ Wobbles’ disease in cattle... xxi. _ F. W. WHITE, PRINTER, 344 KENT STREET. 1907, a vy Bee aura CONTENTS. ‘ Arr. XIV.— Analyses of Roman Glass from Silchester, with special Arr. XVIL—The available water derivable from gathering Z PagE Arr. XI.—Analyses of Chocolate Shale and of Tufaceous Sand- stone from the Narrabeen Series. By S. G. WauTon, Junior as Demonstrator, University of Sydney. With a petrological _description by R. S. BunNnrEy, B.A. (Communicated by Prof. LivERSIDGE, F.R.S.) BL Nae Ee es aes w» =154. - Arr. XII.—The rate of decay of He: Excited Rudio-nctivsty from ti ea eer the Atmosphere in Sydney. By S.G. Lussy, B.a., and T. Bae EwInG, B.Sc. (Communicated by Prof. Poutock.) .. ca oS a ata Agr. XIII. —Gold Nuggets from New Guinea showing a concentric . structure, By A. Liversipae, LL.D., F:R.S., Professor of 0) Chemistry in the University of Sydney. [With Plates] ... 161 — ti . reference to the amount of Manganese and Iron present. yee By Gad: WHITE, Caird Scholar, University of Sydney. (Communicated by Prof. Liverstpex, F.R.S. iy BS) eh we 163 > ENGINEERING SECTION. Art. XV.—Washinz and Grading Sand for Concrete. He W. BE. | -Coox, M.C.E., M.Inst.C.B. ... at ee sé: ‘ ee I. Art. XVI.—Notes on Wharf CMG foes Sydney Harbour. By ae gS, H. D. Watsu, B.A.1., T.c. Dub., M. Inst, OB. [With Plates] i) SREY ‘afeaie grounds, the loss, the reason for such loss, and the relation between rainfall and discharge of the Murray River andits tributaries. By R. T. McKay, Assoc. M. Inst, 0.6. [ With Plates] XLVI. ART. XVIIL.—Irrigation Work in California, and its relation to — the transmission of electricity. By T. Rooks, assoc. M. Inst,C E. LXXXI. Art. XIX. —Transverse tests of Jarrah made at Sydney Technical — College. By James Naneur, v.1.a. [With Plates] ... “Apsrract OF Penne cel he : ee tee aoe -PRoceEpINGs OF THE HNGirne ee ECTION .. ye Inpex TO VoLuME 5.4) Paes oH Ee es ees ‘ see eee 1 x - : P i i Z i +e i ‘ : : : ; a Te n r J eh i : S + y ot i t = = - = us 7 — ws if ‘ > ty : 1 ’ “ ‘ x i. - = a : SF A \e : : an 1 ‘ : Now - x 3 j i - : } 5 - z = . 4 J. | ; : 2 : oe oe ee | “5 = yi cs a ip a . n 4 ; as ; L. = ‘ a o 3) = 2 J - = : — . r ez: : : pi * y 5 x ‘ ; { : 7 hie ; ‘ > 7 ; : = ‘ : ae . : iG te > ue ‘ ; : - = ° 1 " is i CY ae ; : ' , - ; —— : peal >) oe a = ; r, ; o : _ : : “ 5 ‘ ‘ \ : : - J : : ~ "7 . 2 ° ; “a ~ y : ; : : : 4 F ate , F : ; N A .¢ ee : * 1 . - W 7 : : ; : = 7 Ho A © mod ea ; : . i aa : r ‘ i ye ; 7 : . a F € 7 ; * d $: 2 . - a ‘ 4 b amd e ‘ ( 2 x f ' _ ‘ ‘ herr - ‘i if ji 4 : ; ; rs es oa : ~ ty. ; j ; ie \ y , ~~ . : i“ fi f a = ‘ . \ r - y } ; rn ; } ; = ' \ : \ = 2 e \j 7 i 1 ; \ 7 : i = ; > é : { | 3 = i a : : oa ' hah 4 ¥ ; ew {=e ‘ 1h st ose ake oa ‘ae sh ’ - i . i ; } er ne ; , F ; ’ ; fs) ery . iat \ ‘ : fs! 1 1, me : 7 im f “ if , a a 5 ? sae A a 7 i , : + ¢ 7 - aah ii \ 4 a - q ty 7: ‘ f< : > oi ms { : R R i = ee eat mea 7 ia : 7 u ; : ’ i a a i . ‘ . , ; 1 : Z A 7 ie wl ‘ - mar ; ~ ; \ ' 4 i 7 a ; / : *, ; fi i Nee SW 7 a 4 : i ; ) - Tay eae ‘o> ‘ Oa \ ee: ee ee lis ‘ nate i i ‘ aed! \ ..2 Si oo i ~~ ; : ; ; : n é : \ , i S 2 : J 4 ; —t : : a 7. ‘ i . mi =, ; i ; em ee Re ; : ; ; ots f : eer ‘ ’ : Oe 1 iy r : 0 , 0 ea, 4, (= ; oe ; Des. a ome N ‘ : i : y , i i ; . 5 : t y . i * , ah R! t j \ —_ F : j f i vs ene - Sees ) y < ve ; Me : i 4 Oe ™ A = » , Ay NN b i Ly a u, At Miia a. ne Ry ITT | i —=«3. 9088 01308 4348